345man Aa

GE
Digital Energy
345
Transformer Protection
System
Transformer protection and control
Instruction manual
GE Digital Energy
650 Markland Street
345 revision: 1.5x
Markham, Ontario
Manual P/N: 1601-9098-AA
Canada L6C 0M1
TELEPHONE: Worldwide +1 905 927 7070
GE publication code: GEK-113568J
Europe/Middle East Africa +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free 1 800 547 8629
FAX:
+1 905 927 5098
E-MAIL:
Worldwide multilin.tech@ge.com
Europe multilin.tech.euro@ge.com
HOME PAGE: Internet: http://www.gedigitalenergy.com/multilin
*1601-9098-AA*
GE Multilin's Quality
Management System is
registered to ISO9001:2008
QMI # 005094
2013 GE Multilin Incorporated. All rights reserved.

GE Multilin 345 Transformer Protection System instruction manual for revision 1.5x.
345 Transformer Protection System, EnerVista, EnerVista Launchpad, and EnerVista SR3
Setup are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc. This documentation is
furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission
of GE Multilin. The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to
change without notice.
Part number: 1601-9098-AA (October 2013)
Note
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - 345

Failure to observe and follow the instructions provided in the equipment manual(s)
could cause irreversible damage to the equipment and could lead to property
damage, personal injury and/or death.
Before attempting to use the equipment, it is important that all danger and
caution indicators are reviewed.
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer or
functions abnormally, proceed with caution. Otherwise, the protection provided by
the equipment may be impaired and can result in Impaired operation and injury.
Caution: Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death.
Installation/service personnel must be familiar with general device test practices,
electrical awareness and safety precautions must be followed.
Before performing visual inspections, tests, or periodic maintenance on this device
or associated circuits, isolate or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources
of electric power.
Failure to shut equipment off prior to removing the power connections could
expose you to dangerous voltages causing injury or death.
All recommended equipment that should be grounded and must have a reliable
and un-compromised grounding path for safety purposes, protection against
electromagnetic interference and proper device operation.
Equipment grounds should be bonded together and connected to the facilitys
main ground system for primary power.
Keep all ground leads as short as possible.
At all times, equipment ground terminal must be grounded during device
operation and service.
In addition to the safety precautions mentioned all electrical connections made
must respect the applicable local jurisdiction electrical code.
Before working on CTs, they must be short-circuited.
This product cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European

Union. For proper recycling return this product to your supplier or a designated
collection point. For more information go to www.recyclethis.info.
Safety words and definitions

The following symbols used in this document indicate the following conditions
Note
Note
Note
Note
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION
Overview ............................................................................................................................ 1 - 1
Description of the 345 Transformer Protection System .............................. 1 - 2
345 order codes.............................................................................................................. 1 - 6
Specifications................................................................................................................... 1 - 7
Password security................................................................................................................1 - 7
Protection.................................................................................................................................1 - 7
Metering....................................................................................................................................1 - 9
Data capture ..........................................................................................................................1 - 9
Controls.....................................................................................................................................1 - 10
Inputs/Outputs ......................................................................................................................1 - 10
Power supply ..........................................................................................................................1 - 11
Communications ..................................................................................................................1 - 12
Testing and certification ...................................................................................................1 - 13
2. INSTALLATION
Mechanical installation ............................................................................................... 2 - 1

Dimensions..............................................................................................................................2 - 1
Product identification .........................................................................................................2 - 3
Mounting ..................................................................................................................................2 - 4
Standard panel mount .....................................................................................................2 - 4
Drawout unit withdrawal and insertion.....................................................................2 - 7
Electrical installation .................................................................................................... 2 - 8

Terminal identification .......................................................................................................2 - 10
Wire range .............................................................................................................................2 - 13
Phase sequence and transformer polarity...............................................................2 - 13

Current inputs ........................................................................................................................2 - 13
Ground and sensitive ground CT inputs ....................................................................2 - 14
Zero sequence CT installation ........................................................................................2 - 15
Control power ........................................................................................................................2 - 15
Contact inputs .......................................................................................................................2 - 16
Trip1 and Trip2 output relays..........................................................................................2 - 16
Serial communications ......................................................................................................2 - 19
IRIG-B .........................................................................................................................................2 - 20
3. INTERFACES
Front control panel interface.................................................................................... 3 - 2

Description ..............................................................................................................................3 - 3
Display .......................................................................................................................................3 - 3
Working with the Keypad................................................................................................3 - 3
LED status indicators..........................................................................................................3 - 5

Relay messages ....................................................................................................................3 - 6
Target messages.................................................................................................................3 - 6
Self-test errors......................................................................................................................3 - 7
Flash messages ...................................................................................................................3 - 8
Software setup ................................................................................................................ 3 - 9

Quick setup - Software interface ..................................................................................3 - 9
EnerVista SR3 Setup Software........................................................................................3 - 9
Hardware and software requirements.....................................................................3 - 10
Installing the EnerVista SR3 Setup software..........................................................3 - 10
Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the relay ........................................................3 - 13

Configuring serial communications...........................................................................3 - 13
Using the Quick Connect feature ................................................................................3 - 14
345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Configuring Ethernet communications ....................................................................3 - 15

Connecting to the relay....................................................................................................3 - 16
Working with setpoints and setpoint files ................................................................ 3 - 17

Engaging a device ..............................................................................................................3 - 17
Entering setpoints...............................................................................................................3 - 17
File support ............................................................................................................................3 - 18
Using setpoints files...........................................................................................................3 - 18
Downloading and saving setpoints files ..................................................................3 - 19
Adding setpoints files to the environment ..............................................................3 - 19
Creating a new setpoint file ...........................................................................................3 - 20
Upgrading setpoint files to a new revision .............................................................3 - 21
Printing setpoints and actual values .........................................................................3 - 22
Printing actual values from a connected device .................................................3 - 23
Loading setpoints from a file.........................................................................................3 - 24
Upgrading relay firmware ............................................................................................... 3 - 24

Loading new relay firmware..........................................................................................3 - 24
Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features .................................................................. 3 - 26

Transient recorder (Waveform capture)...................................................................3 - 26
Protection summary..........................................................................................................3 - 29
Password security ..............................................................................................................3 - 30
4. ACTUAL VALUES
Actual values.....................................................................................................................4 - 1
A1 Status.............................................................................................................................4 - 3
Clock........................................................................................................................................... 4 - 4
Contact inputs ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 4
Output relays ......................................................................................................................... 4 - 4
Logic elements ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Virtual inputs .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Remote inputs ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Remote outputs .................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Contact inputs summary.................................................................................................. 4 - 5
Output relays summary .................................................................................................... 4 - 6
Logic elements summary................................................................................................. 4 - 6
GOOSE status......................................................................................................................... 4 - 6
GOOSE HDR status .............................................................................................................. 4 - 7
A2 Metering .......................................................................................................................4 - 8
A3 Records.........................................................................................................................4 - 11
Event records......................................................................................................................... 4 - 11
Transient records ................................................................................................................. 4 - 30
Clear event record............................................................................................................... 4 - 30
Clear transient record........................................................................................................ 4 - 30
Clear thermal capacity record....................................................................................... 4 - 30
A4 Target messages......................................................................................................4 - 31
5. QUICK SETUP FRONT CONTROL

PANEL
Quick Setup menu ..........................................................................................................5 - 3
6. SETPOINTS
Setpoints Main Menu ....................................................................................................6 - 1

Setpoint entry methods .................................................................................................... 6 - 2
Common setpoints.............................................................................................................. 6 - 2
Logic diagrams ..................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
Setting text abbreviations................................................................................................ 6 - 3
S1 Relay setup ................................................................................................................. 6 - 5

Clock ...........................................................................................................................................6 - 5
Password security................................................................................................................6 - 7
Passwords ..............................................................................................................................6 - 9
Communications ..................................................................................................................6 - 10
RS485 interface ...................................................................................................................6 - 10
Ethernet...................................................................................................................................6 - 11
Modbus....................................................................................................................................6 - 12
IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication ..................................................................6 - 13
IEC60870-5-104 protocol................................................................................................6 - 25
DNP communication .........................................................................................................6 - 27
SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE details .......................................................................................6 - 40
Event recorder .......................................................................................................................6 - 41

Transient recorder ...............................................................................................................6 - 42
Front panel ..............................................................................................................................6 - 43
Installation ...............................................................................................................................6 - 44
S2 System Setup............................................................................................................. 6 - 45
Current sensing .....................................................................................................................6 - 46
Power system.........................................................................................................................6 - 47
Transformer ............................................................................................................................6 - 47
Transformer setup phase & magnitude compensations ..................................6 - 48
Winding breakers .................................................................................................................6 - 59
S3 Protection.................................................................................................................... 6 - 62
Setpoint group 1(2) ..............................................................................................................6 - 63
Transformer percent differential .................................................................................6 - 64
Transformer instantaneous differential ...................................................................6 - 71
Restricted ground fault ....................................................................................................6 - 73
Transformer thermal protection..................................................................................6 - 78
Phase timed overcurrent protection .........................................................................6 - 81
Phase instantaneous overcurrent protection .......................................................6 - 88
Ground timed overcurrent protection ......................................................................6 - 91
Ground instantaneous overcurrent protection ....................................................6 - 95
Neutral timed overcurrent protection.......................................................................6 - 98
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent protection ....................................................6 - 101
Negative sequence timed overcurrent protection..............................................6 - 104
S4 Controls ........................................................................................................................ 6 - 108

Change setpoint group......................................................................................................6 - 108
Virtual inputs...........................................................................................................................6 - 110
Logic elements.......................................................................................................................6 - 111
Winding breaker failure.....................................................................................................6 - 125
S5 Inputs/Outputs.......................................................................................................... 6 - 128
Contact inputs .......................................................................................................................6 - 128
Output relays..........................................................................................................................6 - 129
Output Relay 1 - W1 breaker "Trip" ............................................................................6 - 130
Output Relay 2 - W2 breaker "Trip" ............................................................................6 - 130
Auxiliary Output Relays 3 to 6.......................................................................................6 - 133
Virtual inputs...........................................................................................................................6 - 133

Remote inputs........................................................................................................................6 - 135
Remote outputs.....................................................................................................................6 - 135
7. MAINTENANCE
M1 Relay information................................................................................................... 7 - 3
M3 Breaker maintenance........................................................................................... 7 - 5
W1 (W2) Breaker trip coil ..................................................................................................7 - 5
M4 Breaker monitor ...................................................................................................... 7 - 9

M5 Relay maintenance................................................................................................ 7 - 10
Ambient temperature ........................................................................................................ 7 - 10
APPENDIX
Change notes ...................................................................................................................Appendix - 1

Manual Revision history.................................................................................................... Appendix - 1
345 Transformer Protection System

Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction
Overview
The 345 is a microprocessor-based relay for primary and backup protection of small to
medium size distribution transformers. The relay provides advanced algorithms for
automatic magnitude and phase compensation for more than twenty types of twowinding transformers, good sensitivity for the detection of winding ground faults, and the
flexibility to set any of the phase, ground, neutral and negative sequence currents overcurrent elements. The 345 relay has a small footprint and is withdrawable for easy
mounting into either new or retrofit installations. The combination of proven hardware,
advanced features, and communications, makes the relay superior for total transformer
metering, monitoring, protection and control. Equipped with serial (RS485), USB, and
Ethernet ports, as well as a wide selection of protocols such as Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC608705-103, 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE, the 345 relay is the best-in-class for either MCCs,
SCADA or inter-relay communications. The 345 provides excellent accessibility and
transparency with regard to power system conditions and events, through both its fourline 20 character display, and the EnerVista SR3 Setup program. Conveniently located LEDs
indicate the relay status, pickup, operation, and alarm events, as well as the status of each
winding breaker.
The 345 relay provides the following key benefits:
Withdrawable small footprint saves on rewiring and space.
Multiple protection groups with the flexibility to switch through a wide selection of
main and backup transformer protections and controls.
Fast setup (Quick Setup) menu for power system configuration and protection.
Large four-line LCD display, LEDs, and keypad
Multiple communication protocols and simultaneous access with easy integration into
monitoring and control systems.
11
DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Description of the 345 Transformer Protection

System
CPU
Relay functions are controlled by two processors: a Freescale MPC5554 32-bit
microprocessor measures all analog signals and digital inputs and controls all output
relays; a Freescale MPC520B 32-bit microprocessor controls all the Ethernet
communication protocols.
Analog Input Waveform Capture
Magnetic transformers are used to scale-down the incoming analog signals from the
source instrument transformers. The analog signals are then passed through a 960 Hz low
pass anti-aliasing filter. All signals are then simultaneously captured by sample and hold
buffers to ensure there are no phase shifts. The signals are converted to digital values by a
12-bit A/D converter before finally being passed on to the CPU for analysis.
Both current and voltage are sampled thirty-two times per power frequency cycle. These
raw samples are scaled in software, then placed into the waveform capture buffer, thus
emulating a fault recorder. The waveforms can be retrieved from the relay via the EnerVista
SR3 Setup software for display and diagnostics.
Phasors, Transients, and Harmonics
Current waveforms are processed twice every cycle with a DC Offset Filter and a Discrete
Fourier Transform (DFT). The resulting phasors have fault current transients and all
harmonics removed. This results in an overcurrent relay that is extremely secure and
reliable; one that will not overreach.
Processing of AC Current Inputs
The DC Offset Filter is an infinite impulse response (IIR) digital filter, which removes the DC
component from the asymmetrical current present at the moment a fault occurs. This is
done for all current signals used for overcurrent protection; voltage signals bypass the DC
Offset Filter. This filter ensures no overreach of the overcurrent protection.
The Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) uses exactly one sample cycle to calculate a phasor
quantity which represents the signal at the fundamental frequency; all harmonic
components are removed. All subsequent calculations (e.g. RMS, power, etc.) are based
upon the current and voltage phasors, such that the resulting values have no harmonic
components.
Protection Elements
The protection elements are processed four times per power cycle. The protection
elements use RMS current, based on the magnitude of the phasor. Hence, protection is
impervious to both harmonics and DC transients.
12
Figure 1: Single line diagram

Winding 1
Winding 2
50P
50G
50G
50P
51P
50G/
51G
50G/
51G
51P
51G
51G
50BF
50BF
51_2
51_2
50N
50N
51N
51N
49P
87G
87G
Calculate
Restraint Current
Calculate
Differential Currents
345 RELAY
50/87
BLOCK
Calculate
Harmonics
2nd and 5th
87T
Metering
897743.CDR
13
Table 1: Protection Elements

ANSI Device
Description
87T
Percent Differential
50/87
Instantaneous Differential
87G
Restricted Ground Fault
49
Thermal Model
50P
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
50G
Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
50N
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent
50BF
Breaker Failure
51P
Phase Timed Overcurrent
51G
Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent
51N
Neutral Timed Overcurrent
51_2
Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent
The 345 relay has two identical setpoint groups, with the same set of protection elements.
By default setpoint group 1 will be active. Setpoint group 2 can be activated by
programming the conditions under S4 Control/Change Setpoint Group menu.
Depending on the relay order code, the type and number of protection elements per
setpoint group changes. The full set of protection elements will be available in the setpoint
group, if the Advanced configuration (letter M) is selected in the order code. This includes
one Transformer Percent Differential element, one Instantaneous Differential element, two
Restricted Ground Fault elements, one Thermal Model, two Breaker Failure elements, two
of each Phase-, Ground-, and Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent elements, two of each
Phase-, Ground-, Neutral Timed Overcurrent elements, and two Negative Sequence Timed
Overcurrent elements. Some of the protection elements are common for the transformer
protection: Percent and Instantaneous differential elements, Thermal Model, and others
are generic with programmable AC inputs from either winding currents: the Restricted
Ground Fault 1(2), the Phase-, Ground-, and Neutral IOC1(2), the Phase-, Ground-, and
Neutral TOC1(2), and the Negative Sequence TOC1(2) elements.
14
Figure 2: Main menu
ACTUAL VALUES
ACTUAL VALUES
A1 STATUS
QUICK SETUP
SETPOINTS
A2 METERING
MAINTENANCE
A3 RECORDS
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
XFMR PERCENT DIFF

PCNT DIFF FUNCTION
MINIMUM PICKUP
SLOPE 1
BREAKPOINT 1
BREAKPOINT 2
QUICK SETUP
RELAY STATUS
PHASE TOC1
PHASE TOC1 FUNCTION
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
W1 PH CT PRIMARY
PHASE CT INPUT
W1 PH CT SECONDARY
PH TOC1 PICKUP
W1 GND CT PRIMARY
PH TOC1 CURVE
W1 GND CT SECONDARY
PH TOC1 TDM
W2 PH CT PRIMARY
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
W2 PH CT SECONDARY
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
W2 GND CT PRIMARY
W2 GND CT SECONDARY
TRANSFORMER TYPE
XFMR RATED LOAD
GROUND TOC1
GND TOC1 FUNCTION
GND CT INPUT
W1 NOM VOLTAGE
GND TOC1 PICKUP
W1 GROUNDING
GND TOC1 CURVE
W2 NOM VOLTAGE
GND TOC1 TDM
W2 GROUNDING
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
XFMR PERCENT DIFF
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
PH TOC1 FUNCTION
GND TOC1 FUNCTION
PH IOC1 FUNCTION
GND IOC1 FUNCTION
SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
S3 PROTECTION
S4 CONTROLS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
MAINTENANCE
897756A2.cdr
SLOPE 2
M1 RELAY INFO
M3 BKR MAINTENANCE
PHASE IOC1
PHASE IOC1 FUNCTION
PH CT INPUT
PH IOC1 PICKUP
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
GROUND IOC1
GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION
GND CT INPUT
GND IOC1 PICKUP
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
M4 BKR MONITOR
M5 RELAY MAINT
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
15
345 ORDER CODES
345 order codes

The information to specify a 345 relay is provided in the following Order Code figure.
Figure 3: Order Codes
Interface
345
345
Phase Currents
Ground Currents*
Power Supply
Current Protection
* *
| |
P1 |
*
|
|
P5
*
|
|
Harsh Environment
*
*
|
|
*
|
|
*
|
|
345 Transformer Protection Relay

1 A 3-phase CTs (Winding 1 - 1 A, Winding 2 - 1 A)
5 A 3-phase CTs (Winding 1 - 5 A, Winding 2 - 5 A)
1 A standard ground CTs (Winding 1 - 1 A, Winding 2 - 1 A)
G5
S1
S5
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
D
N
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
N
H
5 A standard ground CTs (Winding 1 - 5 A, Winding 2 - 5 A)

1 A sensitive ground CTs (Winding 1 - 1 A, Winding 2 - 1 A)
5 A sensitive ground CTs (Winding 1 - 5 A, Winding 2 - 5 A)
24 to 48 V DC
110 to 250 V DC/110 to 230 V AC
Standard configuration: 87T, 87T-50, 51P(1), 51G(1), 50P(1),
50G(1), 51N(1), 50N(1)
Extended configuration: 87T, 87T-50, 51P(2), 51G(2), 50P(2),
50G(2), 51N(2), 50N(2), 50BF(1), RGF(1), 49P
Advanced configuration: 87T, 87T-50, 51P(2), 51G(2), 50P(2),
50G(2), 50BF(2), 49P, 51N(2), 50N(2), 51_2(2) , RGF(2)
Standard: Front USB, Rear RS485: Modbus RTU, DNP3.0,
IEC60870-5-103
Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber - MTRJ),
Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104
Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE
Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850
Protection Relay with drawout design
Protection Relay with non-drawout design
None
Harsh Environment Conformal Coating
|
|
|
L
H
Case Design
*
|
|
G1 |
Communications
N N
The ground CT tap selection must match the selected Phase CT tap. The selected phase and ground CTs apply to both
windings.
The selection of the P1 phase CT option enables only the selection of the G1 or S1 ground CT option.
The selection of the P5 phase CT option enables only the selection of the G5 or S5 ground CT option.
897800A3.PDF
16
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE:
NOTE
Password security
PASSWORD SECURITY
Master Reset Password: ..................................8 to 10 alpha-numeric characters
Settings Password:.............................................3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote
access
Control Password:...............................................3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote
access
Protection
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIMED OVERCURRENT (51P/51N/51G/
51_2)
Ground Current:...................................................Fundamental
Pickup Level:..........................................................0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level: ......................................................97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT
Pickup - 0.02 x CT @ I < 1 x CT
Curve Shape:.........................................................ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse
Definite Time (0.1 s base curve)
IEC Curve A/B/C/Short
IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short
Curve Multiplier:...................................................0.05 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset Time: ............................................................Instantaneous, Linear
Time Delay Accuracy: .......................................3% of expected inverse time or 1 cycle, whichever is
greater
Level Accuracy:....................................................per CT input
SENSITIVE GROUND TIMED OVERCURRENT (51SG)

Ground Current:...................................................Fundamental
Pickup Level:..........................................................0.005 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level: ......................................................97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 0.1 x CT
Pickup - 0.02 x CT @ I < 0.1 x CT
Curve Shape:.........................................................ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse
Definite Time
IEC Curve A/B/C/Short
IAC Extreme/Very/Inverse/Short
Curve Multiplier:...................................................0.05 to 20.0 in steps of 0.1
Reset Time: ............................................................Instantaneous, Linear
Time Delay Accuracy: .......................................3% of expected inverse time or 1 cycle, whichever is
greater
Level Accuracy:....................................................per CT input
17
SPECIFICATIONS
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT

(50P/50N/50G/50_2)
Current:.................................................................... Fundamental
Pickup Level: ......................................................... 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level:...................................................... 97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT
Pickup - 0.02 x CT @ I <1 x CT
Time Delay:............................................................ 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01
Operate Time: ...................................................... <30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
<35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
Time Delay Accuracy:....................................... 0 to 1 cycle (Time Delay selected)
Level Accuracy:.................................................... per CT input
SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50SG)

Pickup Level (Gnd IOC):..................................... 0.005 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0.001 x CT
Dropout Level:...................................................... 97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 0.1 x CT
Pickup - 0.002 x CT @ I < 0.1 x CT
Time Delay:............................................................ 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01
Operate Time: ...................................................... <30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
<35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP, No time delay)
Time Delay Accuracy:....................................... 0 to 1 cycle (Time Delay selected)
TRANSFORMER THERMAL PROTECTION (49)

Current:.................................................................... Fundamental
Pickup Accuracy:................................................. per current inputs
Timing Accuracy:................................................ 3% of expected time, or 30 ms (whichever is greater)
@ I > 1.5 x PKP
TRANSFORMER PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION (87T)

Differential/Restraint Characteristic:......... Dual Slope, Dual Breakpoint
Minimum Pickup Level: .................................... 0.05 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Slope 1 Range: .....................................................15 to 100% in steps of 1%
Slope 2 Range: .....................................................50 to 100% in steps of 1%
Kneepoint 1: .......................................................... 0.50 to 4.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Kneepoint 2: .......................................................... 1.00 to 10.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
2nd Harmonic Inhibit Level:............................ 1.0 to 40.0% insteps of 0.1%
2nd Harmonic Inhibit Mode:........................... Per-phase, 2-out-of-three, Average
5th Harmonic Inhibit Level:............................. 1.0 to 40.0% insteps of 0.1%
Dropout Level:...................................................... 97 to 98% of Pickup
Operate Time: ...................................................... < 20 ms (no harmonics inhibits selected)
< 30 ms (harmonics inhibits selected)
Level Accuracy:.................................................... per current inputs
TRANSFORMER INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION (50/87)

Pickup Level: ......................................................... 3.00 to 20.00xCT in steps of 0.01xCT
Operate Time: ...................................................... <30 ms
RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT

Number of Elements: ........................................ 2
Pickup Level: ......................................................... 0.02 to 20.00 xCT in steps of 0.01
0.002 to 2.000 xCT (with sensitive CTs)
GND Supervision Level:.................................... 0.02 to 20.00 xCT in steps of 0.01
0.002 to 2.000 xCT (with sensitive CTs)
Slope Range: ......................................................... 0 to 100% in steps of 1
Pickup Delay: ........................................................ 0.00 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.01
Operate Time: ...................................................... < 30 ms @ 0 ms time delay
18
SPECIFICATIONS
Metering
PHASE & GROUND CURRENT INPUTS
CT Primary:.............................................................1 to 6000 A
Range: ......................................................................0.02 to 20 CT
Input type: ..............................................................1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P1G1 or P5G5)
Configurable 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P0G0)
Nominal frequency: ...........................................50/60 Hz
Burden: ....................................................................<0.1 VA at rated load
Accuracy: ................................................................1% of reading at 1 CT
3% of reading from 0.2 to 20 CT
20% of reading from 0.02 to 0.19 CT
CT withstand: ........................................................1 second at 100 rated current
2 seconds at 40 rated current
continuous at 3 rated current
SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT INPUT

CT Primary:.............................................................1 to 600 A
Range: ......................................................................0.002 to 3 CT
Input type: ..............................................................1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P1S1 or P5S5)
Configurable 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P0S0)
Nominal frequency: ...........................................50/60 Hz
Burden: ....................................................................<0.1 VA at rated load
Accuracy: ................................................................1% of reading at 0.1 CT
3% of reading from 0.02 to 3 CT
20% of reading from 0.002 to 0.019 CT
CT withstand: ........................................................1 second at 100 rated current
2 seconds at 40 rated current
continuous at 3 rated current
Data capture
TRANSIENT RECORDER
Buffer size:..............................................................3 s
No. of buffers: .......................................................1x192, 3x64, 6x32
No. of channels:...................................................14
Sampling rate:......................................................32 samples per cycle
Triggers:...................................................................Manual Command
Contact Input
Virtual Input
Logic Element
Element Pickup/Trip/Dropout/Alarm
Data:..........................................................................AC input channels
Contact input state
Contact output state
Virtual input state
Logic element state
Data storage:........................................................RAM - battery backed-up; retained for 3 days
EVENT RECORDER
Number of events:..............................................256
Header: ....................................................................relay name, order code, firmware revision
Content:...................................................................event number, date of event, cause of event,per-phase
current, ground current, sensitive ground current, neutral
current, ground differential current, negative sequence
current, restraint current, per-phase differential current, perphase differential second harmonic current, thermal
capacity
Data Storage:........................................................RAM - battery backed up; retained for 3 days
19
SPECIFICATIONS
CLOCK
Setup: ....................................................................... Date and time
Daylight Saving Time
IRIG-B: ...................................................................... Auto-detect (DC shift or Amplitude Modulated)
Amplitude modulated: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
DC shift: 1 to 10 V DC
Input impedance: 40 kOhm 10%
RTC Accuracy: 1 min / month at 25C
Controls
LOGIC ELEMENTS
Number of logic elements:............................. 16
Trigger source inputs per element: ............ 3
Block inputs per element: ............................... 3
Supported operations: ..................................... AND, OR, NOT, Pickup / Dropout timers
Pickup timer: ......................................................... 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Dropout timer:...................................................... 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
BREAKER FAILURE
Pickup Level: ......................................................... 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level:...................................................... 97 to 98% of pickup
Timer 1 Delay: ...................................................... 0.03 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timer 2 Delay: ...................................................... 0.00 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Time Delay Accuracy:....................................... 0 to 1 cycle (Timer 1, Timer 2)
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
High Temperature Pickup:.............................. 20C to 80C in steps of 1C
Low Temperature Pickup: ............................... -40C to 20C in steps of 1C
Time Delay:............................................................ 1 to 60 min in steps of 1 min
Temperature Dropout:...................................... Configurable 90 to 98% of pickup
Temperature Accuracy: ................................... 10C
Timing Accuracy:................................................ 1 second
Inputs/Outputs
CONTACT INPUTS
Inputs: ...................................................................... 10
Selectable thresholds: ...................................... 17, 33, 84, 166 VDC
Recognition time:................................................ 1/2 cycle
Debounce time: ................................................... 1 to 64 ms, selectable, in steps of 1 ms
Maximum input voltage & continuous
current draw:................................................... 300 VDC, 2 mA, connected to Class 2 source
Type: ......................................................................... opto-isolated inputs
External switch: ................................................... wet contact
110
SPECIFICATIONS
FORM-A RELAYS
Configuration:.......................................................2 (two) electromechanical
Contact material: ................................................silver-alloy
Operate time:........................................................<8 ms
Continuous current:...........................................10 A
Make and carry for 0.2s:..................................30 A per ANSI C37.90
Break (DC inductive, L/R=40 ms):.................24 V / 1 A
48 V / 0.5 A
125 V / 0.3 A
250 V / 0.2 A
Break (DC resistive):............................................24 V / 10 A
48 V / 6 A
125 V / 0.5 A
250 V / 0.3 A
Break (AC inductive): ..........................................720 VA @ 250 VAC Pilot duty A300
Break (AC resistive): ............................................277 VAC / 10 A
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR

Applicable voltage:.............................................20 to 250 VDC
Trickle current:......................................................1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-C RELAYS
Configuration:.......................................................5 (five) electromechanical
Contact material: ................................................silver-alloy
Operate time:........................................................<8 ms
Continuous current:...........................................10 A
Make and carry for 0.2s:..................................30 A per ANSI C37.90
Break (DC inductive, L/R=40 ms):.................24 V / 1 A
48 V / 0.5 A
125 V / 0.3 A
250 V / 0.2 A
Break (DC resistive):............................................24 V / 10 A
48 V / 6 A
125 V / 0.5 A
250 V / 0.3 A
Break (AC inductive): ..........................................720 VA @ 250 VAC Pilot duty A300
Break (AC resistive): ............................................277 VAC / 10 A
TRIP SEAL-IN
Relay 1 trip seal-in:.............................................0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Relay 2 trip seal-in:.............................................0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Power supply
HIGH RANGE POWER SUPPLY
Nominal:..................................................................120 to 240 VAC
125 to 250 VDC
Range: ......................................................................60 to 300 VAC (50 and 60 Hz)
84 to 300 VDC
Ride-through time: .............................................35 ms
LOW RANGE POWER SUPPLY

Nominal:..................................................................24 to 48 VDC
Range: ......................................................................20 to 60 VDC
ALL RANGES
Voltage withstand: .............................................2 highest nominal voltage for 10 ms
Power consumption: .........................................15 W nominal, 20 W maximum
20 VA nominal, 28 VA maximum
111
SPECIFICATIONS
Communications
SERIAL
RS485 port: ............................................................ Opto-coupled
Baud rates: ............................................................ up to 115 kbps
Response time: .................................................... 1 ms typical
Parity: ....................................................................... None, Odd, Even
Protocol:.................................................................. Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103
Maximum distance:........................................... 1200 m (4000 feet)
Isolation: ................................................................. 2 kV
ETHERNET (COPPER)
Modes: ..................................................................... 10/100 MB (auto-detect)
Connector: ............................................................. RJ-45
Protocol:.................................................................. Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, iec 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE
ETHERNET (FIBER)
Fiber type: .............................................................. 100 MB Multi-mode
Wavelength:.......................................................... 1300 nm
Connector: ............................................................. MTRJ
Protocol:.................................................................. Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, iec 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE
Transmit power: .................................................. -20 dBm
Receiver sensitivity: ........................................... -31 dBm
Power budget:...................................................... 9 dB
Maximum input power:.................................... -11.8 dBm
Typical distance: ................................................. 2 km (1.25 miles)
Duplex:..................................................................... half/full
USB
Standard specification:.................................... Compliant with USB 2.0
Data transfer rate: ............................................. 115 kbps
112
SPECIFICATIONS
Testing and certification

TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
TEST
REFERENCE STANDARD
TEST LEVEL
Dielectric voltage withstand

(high voltage power supply*)
2.3KV
(low voltage power supply*)
500V
* Test level is based on basic insulation principle (Power supply I/P terminals tested to Chassis
ground).
Impulse voltage withstand
EN60255-5
5KV
Damped Oscillatory
IEC61000-4-18IEC60255-22-1
2.5KV CM, 1KV DM
Electrostatic Discharge
EN61000-4-2/IEC60255-22-2
Level 4
RF immunity
EN61000-4-3/IEC60255-22-3
Level 3
Fast Transient Disturbance
EN61000-4-4/IEC60255-22-4
Class A and B
Surge Immunity
EN61000-4-5/IEC60255-22-5
Level 3 & 4
Conducted RF Immunity
EN61000-4-6/IEC60255-22-6
Level 3
Power Frequency Immunity
EN61000-4-7/IEC60255-22-7
Class A & B
Voltage interruption and

Ripple DC
IEC60255-11
15% ripple , 200ms interupts
Radiated & Conducted

Emissions
CISPR11 /CISPR22/ IEC60255-25
Class A
Sinusoidal Vibration
IEC60255-21-1
Class 1
Shock & Bump
IEC60255-21-2
Class 1
Seismic
IEC60255-21-3
Class 2
Power magnetic Immunity
IEC61000-4-8
Level 5
Pulse Magnetic Immunity
IEC61000-4-9
Level 4
Damped Magnetic Immunity
IEC61000-4-10
Level 4
Voltage Dip & interruption
IEC61000-4-11
0,40,70,80% dips,250/300cycle
interrupts
Damped Oscillatory
IEC61000-4-12
2.5KV CM, 1KV DM
Conducted RF Immunity 0150khz
IEC61000-4-16
Level 4
Voltage Ripple
IEC61000-4-17
15% ripple
Ingress Protection
IEC60529
IP40 front , IP10 Back
Environmental (Cold)
IEC60068-2-1
-40C 16 hrs
Environmental (Dry heat)
IEC60068-2-2
85C 16hrs
Relative Humidity Cyclic
IEC60068-2-30
6day variant 2
EFT
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
4KV, 2.5Khz
Damped Oscillatory
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
2.5KV,1Mhz
RF Immunity
IEEE/ANSIC37.90.2
35V/m (max field), (80MHz-1GHz

with 1KHz sine and 80% AM
modulation)
ESD
Safety
IEEE/ANSIC37.90.3
8KV CD/ 15KV AD
UL508
e83849 NKCR
UL C22.2-14
e83849 NKCR7
UL1053
e83849 NKCR
113
SPECIFICATIONS
APPROVALS
Applicable Council Directive
CE compliance
According to
Low voltage directive
EN60255-5 / EN60255-27 / EN61010-1
EMC Directive
EN60255-26 / EN50263
EN61000-6-2
UL508
North America
cULus
UL1053
C22.2.No 14
ISO
114
Manufactured under a registered

quality program
ISO9001

Chapter 2: Installation
Installation
Mechanical installation
This section describes the mechanical installation of the 345 system, including dimensions
for mounting and information on module withdrawal and insertion.
Dimensions
The dimensions of the 345 are shown below. Additional dimensions for mounting and
panel cutouts are shown in the following sections.
21
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 1: 345 dimensions Drawout
22
Figure 2: 345 dimensions - Non-drawout unit
Product identification
The product identification label is located on the side panel of the 345 . This label indicates
the product model, serial number, firmware revision, and date of manufacture.
Figure 3: 345 label
23
Mounting
Standard panel mount
CAUTION:
The standard panel mount and cutout dimensions are illustrated below.
To avoid the potential for personal injury due to fire hazards, ensure the unit is
mounted in a safe location and/or within an appropriate enclosure.
Figure 4: Standard panel mounting - Drawout
24
Figure 5: Standard Panel mounting - Non-drawout
Figure 6: Mounting tabs (optional)
V TABS
BOTTOM TAB
1.
From the front of the panel, slide the empty case into the cutout until the bottom tab
clicks into place (see above).
2.
From the rear of the panel screw the case into the panel at the 8 screw positions
shown above.
3.
If added security is required, bend the retaining "V"tabs outward, to about 90. These
tabs are located on the sides of the case and appear as shown above.
The relay can now be inserted and can be panel wired.
25
Figure 7: Panel cutout dimensions

5.350 0.010
(135.9 mm 0.25mm)
4.100 0.010
(104.1 mm 0.25 mm)
C
0.200
(5.1 mm)
6.900 0.010
(175.3 mm 0.25 mm)
26
6.000 0.010
(152.4 mm 0.25 mm)
4.000 0.010
(101.6 mm 0.25 mm)
Drawout unit withdrawal and insertion

Figure 8: Unit withdrawal and insertion diagram
8 - 32X3/8IN P/HD PHIL BLK
GE PART # 1408-0306; (QTY:8)
TIGHTENING TORQUE: 15 IN LB
THE HANDLE MUST BE ROTATED 90

WHILE SLIDING THE 345 DRAW-OUT
UNIT INTO THE CAPTIVE UNIT
KEEP THE HANDLE IN ITS ROTATED

POSITION UNTIL THE DRAW-OUT UNIT
IS INSERTED COMPLETELY
PUSH THE HANDLE DOWN AND TIGHTEN

THE SCREW UNTIL THE HANDLE IS PARALLEL
WITH THE FRONT PANEL SURFACE
NOTE: IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER TO ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT IS INSTALLED, OPERATED, AND USED FOR ITS
INTENDED FUNCTION, IN THE MANNER SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER. IF THIS IS NOT THE CASE, THEN THE SAFETY PROTECTION
PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT MAY BE IMPAIRED.
27
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Electrical installation
Figure 9: Typical wiring diagram Drawout
TWO WINDING
TRANSFORMER
WINDING 2
WINDING 1
A
B
C
E9 D9 E10 D10 E11 D11 E12 D12
E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8
IA
IA
IB
IB
IC
IC
IG
IA
IG
IA
IB
IB
Winding 2 Breaker
Aux Contacts
52b
IG
IG
B1
A1
+ CONTROL
- POWER
chassis
B2
gnd
C1 52a W1 BKR (CI #1)

C2 52b W1 BKR (CI #2)
C3 52a W2 BKR (CI #3)
C4 52b W2 BKR (CI #4)
C5 INPUT 5
C6 INPUT 6
C7 INPUT 7
C8 INPUT 8
C9 INPUT 9
C10 INPUT 10
C11 COMMON
GROUND
BUS
GND STUD
A2
DIGITAL INPUTS
52a
IC
Winding 1 Breaker 52a

Aux Contacts
52b
POWER SUPPLY
345
Transformer Protection System
IC
B3
1 TRIP
V
A3
A4
3 AUXILIARY
C12 CHASSIS GND
B5
A5
TRIP CIRCUIT
W1 BKR
TRIP CIRCUIT
W2 BKR
52a
W1 BKR
B4
2 TRIP
+
TRIP
COIL
TRIP
COIL
52a
W2 BKR
B6
A6
B7
4 AUXILIARY
Front Panel
A7
B8
USB
TYPE B
A8
USB
5 AUXILIARY
B9
6 AUXILIARY
B10
A10
OUTPUT CONTACTS
SHOWN WITH NO
CONTROL POWER
A9
4 WIRE USB
Rear Panel
ETHERNET
RJ45
mTRJ
COMMUNICATIONS
IRIG-B
10/100 BASE-T100 BASE-FX
4 WIRE ETHERNET
OPTIONAL
- +
RS485
- +
F2 F1 F5 F4 F3 F6
B11
7 CRITICAL
FAILURE
RELAY
A11
B12
A12
GROUND
BUS
897744.CDR
28
Figure 10: Typical wiring diagram - Non-drawout

TWO WINDING
TRANSFORMER
WINDING 2
WINDING 1
A
B
C
E9 D9 E10 D10 E11 D11 E12 D12
E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8
IA
IA
IB
IB
IC
IC
IG
IA
IG
IA
IB
IB
IG
IG
+ CONTROL
- POWER
chassis
gnd
B1 52a W1 BKR (CI #1)

B2 52b W1 BKR (CI #2)
B3 52a W2 BKR (CI #3)
B4 52b W2 BKR (CI #4)
B5 INPUT 5
B6 INPUT 6
B7 INPUT 7
B8 INPUT 8
B9 INPUT 9
B10 INPUT 10
B11 COMMON
GROUND
BUS
GND STUD
A1
DIGITAL INPUTS

Aux Contacts
52b
IC

Aux Contacts
52b
POWER SUPPLY
345
Transformer Protection System
IC
A2
1 TRIP
V
A3
A4
2 TRIP
A5
V
3 AUXILIARY
B12 CHASSIS GND
A6
A7
TRIP CIRCUIT
W1 BKR
TRIP CIRCUIT
W2 BKR
TRIP
COIL
52a
W1 BKR
TRIP
COIL
52a
W2 BKR
A8
A9
A10
4 AUXILIARY
Front Panel
A11
A12
USB
TYPE B
A13
5 AUXILIARY
USB
OUTPUT CONTACTS
SHOWN WITH NO
CONTROL POWER
A14
A15
4 WIRE USB
Rear Panel
ETHERNET
RJ45
mTRJ
COMMUNICATIONS
IRIG-B
10/100 BASE-T100 BASE-FX
4 WIRE ETHERNET
OPTIONAL
- +
6 AUXILIARY
RS485
- +
C2 C1 C5 C4 C3 C6
A16
A17
A18
7 CRITICAL
FAILURE
RELAY
A19
A20
A21
GROUND
BUS
897745.CDR
29
Terminal identification
NOTE:
NOTE
When installing two lugs on one terminal, both lugs should be "right side up" as shown in
the picture below. This is to ensure the adjacent lower terminal block does not interfere
with the lug body.
Figure 11: Orient the lugs correctly...
SCREW
WASHER
TERMINAL
BLOCK
LOWER
TERMINAL
DIVIDER
Figure 12: CORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD
210
Figure 13: INCORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD (lower lug reversed)
211
Figure 14: Terminal Identification - Drawout
F
1 POWER SUPPLY 2
3
4
W1 TRIP N/O
W1 TRIP OPTV
W2 TRIP COM
AUX 3 N/C
AUX 3 N/O
AUX 4 COM
AUX 5 N/C
AUX 5 N/O
10
AUX 6 COM
11
CRIT FAIL N/C
12
CRIT FAIL N/O
A B
212
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
POWER SUPPLY +
INPUT 1
CHASSIS GND
INPUT 2
W1 TRIP COM
INPUT 3
W2 TRIP N/O
INPUT 4
W2 TRIP OPTV
INPUT 5
AUX 3 COM
W1 PHASE A CT
INPUT 6
AUX 4 N/C
W1 PHASE B CT
INPUT 7
AUX 4 N/O
W1 PHASE C CT
INPUT 8
W1 GND CT
AUX 5 COM
INPUT 9
AUX 6 N/C
W2 PHASE A CT
10
INPUT 10
AUX 6 N/O
W2 PHASE B CT
11
INPUT COM
CRIT FAIL COM
W2 PHASE C CT
12
CHASSIS GND
IRIG-B +
IRIG-B RS485 +
RS485 RS485 COM
CHASSIS GND
RESERVED
RESERVED
W1 PHASE A CT 5
W1 PHASE B CT 6
W1 PHASE C CT 7
W1 GND CT
W2 PHASE A CT 9
W2 PHASE B CT 10
W2 PHASE C CT 11
W2 GND CT
W2 GND CT
12
D E
Figure 15: Terminal Identification - Non-drawout
POWER SUPPLY +
CHASSIS GND
W1 TRIP COM
W2 TRIP N/O
W2 TRIP OPTV
AUX 3 COM
AUX 4 N/C
AUX 4 N/O
AUX 5 COM
AUX 6 N/C
AUX 6 N/O
CRIT FAIL COM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
POWER SUPPLY -
W1 TRIP N/O
W1 TRIP OPTV
W2 TRIP COM
AUX 3 N/C
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT COM
CHASSIS GND
AUX 3 N/O
AUX 4 COM
5 W1 PHASE A CT
W1 PHASE A CT
AUX 5 N/O
6 W1 PHASE B CT
W1 PHASE B CT
AUX 6 COM
7 W1 PHASE C CT
W1 PHASE C CT
W1 GND CT
9 W2 PHASE A CT
W2 PHASE A CT
10 W2 PHASE B CT
W2 PHASE B CT
10
11 W2 PHASE C CT
W2 PHASE C CT
11
12
W2 GND&T
12
AUX 5 N/C
CRIT FAIL N/C
CRIT FAIL N/O
IRIG-B +
IRIG-B RS485 +
RS485 RS485 COM
CHASSIS GND
RESERVED
RESERVED
Wire range
W1 GND CT
W2 GND&T
Use the following guideline when selecting wires or lugs to connect to terminal blocks
A,B,CD, E (Drawout case design), and terminal blocks D, E (Non-drawout case design).:
12 AWG to 22 AWG (3.3 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Single wire termination with/without
9.53 mm (0.375) maximum diameter ring terminals.
14 AWG to 22 AWG (2.1 mm 2 to 0.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with matching
wire sizes and stranding. Two wires maximum per circuit.
14 AWG to 22 AWG (2.1 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with 9.53 mm
(0.375) maximum diameter ring terminals. Two ring terminals maximum per circuit.
Suggested wiring screw tightening torque, tighten to 12 in-lb (1.35 N-m).
Phase sequence and transformer polarity

For correct operation of the relay features, the user must follow the instrument
transformer polarities, shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram. Note the solid square
markings shown with all instrument transformer connections. The phase sequence is user
programmable for either ABC or ACB rotation.
Current inputs
The 345 relay has eight (8) channels for AC current inputs, each with an isolating
transformer. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current
transformers with 1 to 6000 A primaries may be used.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Verify that the relays nominal input current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating
of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate
protection.
IMPORTANT: The phase and ground current inputs will correctly measure up to 20
times the current inputs nominal rating. Time overcurrent curves become horizontal
lines for currents above the 20 CT rating. This becomes apparent if the pickup level is
set above the nominal CT rating.
213
Before working on CTs, they MUST be short circuited.
CAUTION:
Ground and sensitive ground CT inputs

Two ground inputs - one per winding - are referred to throughout this manual as the
Ground Current or Sensitive Ground Current inputs. Before making ground connections,
consider that the relay automatically calculates the neutral (residual) current from the sum
of the three phase current phasors. The following figures show three possible ground
connections (or three possible sensitive ground connections).
The ground inputs (Terminals D8 and E8 for W1, and D12 and E12 for W2) are used in
conjunction with a Zero Sequence CT as source, or in the neutral of wye-connected source
CTs. When using the residual connection set the GROUND CT PRIMARY setpoint to a value
equal to the PHASE CT PRIMARY setpoint.
In cases where the relay is equipped with sensitive ground CT (terminals D8 and E8 for W1,
and D12 and E12 for W2) the sensitive ground current input is intended for use with a CT in
a source neutral of a high-impedance grounded system, or on ungrounded systems. On
ungrounded systems it is connected residually with the phase current inputs. In this case,
the SENSTV GND CT PRIMARY setpoint should be programmed to a value equal to the
PHASE CT PRIMARY setpoint. The sensitive ground current input can be connected to a
Zero Sequence CT for increased sensitivity and accuracy when physically possible in the
system.
The Sensitive Ground input must only be used on systems where the maximum ground
current does not exceed 100 times the rated current for 1 second.
NOTE:
NOTE
The ground CT wiring in the figure below, shows 3 possible ways for wiring the Winding 1
ground CT (terminals D8, E8). The Winding 2 ground CT wiring (terminals D12, E12) is similar.
Figure 16: Ground/Sensitive Ground wiring
Transformer Winding 1
A
B
C
E5
A
D5
E7
E6
SR345
PHASE CURRENT
INPUTS
C
D7
D6
D8
E8
E8
D8
E8
D8
IG
IG
IG
GROUND
GROUND CURRENT INPUT
GROUND
GROUND

WITH ZERO SEQUENCE CT

WITH RESIDUAL CONNECTION
897730.CDR
For Winding 2 ground CT, use relay terminals D12-E12 in the same wiring configuration as
shown above for Winding 1.
214
Zero sequence CT installation

The various CT connections and the exact placement of a Zero Sequence CT, for ground
fault current detection, are shown in the figure below. Twisted pair cabling on the Zero
Sequence CT is recommended.
Figure 17: Zero sequence core balance (CT) installation
UNSHIELDED CABLE
Source
B
C
SHIELDED CABLE
Ground connection to neutral
must be on the source side
Source
B
C
Stress cone
shields
Ground
outside CT
LOAD
LOAD
To ground;
must be on
load side
898733.CDR
Control power
Control power supplied to the relay must match the installed power supply range. If the
applied voltage does not match, damage to the unit may occur. All grounds MUST be
connected for safe, normal operation regardless of control power supply type.
CAUTION:
The label found on the relay specifies its order code or model number. The installed power
supplys operating range will be one of the following:
LO: 24 to 48 V DC (Range: 20 to 60 V DC)
HI: 125 to 250 V DC/120 to 240 V AC (Range: 84 to 250 V DC/66 to 265 V AC)
The relay should be connected directly to the ground bus, using the shortest practical
path. A tinned copper, braided, shielding and bonding cable should be used. As a
minimum, 96 strands of number 34 AWG should be used. Belden catalog number 8660
is suitable.
CAUTION:
Isolate power prior to servicing.
CAUTION:
An external switch, circuit breaker, or other protective device must be connected near to
the equipment.
NOTE:
NOTE
215
Figure 18: Control power connection

CONTROL
POWER
+
-
HEAVY COPPER CONDUCTOR

OR BRAIDED WIRE
B2
A1
B1
CHASSIS
GROUND
SWITCHGEAR
GROUND BUS
CONTROL
POWER
RELAY
898735.CDR
Contact inputs
External contacts can be connected to the relays ten (10) digital inputs. These contacts are
wet only.
The inputs can be programmed to different thresholds depending on the DC voltage (17,
33, 84, 166).
CAUTION:
Ensure correct polarity on contact input connections and do not connect any contact
input circuits to ground or else relay hardware may be damaged.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power
supply. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. In
addition, the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relays DC
negative rail at Terminal C11. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement
is 300 V DC.
Figure 19: Wet contact connections
Wet Contact Connection
345 RELAY
Contact Input 1
C1
V DC Power
Supply
Contact Input Common C11
LOGICIN.CDR
Trip1 and Trip2 output relays

The 345 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical relays: two special relays
designed for Winding 1 Breaker trip and Winding 2 Breaker trip, four general purpose
relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6), and a Critical Failure relay. The special purpose relays have
fixed operating characteristics and the general purpose relays can be configured by the
user.
216
Operation of the two Trip output relays is designed to be controlled by the state of the
circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact.
The Trip relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding to the
command. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special relays, it
will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is confirmed by a
breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset.
If the initiating feature resets, but the breaker does not change state, the output relay
will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds.
If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts, 52a nor 52b, is programmed to a contact
input, the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker
Failure feature, or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets.
If a delay is programmed for the Trip contact seal-in time, then this delay is added to
the reset time. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms.
52a Contact
Configured
52b Contact
Configured
Relay Operation
Yes
Yes
Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an

open breaker.
Yes
No
Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an

open breaker.
No
Yes

open breaker.
No
No
Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay

expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled), or 100
ms after the feature causing the trip resets.
Breaker monitoring (Trip coil monitoring) is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on

Form A output relays: #1 Trip, and #2 Trip. The voltage monitor is connected across each of
the two Form A contacts, and the relay effectively detects healthy current through the
circuit. In order to do this, an external jumper must be connected between terminals A2
and A3 for #1 Trip coil monitoring, or/and B4, and B5 for #2 Trip coil monitoring.
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle
currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays), the circuit integrity for the
Trip coil is effectively normal. If the Trip coil circuit gets disconnected, or if in general a high
resistance is detected in the circuitry, a Trip alarm will be set and the ALARM and
MAINTENANCE LEDs will be on.
Example 1: The figures below show the two different connections of the breaker Trip coil to
the relays trip output #1 terminals (output #2 Trip coil monitoring) for both no voltage
monitoring and voltage monitoring of the trip circuit integrity.
To monitor the Trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals A2 and B3 to connect the
Trip coil, and provide a jumper between terminals A2 (optional voltage) and A3.
NOTE:
NOTE
To monitor the Trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals B4 and A4 to connect the
Trip coil, and provide a jumper between terminals B4 (optional voltage) and B5.
NOTE:
NOTE
217
Figure 20: Relay #1 Trip and Relay #2 Trip circuits with no voltage monitoring
DC +
Output Relay 1 (TRIP)
DC +
A2
B4
B3
A4
V
A3
B5
52a
contact
52a
contact
Trip
Coil
Trip
Coil
897785.cdr
DC -
DC -
All AUX contacts are shown when the breaker is open.
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 21: Relay #1 Trip and Relay #2 Trip circuits with voltage monitoring
DC +
DC +

External
jumper
A2
External
jumper
B4
B3
A4
V
A3
B5
52a
contact
52a
contact
Trip
Coil
Trip
Coil
897786.cdr
DC -
218
DC -
Serial communications
Figure 22: RS485 wiring diagram
ZT (*)
SHIELD
345 IED
TWISTED PAIR
E2
RS485 +
D2
RS485 -
OPTOCOUPLER
OPTOCOUPLER
DATA
DATA
COM
SCADA, PLC, OR
PERSONAL COMPUTER
E3
COMMON
GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE

SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY
OR THE 350C ONLY
RS485 +
(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT EACH END
(typically 120 ohms and 1 nF)
IED
RS485 -
COMMON
UP TO 32 350C
OR OTHER IEDs,
MAXIMUM CABLE
LENGTH OF
1200 m (4000 ft.)
IED
ZT (*)
RS485 +
RS485 COMMON
LAST
DEVICE
897738.CDR
One two-wire RS485 port is provided. Up to 32 345 IEDs can be daisy-chained together on
a communication channel without exceeding the driver capability. For larger systems,
additional serial channels must be added. Commercially available repeaters can also be
used to add more than 32 relays on a single channel. Suitable cable should have a
characteristic impedance of 120 ohms (for example, Belden #9841) and total wire length
should not exceed 1200 meters (4000 ft.). Commercially available repeaters will allow for
transmission distances greater than 1200 meters.
Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon.
For this reason, surge protection devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals.
Internally, an isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface is used to prevent
noise coupling.
CAUTION:
To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential, it is imperative
that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded only
once, at the master or at the 345 . Failure to do so may result in intermittent or failed
communications.
The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protection devices
installed, either internally or externally. Ground the shield at one point only, as shown in the
figure above, to avoid ground loops.
Correct polarity is also essential. The 345 IEDs must be wired with all the positive (+)
terminals connected together and all the negative () terminals connected together. Each
relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. Avoid star or stub connected configurations.
The last device at each end of the daisy-chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm
watt resistor in series with a 1 nF capacitor across the positive and negative terminals.
Observing these guidelines will ensure a reliable communication system immune to
system transients.
219
IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows time stamping of events to be
synchronized among connected devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats
are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shift or amplitude
modulated (AM) form. The type of form is auto-detected by the 345 relay. Third party
equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic
locations can also be synchronized.
Figure 23: IRIG-B connection
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
IRIG-B
TIME CODE
GENERATOR
(DC SHIFT OR
AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE
GE MULTILIN
345 RELAY
E1
D1 IRIG-B(-)
IRIG-B(+)
RECEIVER
897741.CDR
TO OTHER DEVICES
220
Digital Energy

Chapter 3: Interfaces
Interfaces
There are two methods of interfacing with the 345 Transformer Protection System.
Interfacing via the relay keypad and display.
Interfacing via the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.
This section provides an overview of the interfacing methods available with the 345 using
the relay control panels and EnerVista SR3 Setup software. For additional details on
interface parameters (for example, settings, actual values, etc.), refer to the individual
chapters.
31
FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Front control panel interface

Figure 1: Transformer Protection System Front Panel
GE Multilin
SR345 Transformer
Protection System
IN SERVICE
TRIP
W1 BREAKER OPEN
TROUBLE
ALARM
W1 BREAKER CLOSED
PICKUP
W2 BREAKER OPEN
MAINTENANCE
W2 BREAKER CLOSED
SETPOINT
GROUP 1
SETPOINT
GROUP 2
MENU
ENTER
ESCAPE
RESET
USB
897351A1.cdr
32
Description
The relay front panel provides an interface with a liquid crystal display, LED status
indicators, control keys, and a USB program port. The display and status indicators show
the relay information automatically. The control keys are used to select the appropriate
message for entering setpoints or displaying measured values. The USB program port is
also provided for connection with a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.
Display
The 80-character liquid crystal display (LCD) allows visibility under varied lighting
conditions. When the keypad and display are not being used, system information is
displayed after a user-defined period of inactivity. Pressing the Menu key during the
display of default message returns the display to the last message shown before the
default message appeared. Any trip, alarm, or pickup is displayed immediately,
automatically overriding the default message.
Working with the

Keypad
The 345 display messages are organized into a Main Menu, pages, and sub-pages. There
are four main menus labeled Actual Values, Quick Setup, Setpoints, and Maintenance.
Pressing the MENU key followed by the MESSAGE key scrolls through the four Main Menu
headers, which appear in sequence as follows:
Figure 2: The four Main Menu headers
ACTUAL VALUES
QUICK SETUP
SETPOINTS
MAINTENANCE
Pressing the MESSAGE key or the ENTER key from these Main Menu pages will display
the corresponding menu Page. Use the MESSAGE and MESSAGE keys to scroll through
the Page headers.
33
Figure 3: Typical paging operation from Main Menu selection
Back
ACTUAL VALUES
A1 STATUS
A2 METERING
A3 RECORDS
1 click
A1 STATUS
CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
Back
2 clicks
A1 STATUS
CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
Back
Click to end
A1 STATUS
..
.
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
When the display shows SETPOINTS, pressing the MESSAGE key or the ENTER key will
display the page headers of programmable parameters (referred to as setpoints in the
manual). When the display shows ACTUAL VALUES, pressing the MESSAGE key or the
ENTER key displays the page headers of measured parameters (referred to as actual
values in the manual).
Each page is broken down further into logical sub-pages of messages. The MESSAGE
and MESSAGE keys are used to navigate through the sub-pages. A summary of the
setpoints and actual values pages can be found in the Chapters : Setpoints and Actual
Values, respectively.
The ENTER key is dual purpose. It is used to enter the sub-pages and to store altered
setpoint values into memory to complete the change. The MESSAGE key can also be
used to enter sub-pages but not to store altered setpoints.
The ESCAPE key is also dual purpose. It is used to exit the sub-pages and to cancel a
setpoint change. The MESSAGE key can also be used to exit sub-pages and to cancel
setpoint changes.
The VALUE keys are used to scroll through the possible choices of an enumerated setpoint.
They also decrement and increment numerical setpoints.
The RESET key resets any latched conditions that are not currently active. This includes
resetting latched output relays, latched Trip LEDs, breaker operation failure, and trip / close
coil failures. The Autoreclose Scheme is also reset with the shot counter being returned to
zero and the lockout condition being cleared.
34
The MESSAGE and MESSAGE keys scroll through any active conditions in the relay.
Diagnostic messages are displayed indicating the state of protection and monitoring
elements that are picked up, operating, or latched.
LED status indicators
IN SERVICE: Green
This LED will be continuously ON, when the relay is set to Ready under S1 RELAY
SETUP/INSTALLATION/RELAY STATUS, and no major self-test errors have been
detected.
TROUBLE: Amber
This LED will turn ON, when the relay is not programmed (Not Ready) state under S1
RELAY SETUP/INSTALLATION/RELAY STATUS, or upon detection of a major self-test
error. The relay will turn back to IN-SERVICE if no major self-test error is present.
SETPOINT GROUP 1, 2: Green

These LEDs indicate the group of active protection elements. If setpoint group 1 is lit
green, only the protection elements under group 1 will be active. The protection
elements from group 2 will be inactive. The settings for each protection element can
be edited and displayed regardless of the active group.
TRIP: Red
This indicator turns on when the relay detects a fault and sends a trip command to the
trip output relay. The LED will reset by initiating a reset command from either the
RESET pushbutton Breaker Control, or communications; in all cases after the fault
condition has cleared.
ALARM: Amber
This LED will flash upon detection of an alarm condition, with element functions
selected as alarm. The LED will automatically turn off if the alarm condition clears.
The LED will remain steady ON, if the function of the operated protection was
selected as "latched alarm".
PICKUP: Amber
This indicator will light ON upon pickup condition generated by any of the relay
features. The indicator will turn off if no pickup condition is detected.
BREAKER OPEN: Red/Green/Orange programmable

When the breaker is open, this indicator will be on continuously.
BREAKER CLOSED: Red/Green/Orange programmable

When the breaker is closed, this indicator will be on continuously.
Breaker status indication is based on the breakers 52a and 52b contacts. With both
contacts wired to the relay, closed breaker status is determined by closed 52a contact
and opened 52b contact. Visa-versa the open breaker status is determined by opened
52a contact and closed 52b contact. If both 52a and 52b contacts are open, due to a
breaker being racked out from the switchgear, both the Breaker Open and Breaker
Closed LED Indicators will be off.
It is strongly recommended to detect the breaker status by using both 52a and 52b
contacts.
NOTE:
NOTE
The 345 provides also detecting the breaker status by using only one contact: either
52a or 52b. However, one should be aware that in such cases, it would be impossible
to distinguish between a breaker open state and breaker racked out state, unless
another contact from the breaker is wired to the relay.
35
To clarify this ambiguity, the BKR CONNECTED function under SETPOINTS/S2 SYSTEM
SETUP/S2 BREAKER should be programmed to an additional contact input. When this
additional input is closed, a single 52a or 52b contact will show both breaker states.
When the breaker is racked out, this additional breaker connected input should be
open. In this case, both breaker status indicators will be off.
MAINTENANCE: Amber
This LED may indicate both breaker or relay maintenance depending on the
programmed maintenance elements. The LED will turn on upon operation of a
maintenance element.
Relay messages
Target messages
Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as
pickups, trips, or alarms.
The relay displays the most recent event first, and after 5 seconds will start rolling up the
other target messages until the conditions clear and/or the RESET command is initiated.
The Target Messages can be reviewed by pressing either the MESSAGE UP or MESSAGE
DOWN key. If a RESET command is not performed but any of the other faceplate
pushbuttons is pressed, the display will not show the target messages unless the user
navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES, where they can be reviewed. If the
target messages have not been cleared before the user presses a pushbutton different
from RESET, they will reappear on the screen after the time specified under the
SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > S1 FRONT PANEL > MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting, that will start
timing out from the last pressed pushbutton. The following shows the format of a typical
Target Message:
Figure 4: Typical target message
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Cause <function>
State: Operate
Phase:
Figure 5: Example of a Phase IOC1 Operation - Phase A Function: Trip
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Trip
State: Operate
Phase:A
Cause <Function>
The first line contains information of the cause of operation (the name of the operated
element), and the element function.
State: Operate
This line from the display shows the state of the element: Pickup, Operated, Alarm.
Phase: A
The last line from the display shows the phase that picked up or operated.
36
Self-test errors
CAUTION:
The relay performs self diagnostics at initialization (after power up), and continuously as a
background task to ensure that the hardware and software are functioning correctly.
There are two types of self-test warnings indicating either a minor or major problem. Minor
problems indicate a problem with the relay that does not compromise protection of the
power system. Major errors indicate a problem with the relay which takes it out of service.
Self-Test Warnings may indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware!
Upon detection of a minor problem, the relay will:
Turn on the "TROUBLE" LED at the same time as the "IN SERVICE" LED is on.
Display the error on the relay display.
Record the minor self-test error in the Event Recorder.
Upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
De-energize critical failure relay (Output Relay 7).
Inhibit operation of all other output relays (1 to 6).
Turn off the "IN SERVICE" LED; turn on the "TROUBLE" LED.
Flash the "ALARM" LED.
Display the cause of major self-test failure.
Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder.
Figure 6: Typical Self-test warning
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
UNIT FAILURE:
Contact Factory:
Error code:1
Table 1: Minor Self-test Errors
Self-test Error Latched Description of
Message
Target
Problem
Message?
How Often the Test

is Performed
What to do
MAINTENANCE No
ALERT: IRIG-B
Failure
A bad IRIG-B input

signal has been
detected.
Every 5 seconds*
Ensure IRIG-B cable is

connected, check cable
functionality (i.e. physical
damage or perform
continuity test), ensure
IRIG-B receiver is
functioning, and check
input signal level (it may
be less than specification).
If none of these apply,
contact the factory.
MAINTENANCE No
ALERT: Clock
Not Set
Clock time is the

same as the default
time.
Every 5 seconds*
Set the date and time in

PRODUCT SETUP.
MAINTENANCE No
ALERT: Comm
Alert 1, 2, or 3
Communication
error between CPU
and Comms board.
Every 5 seconds*
If alert doesnt self-reset,

then contact factory.
Otherwise monitor
reccurences as errors are
detected and self-reset.
MAINTENANCE No
ALERT:
Ethernet Link
Fail
Communication
error between
345 and Network.
Detected
Instantaneously
Check Ethernet cable and

Ethernet connection.
Check health of the
network. Check status of
external routers and
switches.
37
Table 2: Major Self-test Errors

Self-test Error Latched
Description of
Message
Target
Problem
Message?
How Often the Test

is Performed
What to do
UNIT FAILURE:
Contact
Factory
Yes
This warning is
Every 5 seconds1
caused by a unit
hardware failure.
Failure code (XXXX) is
shown.
Contact the factory and

provide the failure code.
RELAY NOT
READY: Check
Settings
No
PRODUCT SETUP
INSTALLATION
setting indicates that
relay is not in a
programmed state.
Program all required

settings then set the
PRODUCT SETUP
INSTALLATION setting to
"Programmed".
On power up and
whenever the
PRODUCT SETUP
INSTALLATION
setting is altered.
1.Failure is logged after the detection of 5 consecutive failures - that is, after 25 seconds.
Flash messages
Flash messages are warning, error, or general information messages displayed in response
to pressing certain keys. The factory default flash message time is 4 seconds.
Figure 7: Typical Flash message
S3 PHASE IOC
BLOCK 1
Logic Element 8
<SETPOINT STORED>
SETPOINT STORED
This flash message is displayed in response to the ENTER key while on any setpoint
message (see example above). The edited value was stored as entered.
COMMAND EXECUTED
This flash message is displayed in response to executing a command: ON, OFF, YES, NO,
etc.
INVALID PASSWORD
This flash message appears upon an attempt to enter an incorrect password, as part of
password security.
38
SOFTWARE SETUP
Software setup
Quick setup - Software interface
The Quick Setup window allows you to configure important settings from different
screens in the relay by adding them to a common window.
Quick Setup window options are available for a single device or a file.
The Quick Setup Window option is accessed from the "Tree" which launches on
clicking.
EnerVista SR3 Setup Software

Although settings can be entered manually using the control panel keys, a PC can be used
to download setpoints through the communications port. The EnerVista SR3
Setup software is available from GE Multilin to make this as convenient as possible. With
EnerVista SR3 Setup running, it is possible to:
Program and modify settings
Load and save setting files to and from a disk
Read actual values
Monitor status
Read pre-trip data and event records
Get help on any topic
39
SOFTWARE SETUP
Upgrade the 345 firmware
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows immediate access to all 345 features with easy to
use pull down menus in the familiar Windows environment. This section provides the
necessary information to install EnerVista SR3 Setup , upgrade the relay firmware, and
write and edit setting files.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can run without a 345 connected to the computer. In
this case, settings may be saved to a file for future use. If a 345 is connected to a PC and
communications are enabled, the 345 can be programmed from the setting screens. In
addition, measured values, status and trip messages can be displayed with the actual
value screens.
Hardware and
software
requirements
The following requirements must be met for the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.
Microsoft Windows 7 / XP is installed and running properly.
At least 100 MB of hard disk space is available.
At least 256 MB of RAM is installed.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can be installed from either the GE EnerVista CD or the
GE Multilin website at http://www.GEmultilin.com.
Installing the
EnerVista SR3 Setup
software
310
After ensuring the minimum requirements indicated earlier, use the following procedure to
install the EnerVista SR3 Setup software from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD.
1.
Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the nocharge EnerVista software on the local PC.
3.
When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4.
Click the IED Setup section of the LaunchPad toolbar.
SOFTWARE SETUP
5.
In the EnerVista Launchpad window, click the Add Product button and select the
345 Feeder Protection System as shown below. Select the Web option to ensure the
most recent software release, or select CD if you do not have a web connection, then
click the Add Now button to list software items for the 345.
6.
EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the latest installation software from the Web or CD
and automatically start the installation process. A status window with a progress bar
will be shown during the downloading process.
7.
Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista SR3
Setup software will be installed.
8.
Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory
indicated, the USB driver will be loaded into the computer, and the installation
program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista SR3 Setup software to the
Windows start menu.
311
SOFTWARE SETUP
9.
The 345 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad
window, as shown below.
If you are going to communicate from your computer to the 345 Relay using the USB
port:
10. Plug the USB cable into the USB port on the 345 Relay then into the USB port on your
computer.
11. Launch EnerVista SR3 Setup from LaunchPad.
12. In EnerVista > Device Setup:
312
SOFTWARE SETUP
13. Select USB as the Interface type.

14. Select 345 Relay as the USB device.
Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the relay

Configuring serial
communications
Before starting, verify that the cable is properly connected to either the USB port on the
front panel of the device (for USB communications) or to the RS485 terminals on the back
of the device (for RS485 communications). This example demonstrates an USB connection.
For RS485 communications, the GE Multilin F485 converter will be required. Refer to the
F485 manual for additional details. To configure the relay for Ethernet communications,
see Configuring Ethernet Communications below.
1.
Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista SR3 Setup software (available from
the GE Multilin web site). See the previous section for the installation procedure.
2.
Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add
Site button to define a new site.
3.
Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. If desired, a short description of
the site can also be entered. In this example, we will use New Site 1 as the site name.
4.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
5.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6.
Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field and a description (optional) of the
device.
7.
Select Serial from the Interface drop-down list.
8.
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 345 device and upload the order
code.
9.
Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added
to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main
EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
The 345 Site Device has now been configured for USB communications. Proceed to
Connecting to the Relay below, to begin communications.
313
SOFTWARE SETUP
Using the Quick

Connect feature
The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front
panel USB port of a 345 relay, or through the Ethernet port. The following window will
appear when the QuickConnect button is pressed:
As indicated by the window, the "Quick Connect" feature can quickly connect the EnerVista
SR3 Setup software to a 345 front port if the USB is selected in the interface drop-down list.
Select "345 Relay" and press the Connect button. Ethernet can also be used as the
interface for Quick Connect as shown above.
When connected, a new Site called Quick Connect will appear in the Site List window.
314
SOFTWARE SETUP
The 345 Site Device has now been configured via the Quick Connect feature for either USB
or Ethernet communications. Proceed to Connecting to the Relay below, to begin
communications.
Configuring Ethernet
communications
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the RJ-45 Ethernet
port.
345 supports a maximum of 3 TCP/IP sessions.
NOTE:
NOTE
1.
Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista SR3 Setup Setup software (available
from the GE EnerVista CD). See the previous section for the installation procedure.
2.
Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add
Site button to define a new site.
3.
Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. If desired, a short description of
the site can also be entered. In this example, we will use Substation 1 as the site
name.
4.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list.
5.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6.
Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field, and a description (optional).
7.
Select Ethernet from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of
interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
315
SOFTWARE SETUP
8.
Enter the IP address, slave address, and Modbus port values assigned to the 345 relay
(from the S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > ETHERNET menu).
9.
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 345 and upload the order code. If
a communications error occurs, ensure that the Ethernet communication values
correspond to the relay setting values.
10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added
to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main
EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
The 345 Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to
the following section to begin communications.
Connecting to the
relay
316
Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured, the user can
easily communicate with the relay.
1.
Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on the + box to
list the available devices for the given site.
2.
Desired device trees can be expanded by clicking the + box. The following list of
headers is shown for each device:
Device Definition
Actual Values
Quick Setup
Setpoints
Maintenance.
3.
Expand the SETTINGS > RELAY SETUP list item and double click on Front Panel to open
the "Front Panel" settings window as shown below:
SOFTWARE SETUP
4.
The "Front Panel" settings window will open with a corresponding status indicator on
the lower left of the EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
5.
If the status indicator is red, verify that the serial, USB, or Ethernet cable is properly
connected to the relay, and that the relay has been properly configured for
communications (steps described earlier).
The "Front Panel" settings can now be edited, printed, or changed. Other setpoint and
command windows can be displayed and edited in a similar manner. "Actual Values"
windows are also available for display. These windows can be arranged, and resized at will.
Working with setpoints and setpoint files

Engaging a device
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to
directly communicate with a relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by
communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected
from the product series.
Entering setpoints
The System Setup page will be used as an example to illustrate the entering of setpoints.
Inthis example, we will be changing the power system setpoints.
1.
Establish communications with the relay.
2.
Select the Setpoint > System Setup > Transformer menu item.
3.
Select the Transformer Rating setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box.
This will display three arrows: two to increment/decrement the value, and another to
launch the numerical keypad.
317
SOFTWARE SETUP
File support
Using setpoints files
318
4.
Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a numerical keypad interface that
allows the user to enter a value within the setpoint range displayed near the top of the
keypad: Click = to exit from the keypad and keep the new value. Click on X to exit from
the keypad and retain the old value.
5.
For setpoints requiring non-numerical pre-set values (e.g. Transformer type below),
clicking anywhere within the setpoint value box displays a dropdown selection menu
arrow. Select the desired value from this list.
6.
For setpoints requiring an alphanumeric text string (e.g. "relay name"), the value may
be entered directly within the setpoint value box.
7.
In the Setpoint > System Setup > Transformer dialog box, click on Save to save the
values into the 345 . Click YES to accept any changes and exit the window. Click
Restore to retain previous values. Click Default to restore Default values.
Opening any EnerVista SR3 Setup file will automatically launch the application or provide
focus to the already opened application. If the file is a settings file (has a SR3 extension)
which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the
Settings List tree.
New files will be automatically added to the tree.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to
relay settings:
In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later
download to communicating relays.
Directly modifying relay settings while connected to a communicating relay, then

saving the settings when complete.
Creating/editing settings files while connected to a communicating relay, then saving

them to the relay when complete.
SOFTWARE SETUP
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file
contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings:
Device Definition
Relay Setup
System Setup
Protection
Control
Inputs/Outputs
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup displays relay setpoints with the same hierarchy as the front
panel display.
Downloading and
saving setpoints files
Adding setpoints files

to the environment
Setpoints must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware
upgrades. Saving setpoints is also highly recommended before making any setpoint
changes or creating new setpoint files.
The setpoint files in the EnerVista SR3 Setup window are accessed in the Files Window. Use
the following procedure to download and save setpoint files to a local PC.
1.
Ensure that the site and corresponding device(s) have been properly defined and
configured as shown in Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the Relay, above.
2.
Select the desired device from the site list.
3.
Select the Online > Read Device Settings from Device menu item, or right-click on the
device and select Read Device Settings to obtain settings information from the
device.
4.
After a few seconds of data retrieval, the software will request the name and
destination path of the setpoint file. The corresponding file extension will be
automatically assigned. Press Receive to complete the process. A new entry will be
added to the tree, in the File pane, showing path and file name for the setpoint file.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software provides the capability to review and manage a large
group of setpoint files. Use the following procedure to add an existing file to the list.
319
SOFTWARE SETUP
Creating a new
setpoint file
320
1.
In the files pane, right-click on Files and select the Add Existing Setting File item as
shown:
2.
The Open dialog box will appear, prompting the user to select a previously saved
setpoint file. As for any other MS Windows application, browse for the file to be
added then click Open. The new file and complete path will be added to the file list.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows the user to create new setpoint files independent
of a connected device. These can be uploaded to a relay at a later date. The following
procedure illustrates how to create new setpoint files.
Upgrading setpoint
files to a new revision
SOFTWARE SETUP
1.
In the File pane, right click on File and select the New Settings File item. The following
box will appear, allowing for the configuration of the setpoint file for the correct
firmware version. It is important to define the correct firmware version to ensure that
setpoints not available in a particular version are not downloaded into the relay.
2.
Select the Firmware Version, and Order Code options for the new setpoint file.
3.
For future reference, enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate
the identification of the device and the purpose of the file.
4.
To select a file name and path for the new file, click the button beside the File Name
box.
5.
Select the file name and path to store the file, or select any displayed file name to
replace an existing file. All 345 setpoint files should have the extension SR3 (for
example, transformer1.SR3).
6.
Click OK to complete the process. Once this step is completed, the new file, with a
complete path, will be added to the EnerVista SR3 Setup software environment.
It is often necessary to upgrade the revision for a previously saved setpoint file after the
345 firmware has been upgraded. This is illustrated in the following procedure:
1.
Establish communications with the 345 relay.
2.
Select the Maintenance > M1 Relay Info menu item and record the Firmware
Revision.
3.
Load the setpoint file to be upgraded into the EnerVista SR3 Setup environment as
described in the section, Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment.
4.
In the File pane, select the saved setpoint file.
5.
From the main window menu bar, select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties
menu item and note the File Version of the setpoint file. If this version is different from
the Firmware Revision noted in step 2, select a New File Version that matches the
Firmware Revision from the pull-down menu.
321
SOFTWARE SETUP
Printing setpoints and

actual values
322
6.
For example, if the firmware revision is L0L01MA120.000 (Firmware Revision 1.20) and
the current setpoint file revision is 1.10, change the setpoint file revision to 1.2x.
7.
Enter any special comments about the setpoint file in the "Description" field.
8.
Select the desired firmware version from the "New File Version" field.
9.
When complete, click OK to convert the setpoint file to the desired revision. See
Loading Setpoints from a File below, for instructions on loading this setpoint file into
the 345 .
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows the user to print partial or complete lists of
setpoints and actual values. Use the following procedure to print a list of setpoints:
1.
Select a previously saved setpoints file in the File pane or establish communications
with a 345 device.
2.
From the main window, select the Offline > Export Settings File menu item.
Printing actual values

from a connected
device
SOFTWARE SETUP
3.
The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Settings in the upper section
and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled
Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the filtering
section and click OK.
4.
The process for Offline > Print Preview Settings File is identical to the steps above.
5.
Setpoint lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file (in
the file list) or device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information or
Print Settings File options.
A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the
following procedure:
1.
Establish communications with the desired 345 device.
2.
From the main window, select the Online > Print Device Information menu item
3.
The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Actual Values in the upper
section and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only
Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the
filtering section and click OK.
Actual values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired
device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information option
323
SOFTWARE SETUP
Loading setpoints
from a file
An error message will occur when attempting to download a setpoint file with a
revision number that does not match the relay firmware. If the firmware has been
upgraded since saving the setpoint file, see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New Revision,
above, for instructions on changing the revision number of a setpoint file.
CAUTION:
The following procedure illustrates how to load setpoints from a file. Before loading a
setpoints file, it must first be added to the EnerVista SR3 Setup environment as described
in the section, Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment.
1.
Select the previously saved setpoints file from the File pane of the EnerVista SR3 Setup
software main window.
2.
Select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and verify that the
corresponding file is fully compatible with the hardware and firmware version of the
target relay. If the versions are not identical, see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New
Revision, above, for details on changing the setpoints file version.
3.
Right-click on the selected file and select the Write Settings File to Device item.
4.
Select the target relay from the list of devices shown and click Send. If there is an
incompatibility, an "Incompatible Device" error will occur:
If there are no incompatibilities between the target device and the settings file, the data
will be transferred to the relay. An indication of the percentage completed will be shown in
the bottom of the main window.
Upgrading relay firmware

To upgrade the 345 firmware, follow the procedures listed in this section. Upon successful
completion of this procedure, the 345 will have new firmware installed with the factory
default setpoints.The latest firmware files are available from the GE Multilin website at
http:// www.GEmultilin.com.
EnerVista SR3 Setup software prevents incompatible firmware from being loaded into a
345 relay.
NOTE:
NOTE
NOTE:
NOTE
Loading new relay

firmware
324
Before upgrading firmware, it is very important to save the current 345 settings to a file on
your PC. After the firmware has been upgraded, it will be necessary to load this file back
into the 345 . Refer to Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files for details on saving relay
setpoints to a file.
Loading new firmware into the 345 flash memory is accomplished as follows:
1.
Connect the relay to the local PC and save the setpoints to a file as shown in
Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files.
2.
Select the Maintenance > Update Firmware menu item.
SOFTWARE SETUP
3.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software will request the new firmware file. Locate the folder
that contains the firmware files to load into the 345 . The firmware filename has the
following format:
L3 L01 M A 130 . 000

Modification Number (000 = none)
Firmware Rev #
Board Assembly Rev #
Code Type in Memory Device
PCB Code Number
Product Reference Code (L3 = 345)
4.
EnerVista SR3 Setup software now prepares the 345 to receive the new firmware file.
The 345 front panel will momentarily display "SR BOOT PROGRAM Waiting for
Message, indicating that it is in upload mode.
5.
While the file is being loaded into the 345 , a status box appears showing how much of
the new firmware file has been transferred and the upgrade status. The entire transfer
process takes approximately 10 minutes.
6.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software will notify the user when the 345 has finished
loading the file. Carefully read any displayed messages and click OK to return the
main screen. Cycling power to the relay is recommended after a firmware upgrade.
After successfully updating the 345 firmware, the relay will not be in service and will
require setpoint programming. To communicate with the relay, the communication
settings may have to be manually reprogrammed.
When communications is established, the saved setpoints must be reloaded back into the
relay. See Loading Setpoints from a File for details.
325
SOFTWARE SETUP
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding

data items (i.e. default values, min/max values, data type, and item size) may change
slightly from version to version of firmware.
The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are
enhanced or modified.
Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features

Transient recorder
(Waveform capture)
326
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can be used to capture waveforms (or view trace
memory) from the relay at the instance of a pickup, trip, alarm, or other condition.
With EnerVista SR3 Setup software running and communications established, select
the Actual Values > A3 Records > Transient Records menu item to open the
Transient Recorder Viewer window.
Click on Trigger Waveform to trigger a waveform capture. Waveform file numbering

starts with the number zero in the 345 , so that the maximum trigger number will
always be one less than the total number of triggers available.
Click on the Save to File button to save the selected waveform to the local PC. A new
window will appear, requesting the file name and path. One file is saved as a
COMTRADE file, with the extension "CFG." The other file is a "DAT" file, required by the
COMTRADE file for proper display of waveforms.
To view a previously saved COMTRADE file, click the Open button and select the
corresponding COMTRADE file.
To view the captured waveforms, click on the Launch Viewer button. A detailed
Waveform Capture window will appear as shown below.
SOFTWARE SETUP
TRIGGER TIME & DATE

Displays the time and date
of the Trigger.
Display graph values

at the corresponding
cursor line. Cursor
lines are identified
by their colors.
VECTOR DISPLAY SELECT

Click here to open a new graph
to display vectors.
FILE NAME
Indicates the
file name and
complete path
(if saved).
CURSOR LINE POSITION

Indicates the cursor line position
in time with respect to the
beginning of the buffer.
CURSOR LINES
To move lines, locate the mouse
pointer over the cursor line, then
click and drag the cursor to the
new position.
DELTA
Indicates time difference
between the two cursor
lines.
TRIGGER LINE
Indicates the point
in time for the
trigger.
The red vertical line indicates the trigger point.
The date and time of the trigger are displayed at the top left corner of the window. To
match the captured waveform with the event that triggered it, make note of the time
and date shown in the graph, then find the event that matches the same time in the
event recorder. The event record will provide additional information on the cause and
system conditions at the time of the event.
From the window main menu bar, press the Preference button to open the COMTRADE
Setup page, in order to change the graph attributes.
327
SOFTWARE SETUP
Preference Button
The following window will appear:
Change the color of each graph as desired, and select other options as required, by
checking the appropriate boxes. Click OK to store these graph attributes, and to close the
window. The Waveform Capture window will reappear based on the selected graph
attributes.
To view a vector graph of the quantities contained in the waveform capture, press the
Vector Display button to display the following window:
328
Protection summary
SOFTWARE SETUP
Protection Summary is a single screen which holds the summarized information of

different settings from Grouped Elements, Control Elements and Maintenance screens.
Protection Summary Screen allows the User to:
view the output relay assignments for the elements
modify the output relay assignments for the elements
view the enable/disable status of Control Elements
navigate to the respected Protection Element screen on a button click.
The Protection Summary screen is as follows:
329
SOFTWARE SETUP
Password security
Password security is an optional feature of the 345 which can be setup using the SR3
EnerVista Setup software. The password system has been designed to facilitate a
hierarchy for centralized management. This is accomplished through a Master level
access password which can be used for resetting lower level access passwords and higher
level privileged operations. In cases where operational security is required as well as a
central administrative authority then the use of the password system is highly encouraged.
The feature robustness of this system requires it to be managed exclusively through the
EnerVista setup software. This section describes how to perform the initial setup. For more
details on the password security feature, refer to Password Security in Chapter 6.
1.
330
345 devices shipped from the factory are initially set with security disabled. If the
password security feature is to be used, the user must first change the Master Reset
Password from the initial Null setting, this can only be done over communications, not
from the front panel keypad. The new Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10
SOFTWARE SETUP
characters in length, and must have minimum 2 letters and 2 numbers. The letters are
case sensitive. After entering a valid Master Reset Password, enter the new Master
Reset Password again to confirm, then select Change Password.
2.
Now that the Master Reset Password has been programmed, enter it again to log in to
the Master Access level. The Master Level permits setup of the Remote and Local
Passwords. If the Master Reset Password has been lost, record the Encrypted Key and
contact the factory to have it decrypted.
3.
With Master Level access, the user may disable password security altogether, or
change the Master Reset Password.
4.
The Master Access level allows programming of the Remote Setpoint and Remote
Control passwords. These passwords are initially set to a Null value, and can only be
set or changed from a remote user over RS485 or Ethernet communications. Remote
Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length.
331
SOFTWARE SETUP
332
5.
Initial setup of the Local Setpoint and Local Control passwords requires the Master
Access level. If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to YES, Local passwords can be
changed remotely only (over RS485 or Ethernet). If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to
NO, Local passwords can be changed locally only (over USB or keypad). If changing
Local Passwords is permitted locally, the keypad user can only change the Local
Passwords if they have been changed from the initial NULL value to a valid one. Local
Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length.
6.
If any Remote password has never been set, that level will not be attainable except
when logged in as the Master Level. The same logic applies to the Local passwords.
7.
When passwords have been set, the user will be prompted to enter the appropriate
password depending on the interface being used (remote or local), and the nature of
the change being made (setpoint or control). If the correct password is entered, the
user is now logged into that access level over that interface only. The access level
turns off after a period of 5 minutes of inactivity, if control power is cycled, or if the
user enters an incorrect password.
Digital Energy

Chapter 4: Actual values
Actual values
Actual values
All measured values, the status of digital inputs and outputs, and fault analysis information
are accessed in Actual Values mode. Actual value messages are organized into logical
groups for easy reference as shown below.
41
ACTUAL VALUES
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Figure 1: Actual Values main menu

ACTUAL VALUES
A1 STATUS
A1 STATUS
A2 METERING
CLOCK
A3 RECORDS
CONTACT INPUTS
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
OUTPUT RELAYS
LOGIC ELEMENTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS
C. INPUTS SUMMARY
OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
GOOSE STATUS
GOOSE HDR. STATUS
A2 WINDING 1 CURRENTS
W1 PH A CURRENT
W1 PH B CURRENT
W1 PH C CURRENT
W1 NTRL CURRENT
W1 [SNS] GND CURRENT
W1 NEG SEQ CURRENT
W1 GND DIFF CURRENT
A2 WINDING 2 CURRENTS
W2 PH A CURRENT
W2 PH B CURRENT
A2 METERING
W2 PH C CURRENT
WINDING 1 CURRENTS
W2 NTRL CURRENT
WINDING 2 CURRENTS
W2 [SNS] GND CURRENT
XFMR DIFF CURRENTS
W2 NEG SEQ CURRENT
W2 GND DIFF CURRENT

A3 EVENT RECORDS
XFMR THERM CAP
E30, Date
A3 RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS
TRANSIENT RECORDS
CLEAR EVENT REC
A2 XMFR DIFF CURRENTS

PH A DIFF CURRENT
PH A REST CURRENT
Record
Time
E29, Date
DIFF 2 HARM PH A
Record
CLEAR TRANST REC
DIFF 5 HARM PH A
Time
CLEAR THERM CAP
PH B DIFF CURRENT
PH B REST CURRENT
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
PH IOC1 TRIP
PH TOC TRIP
.
.
.
DIFF 2 HARM PH B
DIFF 5 HARM PH B
A3 TRANSIENT RECORDS
FORCE TRIGGER?
PH C DIFF CURRENT
TOTAL RECORDS
PH C REST CURRENT
AVAILABLE RECORDS
DIFF 2 HARM PH C
LAST CLEARED
DIFF 5 HARM PH C
A2 XFMR THERM CAP
THERM CAP PH A
THERM CAP PH B
THERM CAP PH C
A3 CLEAR EVENT REC

EVENT RECORDS
CLEAR
897760A1.cdr
A3 CLEAR TRANST REC

TRANSIENT RECORDS
CLEAR
A3 CLEAR THERMAL CAP
EVENT RECORDS
CLEAR
42
A1 STATUS
A1 Status
Figure 2: Status menu
A1 STATUS
CLOCK
A1 CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS
CURRENT DATE:
OUTPUT RELAYS
CURRENT TIME:
LOGIC ELEMENTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
A1 CONTACT INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
52a W1 BRK (CI#1)
REMOTE OUTPUTS
C. INPUTS SUMMARY
52b W1 BRK (CI#2)
OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
52a W2 BRK (CI#3)
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
52b W2 BRK (CI#4)
GOOSE STATUS
CONTACT INPUT 5
GOOSE HDR STATUS
...
CONTACT INPUT 10
A1 OUTPUT RELAYS
R1 TRIP:
A1 GOOSE HDR STATUS

GOOSE 1 H.STATUS
R2 TRIP:
OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
GOOSE 2 H.STATUS
GOOSE 3 H.STATUS
OUTPUT RELAY 7
...
GOOSE 8 H.STATUS
A1 LOGIC ELEMENTS
LOGIC ELEMENT 1
A1 GOOSE STATUS
LOGIC ELEMENT 2
61850 STATUS
GOOSE 1 STATUS
GOOSE 2 STATUS
GOOSE 3 STATUS
...
GOOSE 8 STATUS
...
LOGIC ELEMENT 16
A1 VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
...
LE1 ...
LE2 ...
LE3 ...
LE4 ...
LE5 ...
LE6 ...
...
Le16[8] ...
R1 TRIP ...
R2 TRIP ...
RLY3 ...
RLY4 ...
RLY5 ...
RLY6 ...
RLY7 ...
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
A1 REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUT 1
REMOTE INPUT 2
...
REMOTE INPUT 32
52a CI1 ...

52b CI2 ...
52a CI3 ...
52b CI4 ...
CI9 ...
CI5 ...
CI6 ...
CI7 ...
CI8 ...
CI10 ...
897763A1.cdr
A1 REMOTE OUTPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUT 1
REMOTE OUTPUT 2
...
REMOTE OUTPUT 32
43
A1 STATUS
Clock
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CLOCK
CURRENT DATE
Feb 12 2009
Range: Date in format shown
Indicates todays date.
CURRENT TIME
09:17:12
Range: Time in format shown
Indicates the current time of day.
Contact inputs
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CONTACT INPUTS
52a W1 BRK (CI#1) (Contact Input 1)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The status of this contact shows the W1 breaker close/open state, when wired to a 52a
breaker auxiliary contact.
52b W1 BRK (CI#2) (Contact Input 2)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The status of this contact shows the W1 breaker close/open state, when wired to a 52b
52a W2 BRK (CI#3) (Contact Input 3)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The status of this contact shows the W2 breaker close/open state, when wired to a 52a
52b W2 BRK (CI#4) (Contact Input 4)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The status of this contact shows the W2 breaker close/open state, when wired to a 52b
CONTACT INPUT 5 to 10
OFF
Range: Off, On
Message displays the state of the contact input. The message ON indicates that the
contact input is energized, and message OFF indicates a de-energized contact.
Output relays
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUTPUT RELAYS
RELAY 1 TRIP (Output Relay #1)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The ON state of Output Relay #1 (W1 TRIP) shows that a TRIP command has been sent
to the W1 breaker.
44
A1 STATUS
RELAY 2 TRIP (Output Relay #2)

OFF
Range: Off, On
The ON state of Output Relay #2 (W2 TRIP) shows that a TRIP command has been sent
to the W2 breaker.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 (Auxiliary Output Relays)
OFF
Range: Off, On
OUTPUT RELAY 7 (Critical Failure Relay)
Range: Off, On
The "ON" state indicates that the relay is in-service.
Logic elements
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEMENTS
LOGIC ELEMENT 1 to 16
OFF
Range: Off, On
The state ON or OFF for each logic element depends on its programmed logic:
triggering inputs, blocking inputs, plus any pickup, and/or reset time delay.
Virtual inputs
The state of all active virtual inputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On
Remote inputs
The state of all active remote inputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On
Remote outputs
The state of all active remote outputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE OUTPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On
Contact inputs summary

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > C. INPUTS SUMMARY
45
A1 STATUS
C. INPUTS SUMMARY
52a
OFF
CI#5
OFF
52b
OFF
CI#6
OFF
52a
OFF
CI#7
OFF
52b
OFF
CI#8
OFF
CI#9
OFF
CI#10
OFF
The display shows a summary of the states of all contact inputs.
Output relays summary

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
OUTPUT RELAYS SUMMARY
R1 TRIP
OFF
RLY#5
OFF
R2 TRIP
OFF
RLY#6
OFF
RLY#3
OFF
RLY#7
ON
RLY#4
OFF
This display shows a summary of the states of all output relays.

NOTE:
NOTE
Output relay #7 is the Critical Failure relay, used to indicate the correct functioning of the
345 relay. This output relay shows the status "ON" when the 345 relay is powered up and
set to "Ready" and no self-test alarms are active, under SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP >
S1 INSTALLATION > RELAY STATUS.
Logic elements summary

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
LE#1
OFF
LE#9
OFF
LE#2
OFF
LE#10
OFF
LE#3
OFF
LE#11
OFF
LE#4
OFF
LE#12
OFF
LE#5
OFF
LE#13
OFF
LE#6
OFF
LE#14
OFF
LE#7
OFF
LE#15
OFF
LE#8
OFF
LE#16
OFF
This display shows a summary of the states of all logic elements.
GOOSE status
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE STATUS
46
A1 STATUS
GOOSE 1 TO 8 Status
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF
GOOSE HDR status

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE HDR STATUS
GOOSE 1 TO 8 H.Status
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF
47
A2 METERING
A2 Metering
The relay measures fundamental frequency phase and ground currents, and all auxiliary
analog inputs. Other values like neutral current, symmetrical components, differential and
restraint currents are derived. All quantities are recalculated every power system cycle and
perform protection and monitoring functions. Displayed metered quantities are updated
approximately three (3) times a second for readability. All phasors and symmetrical
components are referenced to the phase A current phasor.
By scrolling the Up/Down keys the relay shows one-by-one, all metered values as follows:
WINDING 1 CURRENT
W1 PH A CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 1 to 6000 A, 0 to 359o lag
W1 PH B CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W1 PH C CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W1 NTRL CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W1 GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W1 SENS GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W1 NEG SEQ CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W1 GND DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag
48
A2 METERING
WINDING 2 CURRENT
W2 PH A CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W2 PH B CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W2 PH C CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W2 NTRL CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W2 GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W2 SENS GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W2 NEG SEQ CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
W2 GND DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag
49
A2 METERING
TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT CURRENTS

PH A DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag
PH A RESTR CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag
DIFF 2 HARM PH A
0.0 % f0
DIFF 5 HARM PH A
0.0 % f0
PH B DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag
PH B RESTR CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag
DIFF 2 HARM PH B
0.0 % f0
DIFF 5 HARM PH B
0.0 % f0
PH C DIFF CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag
PH C RESTR CURRENT
0.00 x CT 0o lag
DIFF 2 HARM PH C
0.0 % f0
DIFF 5 HARM PH C
0.0 % f0
TRANSFORMER THERMAL CAPACITY CURRENTS

THERM CAP PH A
0.0%
Range: 1 to 150%
THERM CAP PH B
0.0%
Range: 1 to 150%
THERM CAP PH C
0.0%
Range: 1 to 150%
410
A3 RECORDS
A3 Records
The 345 has an event recorder which runs continuously. All event records are stored in
memory such that information is maintained for up to 3 days even after losing relay
control power. The events are displayed from newest to oldest event. Each event has a
header message containing a summary of the event that occurred, and is assigned an
event number equal to the number of events that have occured since the recorder was
cleared. The event number is incremented for each new event.
Event records
The Event Recorder runs continuously, capturing and storing the last 256 events. All events
are stored in non-volatile memory where the information is maintained, even in the case
where control power is lost.
Shown below is an example of an event record caused by a Breaker Open operation, and
the recorded information at the time of this record.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > EVENT RECORDS
Table 1: Example of Event Record
A3 EVENT REC T:5655 E5655 Jan 05, 10
Ph IOC1 Trip OP 17:32:28.376
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ia x

CT(W1)0.08 x CT 0 Lag
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ib x

E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ic x

E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ig x

CTg(W1)0.00 x CT 0 Lag
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 In x

E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Igd x

CT(W1)0.08 x CT
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Igr x

CT(W1)0.08 x CT
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OPW1 I_2 x

CT(W1)0.03 x CT
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ia x

E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ib x

E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ic x

411
A3 RECORDS
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ig x

CTg(W2)0.00 x CT 0 Lag
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OPW2 In x

E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Igd x

CT(W2)0.00 x CT
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Igr x

CT(W2)0.00 x CT
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 I_2 x

CT(W1)0.00 x CT
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph A Diff, x

CT(W1)0.08
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph BDiff, x

CT(W1)0.00
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph C Diff, x

CT(W1)0.00
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph A Rest, x

CT(W1)0.00
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph B Rest, x

CT(W1)0.00
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph C Rest, x

CT(W1)0.00
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP 2nd Harm

Ph A Diff6.2% fo

Ph B Diff0.0% fo

Ph C Diff0.0% fo
E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Therm Cap

Ph A1.1% fo

Ph B0.0%

Ph C0.0%
Each event is saved with event number, date and time, and contains information such as
per-phase current, ground current or sensitive ground current, neutral current, negative
sequence current, ground differential current, per-phase differential and restraint currents.
412
A3 RECORDS
Second and fifth harmonic per-phase differential current. All per Winding 1 and 2. The
Event Recorder can be cleared from ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC
setpoint. The following table provides a list of the event types:
Table 2: Event type
Event Type
Display
Description
General Events
None
Events that occur when specific

operation takes place
Pickup Events
PICKUP:
These are events that occur when a

protection element picks up
Trip Events
TRIP:

breaker trip is initiated
Alarm and Latched Alarm Events
ALARM:
These are events that occur when an

alarm is initiated
Control Events
CONTROL:

control element is activated
Dropout Events
DROPOUT:

protection element drops out after a
corresponding pickup event
Contact Input Events
C. INPUT:

contact input changes its state
Virtual Input Events
V. INPUT

virtual input changes its state
Remote Input Events
R. INPUT

remote input changes its state
Logic Element Events
L. ELEMENT
These are events that occur when a logic

element changes its state
Self-Test Warning Events
SELF-TEST WARNING
These are events that occur when a selftest warning is detected.
The following table, from the 345 Communications Guide, shows the list of Event Causes.
Code
Type
FC134
unsigned 16 bits
Definition
Cause of Event
No Evnt/Trp ToDate
Ctrl. Pwr Lost
Ctrl. Pwr Applied
Date or Time Set
Reset
Factory Reload
Clock Not Set
IRIG-B Failure
Reset Trip Counter
10
BKR Status Unknown
11
Clear Event Rec
12
Clear Transt Rec
13
Clear Therm Cap
14
Comm. Alert 1
15
Comm. Alert 2
16
Comm. Alert 3
17
Ethernet Link Fail
18
High ENET Traffic
19
Ambient Temp. >80C
21
BKR2 Status Unkwn
413
A3 RECORDS
Code
414
Type
Definition
23
Trace Mem. Trigger
24
Rx Goose 1 ON
25
Rx Goose 1 OFF
26
Rx Goose 2 ON
27
Rx Goose 2 OFF
28
Rx Goose 3 ON
29
Rx Goose 3 OFF
30
Rx Goose 4 ON
31
Rx Goose 4 OFF
32
Rx Goose 5 ON
33
Rx Goose 5 OFF
34
Rx Goose 6 ON
35
Rx Goose 6 OFF
36
Rx Goose 7 ON
37
Rx Goose 7 OFF
38
Rx Goose 8 ON
39
Rx Goose 8 OFF
0x0040
Contact IN 1 On
0x0041
Contact IN 2 On
0x0042
Contact IN 3 On
0x0043
Contact IN 4 On
0x0044
Contact IN 5 On
0x0045
Contact IN 6 On
0x0046
Contact IN 7 On
0x0047
Contact IN 8 On
0x0048
Contact IN 9 On
0x0049
Contact IN 10 On
0x0060
Contact IN 1 Off
0x0061
Contact IN 2 Off
0x0062
Contact IN 3 Off
0x0063
Contact IN 4 Off
0x0064
Contact IN 5 Off
0x0065
Contact IN 6 Off
0x0066
Contact IN 7 Off
0x0067
Contact IN 8 Off
0x0068
Contact IN 9 Off
0x0069
Contact IN 10 Off
0x0080
Virtual IN 1 On
0x0081
Virtual IN 2 On
0x0082
Virtual IN 3 On
0x0083
Virtual IN 4 On
0x0084
Virtual IN 5 On
0x0085
Virtual IN 6 On
0x0086
Virtual IN 7 On
0x0087
Virtual IN 8 On
0x0088
Virtual IN 9 On
0x0089
Virtual IN 10 On
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0x008A
Virtual IN 11 On
0x008B
Virtual IN 12 On
0x008C
Virtual IN 13 On
0x008D
Virtual IN 14 On
0x008E
Virtual IN 15 On
0x008F
Virtual IN 16 On
0x0090
Virtual IN 17 On
0x0091
Virtual IN 18 On
0x0092
Virtual IN 19 On
0x0093
Virtual IN 20 On
0x0094
Virtual IN 21 On
0x0095
Virtual IN 22 On
0x0096
Virtual IN 23 On
0x0097
Virtual IN 24 On
0x0098
Virtual IN 25 On
0x0099
Virtual IN 26 On
0x009A
Virtual IN 27 On
0x009B
Virtual IN 28 On
0x009C
Virtual IN 29 On
0x009D
Virtual IN 30 On
0x009E
Virtual IN 31 On
0x009F
Virtual IN 32 On
0x00A0
Virtual IN 1 Off
0x00A1
Virtual IN 2 Off
0x00A2
Virtual IN 3 Off
0x00A3
Virtual IN 4 Off
0x00A4
Virtual IN 5 Off
0x00A5
Virtual IN 6 Off
0x00A6
Virtual IN 7 Off
0x00A7
Virtual IN 8 Off
0x00A8
Virtual IN 9 Off
0x00A9
Virtual IN 10 Off
0x00AA
Virtual IN 11 Off
0x00AB
Virtual IN 12 Off
0x00AC
Virtual IN 13 Off
0x00AD
Virtual IN 14 Off
0x00AE
Virtual IN 15 Off
0x00AF
Virtual IN 16 Off
0x00B0
Virtual IN 17 Off
0x00B1
Virtual IN 18 Off
0x00B2
Virtual IN 19 Off
0x00B3
Virtual IN 20 Off
0x00B4
Virtual IN 21 Off
0x00B5
Virtual IN 22 Off
0x00B6
Virtual IN 23 Off
0x00B7
Virtual IN 24 Off
0x00B8
Virtual IN 25 Off
415
A3 RECORDS
Code
416
Type
Definition
0x00B9
Virtual IN 26 Off
0x00BA
Virtual IN 27 Off
0x00BB
Virtual IN 28 Off
0x00BC
Virtual IN 29 Off
0x00BD
Virtual IN 30 Off
0x00BE
Virtual IN 31 Off
0x00BF
Virtual IN 32 Off
0x01C0
Remote IN 1 On
0x01C1
Remote IN 2 On
0x01C2
Remote IN 3 On
0x01C3
Remote IN 4 On
0x01C4
Remote IN 5 On
0x01C5
Remote IN 6 On
0x01C6
Remote IN 7 On
0x01C7
Remote IN 8 On
0x01C8
Remote IN 9 On
0x01C9
Remote IN 10 On
0x01CA
Remote IN 11 On
0x01CB
Remote IN 12 On
0x01CC
Remote IN 13 On
0x01CD
Remote IN 14 On
0x01CE
Remote IN 15 On
0x01CF
Remote IN 16 On
0x01D0
Remote IN 17 On
0x01D1
Remote IN 18 On
0x01D2
Remote IN 19 On
0x01D3
Remote IN 20 On
0x01D4
Remote IN 21 On
0x01D5
Remote IN 22 On
0x01D6
Remote IN 23 On
0x01D7
Remote IN 24 On
0x01D8
Remote IN 25 On
0x01D9
Remote IN 26 On
0x01DA
Remote IN 27 On
0x01DB
Remote IN 28 On
0x01DC
Remote IN 29 On
0x01DD
Remote IN 30 On
0x01DE
Remote IN 31 On
0x01DF
Remote IN 32 On
0x01E0
Remote IN 1 Off
0x01E1
Remote IN 2 Off
0x01E2
Remote IN 3 Off
0x01E3
Remote IN 4 Off
0x01E4
Remote IN 5 Off
0x01E5
Remote IN 6 Off
0x01E6
Remote IN 7 Off
0x01E7
Remote IN 8 Off
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0x01E8
Remote IN 9 Off
0x01E9
Remote IN 10 Off
0x01EA
Remote IN 11 Off
0x01EB
Remote IN 12 Off
0x01EC
Remote IN 13 Off
0x01ED
Remote IN 14 Off
0x01EE
Remote IN 15 Off
0x01EF
Remote IN 16 Off
0x01F0
Remote IN 17 Off
0x01F1
Remote IN 18 Off
0x01F2
Remote IN 19 Off
0x01F3
Remote IN 20 Off
0x01F4
Remote IN 21 Off
0x01F5
Remote IN 22 Off
0x01F6
Remote IN 23 Off
0x01F7
Remote IN 24 Off
0x01F8
Remote IN 25 Off
0x01F9
Remote IN 26 Off
0x01FA
Remote IN 27 Off
0x01FB
Remote IN 28 Off
0x01FC
Remote IN 29 Off
0x01FD
Remote IN 30 Off
0x01FE
Remote IN 31 Off
0x01FF
Remote IN 32 Off
0x8041
Therm O/L Trip PKP
0x8042
Therm O/L Trip OP
0x8044
Therm O/L Trip DPO
0x8049
Therm PhA Trip PKP
0x804A
Therm PhA Trip OP
0x804C
Therm PhA Trip DPO
0x8051
Therm PhB Trip PKP
0x8052
Therm PhB Trip OP
0x8054
Therm PhB Trip DPO
0x8061
Therm PhC Trip PKP
0x8062
Therm PhC Trip OP
0x8064
Therm PhC Trip DPO
0x84C1
LE 1 Trip PKP
0x84C2
LE 1 Trip OP
0x84C4
LE 1 Trip DPO
0x8501
LE 2 Trip PKP
0x8502
LE 2 Trip OP
0x8504
LE 2 Trip DPO
0x8541
LE 3 Trip PKP
0x8542
LE 3 Trip OP
0x8544
LE 3 Trip DPO
0x8581
LE 4 Trip PKP
0x8582
LE 4 Trip OP
417
A3 RECORDS
Code
418
Type
Definition
0x8584
LE 4 Trip DPO
0x85C1
LE 5 Trip PKP
0x85C2
LE 5 Trip OP
0x85C4
LE 5 Trip DPO
0x8601
LE 6 Trip PKP
0x8602
LE 6 Trip OP
0x8604
LE 6 Trip DPO
0x8641
LE 7 Trip PKP
0x8642
LE 7 Trip OP
0x8644
LE 7 Trip DPO
0x8681
LE 8 Trip PKP
0x8682
LE 8 Trip OP
0x8684
LE 8 Trip DPO
0x9001
Ph IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9002
Ph IOC1 Trip OP
0x9004
Ph IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9009
Ph A IOC1 Trip PKP
0x900A
Ph A IOC1 Trip OP
0x900C
Ph A IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9011
Ph B IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9012
Ph B IOC1 Trip OP
0x9014
Ph B IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9021
Ph C IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9022
Ph C IOC1 Trip OP
0x9024
Ph C IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9041
Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9042
Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP
0x9044
Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9081
Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9082
Gnd IOC1 Trip OP
0x9084
Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO
0x90C1
Ph TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90C2
Ph TOC1 Trip OP
0x90C4
Ph TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90C9
Ph A TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90CA
Ph A TOC1 Trip OP
0x90CC
Ph A TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90D1
Ph B TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90D2
Ph B TOC1 Trip OP
0x90D4
Ph B TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90E1
Ph C TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90E2
Ph C TOC1 Trip OP
0x90E4
Ph C TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9101
Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9102
Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP
0x9104
Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9141
Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0x9142
Gnd TOC1 Trip OP
0x9144
Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9181
Ph IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9182
Ph IOC2 Trip OP
0x9184
Ph IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9189
Ph A IOC2 Trip PKP
0x918A
Ph A IOC2 Trip OP
0x918C
Ph A IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9191
Ph B IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9192
Ph B IOC2 Trip OP
0x9194
Ph B IOC2 Trip DPO
0x91A1
Ph C IOC2 Trip PKP
0x91A2
Ph C IOC2 Trip OP
0x91A4
Ph C IOC2 Trip DPO
0x91C1
Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP
0x91C2
Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP
0x91C4
Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9201
Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9202
Gnd IOC2 Trip OP
0x9204
Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9241
Ph TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9242
Ph TOC2 Trip OP
0x9244
Ph TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9249
Ph A TOC2 Trip PKP
0x924A
Ph A TOC2 Trip OP
0x924C
Ph A TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9251
Ph B TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9252
Ph B TOC2 Trip OP
0x9254
Ph B TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9261
Ph C TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9262
Ph C TOC2 Trip OP
0x9264
Ph C TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9281
Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9282
Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP
0x9284
Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO
0x92C1
Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP
0x92C2
Gnd TOC2 Trip OP
0x92C4
Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9301
SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9302
SGnd TOC1 Trip OP
0x9304
SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9641
SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9642
SGnd IOC1 Trip OP
0x9644
SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9681
SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9682
SGnd IOC2 Trip OP
0x9684
SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO
419
A3 RECORDS
Code
420
Type
Definition
0x9701
Pcnt Diff Trip PKP
0x9702
Pcnt Diff Trip OP
0x9704
Pcnt Diff Trip DPO
0x9709
Ph Diff A Trip PKP
0x970A
Ph Diff A Trip OP
0x970C
Ph Diff A Trip DPO
0x9711
Ph Diff B Trip PKP
0x9712
Ph Diff B Trip OP
0x9714
Ph Diff B Trip DPO
0x9721
Ph Diff C Trip PKP
0x9722
Ph Diff C Trip OP
0x9724
Ph Diff C Trip DPO
0x9741
RGF1 Trip PKP
0x9742
RGF1 Trip OP
0x9744
RGF1 Trip DPO
0x9781
RGF2 Trip PKP
0x9782
RGF2 Trip OP
0x9784
RGF2 Trip DPO
0x97C1
Inst Diff Trip PKP
0x97C2
Inst Diff Trip OP
0x97C4
Inst Diff Trip DPO
0x9801
NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9802
NSeq TOC1 Trip OP
0x9804
NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9841
NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9842
NSeq TOC2 Trip OP
0x9844
NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO
0x99C1
SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP
0x99C2
SGnd TOC2 Trip OP
0x99C4
SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9C01
LE 9 Trip PKP
0x9C02
LE 9 Trip OP
0x9C04
LE 9 Trip DPO
0x9C41
LE 10 Trip PKP
0x9C42
LE 10 Trip OP
0x9C44
LE 10 Trip DPO
0x9C81
LE 11 Trip PKP
0x9C82
LE 11 Trip OP
0x9C84
LE 11 Trip DPO
0x9CC1
LE 12 Trip PKP
0x9CC2
LE 12 Trip OP
0x9CC4
LE 12 Trip DPO
0x9D01
LE 13 Trip PKP
0x9D02
LE 13 Trip OP
0x9D04
LE 13 Trip DPO
0x9D41
LE 14 Trip PKP
0x9D42
LE 14 Trip OP
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0x9D44
LE 14 Trip DPO
0x9D81
LE 15 Trip PKP
0x9D82
LE 15 Trip OP
0x9D84
LE 15 Trip DPO
0x9DC1
LE 16 Trip PKP
0x9DC2
LE 16 Trip OP
0x9DC4
LE 16 Trip DPO
0xA049
Therm PhA Alrm PKP
0xA04A
Therm PhA Alrm OP
0xA04C
Therm PhA Alrm DPO
0xA051
Therm PhB Alrm PKP
0xA052
Therm PhB Alrm OP
0xA054
Therm PhB Alrm DPO
0xA061
Therm PhC Alrm PKP
0xA062
Therm PhC Alrm OP
0xA064
Therm PhC Alrm DPO
0xA482
Relay Not Ready
0xA4C1
LE 1 Alarm PKP
0xA4C2
LE 1 Alarm OP
0xA4C4
LE 1 Alarm DPO
0xA501
LE 2 Alarm PKP
0xA502
LE 2 Alarm OP
0xA504
LE 2 Alarm DPO
0xA541
LE 3 Alarm PKP
0xA542
LE 3 Alarm OP
0xA544
LE 3 Alarm DPO
0xA581
LE 4 Alarm PKP
0xA582
LE 4 Alarm OP
0xA584
LE 4 Alarm DPO
0xA5C1
LE 5 Alarm PKP
0xA5C2
LE 5 Alarm OP
0xA5C4
LE 5 Alarm DPO
0xA601
LE 6 Alarm PKP
0xA602
LE 6 Alarm OP
0xA604
LE 6 Alarm DPO
0xA641
LE 7 Alarm PKP
0xA642
LE 7 Alarm OP
0xA644
LE 7 Alarm DPO
0xA681
LE 8 Alarm PKP
0xA682
LE 8 Alarm OP
0xA684
LE 8 Alarm DPO
0xABC1
HI Amb Temp PKP
0xABC2
HI Amb Temp OP
0xABC4
HI Amb Temp DPO
0xAC01
LO Amb Temp PKP
0xAC02
LO Amb Temp OP
0xAC04
LO Amb Temp DPO
421
A3 RECORDS
Code
422
Type
Definition
0xAC42
Self Test Alarm OP
0xAD01
R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD02
R1 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD04
R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD41
R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD42
R2 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD44
R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD81
BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAD82
BKR1 Fail Alrm OP
0xAD84
BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO
0xADC2
BKR Stat Fail OP
0xAEC1
BKR2 Stat Fail PKP
0xAEC2
BKR2 Stat Fail OP
0xAF41
BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAF42
BKR2 Fail Alrm OP
0xAF44
BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO
0xB001
Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB002
Ph IOC1 Alarm OP
0xB004
Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB009
Ph A IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB00A
Ph A IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB00C
Ph A IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB011
Ph B IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB012
Ph B IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB014
Ph B IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB021
Ph C IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB022
Ph C IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB024
Ph C IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB041
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB042
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB044
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB081
Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB082
Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP
0xB084
Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB0C1
Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB0C2
Ph TOC1 Alarm OP
0xB0C4
Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB0C9
Ph A TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0CA
Ph A TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0CC
Ph A TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB0D1
Ph B TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0D2
Ph B TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0D4
Ph B TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB0E1
Ph C TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0E2
Ph C TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0E4
Ph C TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB101
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0xB102
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB104
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB141
Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB142
Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP
0xB144
Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB181
Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB182
Ph IOC2 Alarm OP
0xB184
Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB189
Ph A IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB18A
Ph A IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB18C
Ph A IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB191
Ph B IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB192
Ph B IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB194
Ph B IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB1A1
Ph C IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB1A2
Ph C IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB1A4
Ph C IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB1C1
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB1C2
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB1C4
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB201
Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB202
Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP
0xB204
Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB241
Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB242
Ph TOC2 Alarm OP
0xB244
Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB249
Ph A TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB24A
Ph A TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB24C
Ph A TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB251
Ph B TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB252
Ph B TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB254
Ph B TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB261
Ph C TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB262
Ph C TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB264
Ph C TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB281
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB282
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB284
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB2C1
Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB2C2
Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP
0xB2C4
Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB301
SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB302
SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB304
SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB641
SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB642
SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB644
SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO
423
A3 RECORDS
Code
424
Type
Definition
0xB681
SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB682
SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB684
SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB701
Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP
0xB702
Pcnt Diff Alrm OP
0xB704
Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO
0xB709
Ph Dif A Alarm PKP
0xB70A
Ph Dif A Alarm OP
0xB70C
Ph Dif A Alarm DPO
0xB711
Ph Dif B Alarm PKP
0xB712
Ph Dif B Alarm OP
0xB714
Ph Dif B Alarm DPO
0xB721
Ph Dif C Alarm PKP
0xB722
Ph Dif C Alarm OP
0xB724
Ph Dif C Alarm DPO
0xB741
RGF1 Alarm PKP
0xB742
RGF1 Alarm OP
0xB744
RGF1 Alarm DPO
0xB781
RGF2 Alarm PKP
0xB782
RGF2 Alarm OP
0xB784
RGF2 Alarm DPO
0xB7C1
Inst Diff Alrm PKP
0xB7C2
Inst Diff Alrm OP
0xB7C4
Inst Diff Alrm DPO
0xB801
NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB802
NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB804
NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB841
NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB842
NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB844
NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB9C1
SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB9C2
SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB9C4
SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xBC01
LE 9 Alarm PKP
0xBC02
LE 9 Alarm OP
0xBC04
LE 9 Alarm DPO
0xBC41
LE 10 Alarm PKP
0xBC42
LE 10 Alarm OP
0xBC44
LE 10 Alarm DPO
0xBC81
LE 11 Alarm PKP
0xBC82
LE 11 Alarm OP
0xBC84
LE 11 Alarm DPO
0xBCC1
LE 12 Alarm PKP
0xBCC2
LE 12 Alarm OP
0xBCC4
LE 12 Alarm DPO
0xBD01
LE 13 Alarm PKP
0xBD02
LE 13 Alarm OP
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0xBD04
LE 13 Alarm DPO
0xBD41
LE 14 Alarm PKP
0xBD42
LE 14 Alarm OP
0xBD44
LE 14 Alarm DPO
0xBD81
LE 15 Alarm PKP
0xBD82
LE 15 Alarm OP
0xBD84
LE 15 Alarm DPO
0xBDC1
LE 16 Alarm PKP
0xBDC2
LE 16 Alarm OP
0xBDC4
LE 16 Alarm DPO
0xC042
Output Relay 3 On
0xC082
Output Relay 4 On
0xC0C2
Output Relay 5 On
0xC102
Output Relay 6 On
0xC142
Self-Test Rly 7 On
0xC182
Output Relay 1 On
0xC184
Output Relay 1 Off
0xC1C2
Output Relay 2 On
0xC1C4
Output Relay 2 Off
0xC202
BKR Connected
0xC2C2
BKR2 Connected
0xC4C1
LE 1 PKP
0xC4C2
LE 1 OP
0xC4C4
LE 1 DPO
0xC501
LE 2 PKP
0xC502
LE 2 OP
0xC504
LE 2 DPO
0xC541
LE 3 PKP
0xC542
LE 3 OP
0xC544
LE 3 DPO
0xC581
LE 4 PKP
0xC582
LE 4 OP
0xC584
LE 4 DPO
0xC5C1
LE 5 PKP
0xC5C2
LE 5 OP
0xC5C4
LE 5 DPO
0xC601
LE 6 PKP
0xC602
LE 6 OP
0xC604
LE 6 DPO
0xC641
LE 7 PKP
0xC642
LE 7 OP
0xC644
LE 7 DPO
0xC681
LE 8 PKP
0xC682
LE 8 OP
0xC684
LE 8 DPO
0xC882
Setpoint Group2 On
0xCA02
52a Contact OP
425
A3 RECORDS
Code
426
Type
Definition
0xCA42
52b Contact OP
0xCA44
52b Contact DPO
0xCA82
Reset OK
0xCCC2
BKR Stat Open
0xCD02
BKR Stat Clsd
0xCD42
Setpoint Group1 On
0xD001
Ph IOC1 PKP
0xD002
Ph IOC1 OP
0xD004
Ph IOC1 DPO
0xD041
Ntrl IOC1 PKP
0xD042
Ntrl IOC1 OP
0xD044
Ntrl IOC1 DPO
0xD081
Gnd IOC1 PKP
0xD082
Gnd IOC1 OP
0xD084
Gnd IOC1 DPO
0xD0C1
Ph TOC1 PKP
0xD0C2
Ph TOC1 OP
0xD0C4
Ph TOC1 DPO
0xD101
Ntrl TOC1 PKP
0xD102
Ntrl TOC1 OP
0xD104
Ntrl TOC1 DPO
0xD141
Gnd TOC1 PKP
0xD142
Gnd TOC1 OP
0xD144
Gnd TOC1 DPO
0xD181
Ph IOC2 PKP
0xD182
Ph IOC2 OP
0xD184
Ph IOC2 DPO
0xD1C1
Ntrl IOC2 PKP
0xD1C2
Ntrl IOC2 OP
0xD1C4
Ntrl IOC2 DPO
0xD201
Gnd IOC2 PKP
0xD202
Gnd IOC2 OP
0xD204
Gnd IOC2 DPO
0xD241
Ph TOC2 PKP
0xD242
Ph TOC2 OP
0xD244
Ph TOC2 DPO
0xD281
Ntrl TOC2 PKP
0xD282
Ntrl TOC2 OP
0xD284
Ntrl TOC2 DPO
0xD2C1
Gnd TOC2 PKP
0xD2C2
Gnd TOC2 OP
0xD2C4
Gnd TOC2 DPO
0xD301
SGnd TOC1 PKP
0xD302
SGnd TOC1 OP
0xD304
SGnd TOC1 DPO
0xD641
SGnd IOC1 PKP
0xD642
SGnd IOC1 OP
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0xD644
SGnd IOC1 DPO
0xD681
SGnd IOC2 PKP
0xD682
SGnd IOC2 OP
0xD684
SGnd IOC2 DPO
0xD701
Pcnt DIFF PKP
0xD702
Pcnt DIFF OP
0xD704
Pcnt DIFF DPO
0xD741
RGF1 PKP
0xD742
RGF1 OP
0xD744
RGF1 DPO
0xD781
RGF2 PKP
0xD782
RGF2 OP
0xD784
RGF2 DPO
0xD7C1
Inst Diff PKP
0xD7C2
Inst Diff OP
0xD7C4
Inst Diff DPO
0xD801
NSeq TOC1 PKP
0xD802
NSeq TOC1 OP
0xD804
NSeq TOC1 DPO
0xD841
NSeq TOC2 PKP
0xD842
NSeq TOC2 OP
0xD844
NSeq TOC2 DPO
0xD9C1
SGnd TOC2 PKP
0xD9C2
SGnd TOC2 OP
0xD9C4
SGnd TOC2 DPO
0xDA02
BKR2 52a Cont OP
0xDA04
BKR2 52a Cont DPO
0xDA42
BKR2 52b Cont OP
0xDA44
BKR2 52b Cont DPO
0xDA82
BKR2 Stat Open OP
0xDA84
BKR2 Stat Open DPO
0xDAC1
BKR2 Stat Clsd PKP
0xDAC2
BKR2 Stat Clsd OP
0xDAC4
BKR2 Stat Clsd DPO
0xDB01
Trip BKR 1 PKP
0xDB02
Trip BKR 1 OP
0xDB04
Trip BKR 1 DPO
0xDB41
Trip BKR 2 PKP
0xDB42
Trip BKR 2 OP
0xDB44
Trip BKR 2 DPO
0xDB8A
2ND HMNC DIFF PH A
0xDB92
2ND HMNC DIFF PH B
0xDBA2
2ND HMNC DIFF PH C
0xDBCA
5TH HMNC DIFF PH A
0xDBD2
5TH HMNC DIFF PH B
0xDBE2
5TH HMNC DIFF PH C
0xDC01
LE 9 PKP
427
A3 RECORDS
Code
428
Type
Definition
0xDC02
LE 9 OP
0xDC04
LE 9 DPO
0xDC41
LE 10 PKP
0xDC42
LE 10 OP
0xDC44
LE 10 DPO
0xDC81
LE 11 PKP
0xDC82
LE 11 OP
0xDC84
LE 11 DPO
0xDCC1
LE 12 PKP
0xDCC2
LE 12 OP
0xDCC4
LE 12 DPO
0xDD01
LE 13 PKP
0xDD02
LE 13 OP
0xDD04
LE 13 DPO
0xDD41
LE 14 PKP
0xDD42
LE 14 OP
0xDD44
LE 14 DPO
0xDD81
LE 15 PKP
0xDD82
LE 15 OP
0xDD84
LE 15 DPO
0xDDC1
LE 16 PKP
0xDDC2
LE 16 OP
0xDDC4
LE 16 DPO
0xE042
Therm O/L Blck OP
0xE044
Therm O/L Blck Off
0xE182
Output Relay 1 BLK
0xE184
Relay 1 BLK Off
0xE1C2
Output Relay 2 BLK
0xE1C4
Relay 2 BLK Off
0xE882
Group Change Blk
0xE884
Grp Change Blk DPO
0xF002
Ph IOC1 Block
0xF004
Ph IOC1 Block DPO
0xF042
Ntrl IOC1 Block
0xF044
Ntrl IOC1 Blk DPO
0xF082
Gnd IOC1 Block
0xF084
Gnd IOC1 Block DPO
0xF0C2
Ph TOC1 Block
0xF0C4
Ph TOC1 Block DPO
0xF102
Ntrl TOC1 Block
0xF104
Ntrl TOC1 BlockDPO
0xF142
Gnd TOC1 Block
0xF144
Gnd TOC1 Block DPO
0xF182
Ph IOC2 Block
0xF184
Ph IOC2 Block DPO
0xF1C2
Ntrl IOC2 Block
0xF1C4
Ntrl IOC2 Blk DPO
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0xF202
Gnd IOC2 Block
0xF204
Gnd IOC2 Block DPO
0xF242
Ph TOC2 Block
0xF244
Ph TOC2 Block DPO
0xF282
Ntrl TOC2 Block
0xF284
Ntrl TOC2 Blk DPO
0xF2C2
Gnd TOC2 Block
0xF2C4
Gnd TOC2 Blk DPO
0xF302
SGnd TOC1 Block
0xF304
SGnd TOC1 BlockDPO
0xF642
SGnd IOC1 Block
0xF644
SGnd IOC1 Blk DPO
0xF682
SGnd IOC2 Block
0xF684
SGnd IOC2 Blk DPO
0xF702
Pcnt Diff Block
0xF704
Ph Diff Block DPO
0xF742
RGF1 Block
0xF744
RGF1 Block DPO
0xF782
RGF2 Block
0xF784
RGF2 Block DPO
0xF7C2
Inst Diff Block
0xF7C4
Inst Diff BlockDPO
0xF802
NSeq TOC1 Blk
0xF804
NSeq TOC1 Blk DPO
0xF842
NSeq TOC2 Blk
0xF844
NSeq TOC2 Blk DPO
0xF9C2
SGnd TOC2 Block
0xF9C4
SGnd TOC2 Blk DPO
0xFB02
Trip BKR1 Blk
0xFB04
Trip BKR1 Blk DPO
0xFB42
Trip BKR2 Blk
0xFB44
Trip BKR2 Blk DPO
0xFB82
2nd Hmnc Diff Blk
0xFB84
2nd Hmnc Diff BlkDPO
0xFBC2
5th Hmnc Diff Blk
0xFBC4
5th Hmnc Diff BlkDPO
429
A3 RECORDS
Transient records
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > TRANSIENT RECORDS
FORCE TRIGGER?
No
Range: No, Yes
TOTAL RECORDS
1
Range: N/A
AVAILABLE RECORDS
1
Range: N/A
LAST CLEARED
Feb 08 2009
Range: N/A
Clear event record

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC
CLEAR
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all event records.
Clear transient record

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR TRANST REC
CLEAR
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all transient records.
Clear thermal capacity record

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR THERM CAP
CLEAR
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all thermal capacity records.
430
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
A4 Target messages
Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as
pickups, trips, alarms, or asserted input. The target messages shown in the table below are
displayed as necessary.
The relay displays the most recent event first, and after 5 seconds starts rolling up the
other target messages, until the Reset command is initiated. If the Reset command is not
performed, but any of the other faceplate pushbuttons is pressed, the display will not show
the target messages, unless the user navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES,
where they can be reviewed.
The target messages can be reviewed by pressing Up and Down message pushbuttons
from the relay keypad.
The following table from the 345 Communication Guide shows the list of Target Messages
Code
Type
FC134A
unsigned 16 bits
Definition
Active Targets
No Active Targets
Clock Not Set
IRIG-B Failure
14
Comm. Alert 1
15
Comm. Alert 2
16
Comm. Alert 3
17
Ethernet Link Fail
18
High ENET Traffic
19
Ambient Temp. >80C
21
BKR2 Status Unkwn
0x8040
Therm O/L Trip
0x8480
Relay Not Config
0x84C0
LE 1 Trip
0x8500
LE 2 Trip
0x8540
LE 3 Trip
0x8580
LE 4 Trip
0x85C0
LE 5 Trip
0x8600
LE 6 Trip
0x8640
LE 7 Trip
0x8680
LE 8 Trip
0x9000
Ph IOC1 Trip
0x9040
Ntrl IOC1 Trip
0x9080
Gnd IOC1 Trip
0x90C0
Ph TOC1 Trip
0x9100
Ntrl TOC1 Trip
0x9140
Gnd TOC1 Trip
0x9180
Ph IOC2 Trip
0x91C0
Ntrl IOC2 Trip
0x9200
Gnd IOC2 Trip
0x9240
Ph TOC2 Trip
0x9280
Ntrl TOC2 Trip
431
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Code
432
Type
Definition
0x92C0
Gnd TOC2 Trip
0x9300
SGnd TOC1 Trip
0x9640
SGnd IOC1 Trip
0x9680
SGnd IOC2 Trip
0x9700
Pcnt DIFF Trip
0x9740
RGF1 Trip
0x9780
RGF2 Trip
0x97C0
Inst DIFF Trip
0x9800
NSeq TOC1 Trip
0x9840
NSeq TOC2 Trip
0x99C0
SGnd TOC2 Trip
0x9C00
LE 9 Trip
0x9C40
LE 10 Trip
0x9C80
LE 11 Trip
0x9CC0
LE 12 Trip
0x9D00
LE 13 Trip
0x9D40
LE 14 Trip
0x9D80
LE 15 Trip
0x9DC0
LE 16 Trip
0xA040
Therm Lvl Alrm
0xA480
Not Configured
0xA4C0
LE 1 Alarm
0xA500
LE 2 Alarm
0xA540
LE 3 Alarm
0xA580
LE 4 Alarm
0xA5C0
LE 5 Alarm
0xA600
LE 6 Alarm
0xA640
LE 7 Alarm
0xA680
LE 8 Alarm
0xABC0
HI Ambient Temp
0xAC00
LO Ambient Temp
0xAC40
Self Test Alarm
0xAD00
Rly1 Coil Mn Alrm
0xAD40
Rly2 Coil Mn Alrm
0xAD80
BKR Fail Alrm
0xADC0
BKRStatus Fail
0xAEC0
BKR2 Status Fail
0xAF40
BKR2 Fail Alrm
0xB000
Ph IOC1 Alarm
0xB040
Ntrl IOC1 Alarm
0xB080
Gnd IOC1 Alarm
0xB0C0
Ph TOC1 Alarm
0xB100
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm
0xB140
Gnd TOC1 Alarm
0xB180
Ph IOC2 Alarm
0xB1C0
Ntrl IOC2 Alarm
0xB200
Gnd IOC2 Alarm
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Code
Type
Definition
0xB240
Ph TOC2 Alarm
0xB280
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm
0xB2C0
Gnd TOC2 Alarm
0xB300
SGnd TOC1 Alarm
0xB640
SGnd IOC1 Alarm
0xB680
SGnd IOC2 Alarm
0xB700
Pcnt DIFF Alarm
0xB740
RGF1 Alarm
0xB780
RGF2 Alarm
0xB7C0
Inst DIFF Alarm
0xB800
NSeq TOC1 Alarm
0xB840
NSeq TOC2 Alarm
0xB9C0
SGnd TOC2 Alarm
0xBC00
LE 9 Alarm
0xBC40
LE 10 Alarm
0xBC80
LE 11 Alarm
0xBCC0
LE 12 Alarm
0xBD00
LE 13 Alarm
0xBD40
LE 14 Alarm
0xBD80
LE 15 Alarm
0xBDC0
LE 16 Alarm
0xC200
BKR Connected
0xC2C0
BKR2 Connected
0xC4C0
LE 1
0xC500
LE 2
0xC540
LE 3
0xC580
LE 4
0xC5C0
LE 5
0xC600
LE 6
0xC640
LE 7
0xC680
LE 8
0xC880
Setpoint Group2
0xC980
Maint Required
0xCA00
52a Contact
0xCA40
52b Contact
0xCA80
Reset OK
0xCD00
BKR Stat Clsd
0xCD40
Setpoint Group1
0xD000
Ph IOC1
0xD040
Ntrl IOC1
0xD080
Gnd IOC1
0xD0C0
Ph TOC1
0xD100
Ntrl TOC1
0xD140
Gnd TOC1
0xD180
Ph IOC2
0xD1C0
Ntrl IOC2
0xD200
Gnd IOC2
433
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Code
434
Type
Definition
0xD240
Ph TOC2
0xD280
Ntrl TOC2
0xD2C0
Gnd TOC2
0xD300
SGnd TOC1
0xD640
SGnd IOC1
0xD680
SGnd IOC2
0xD6C0
NegSeq IOC
0xD700
Pcnt DIFF
0xD740
RGF1
0xD780
RGF2
0xD7C0
Inst DIFF
0xD800
NSeq TOC1
0xD840
NSeq TOC2
0xD9C0
SGnd TOC2
0xDA00
BKR 2 52a Contact
0xDA40
BKR 2 52b Contact
0xDA80
BKR 2 Status Open
0xDAC0
BKR2 Status Closed
0xDB00
Trip Breaker 1
0xDB40
Trip Breaker 2
0xDB80
2nd Hmnc Diff
0xDBC0
5th Hmnc Diff
0xDC00
LE 9
0xDC40
LE 10
0xDC80
LE 11
0xDCC0
LE 12
0xDD00
LE 13
0xDD40
LE 14
0xDD80
LE 15
0xDDC0
LE 16
0xE040
Therm O/L Blck
0xE180
Output Relay 1 BLK
0xE1C0
Output Relay 2 BLK
0xE880
Group Change Blk
0xF000
Ph IOC1 Block
0xF040
Ntrl IOC1 Block
0xF080
Gnd IOC1 Block
0xF0C0
Ph TOC1 Block
0xF100
Ntrl TOC1 Block
0xF140
Gnd TOC1 Block
0xF180
Ph IOC2 Block
0xF1C0
Ntrl IOC2 Block
0xF200
Gnd IOC2 Block
0xF240
Ph TOC2 Block
0xF280
Ntrl TOC2 Block
0xF2C0
Gnd TOC2 Block
0xF300
SGnd TOC1 Block
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Code
Type
Definition
0xF640
SGnd IOC1 Block
0xF680
SGnd IOC2 Block
0xF6C0
NegSeq IOC Block
0xF700
Pcnt DIFF Block
0xF740
RGF1 Block
0xF780
RGF2 Block
0xF7C0
Inst DIFF Block
0xF800
NSeq TOC1 Block
0xF840
NSeq TOC2 Block
0xF9C0
SGnd TOC2 Block
0xFB00
Trip BKR1 Block
0xFB40
Trip BKR2 Block
0xFB80
2nd Hmnc Diff Blk
0xFBC0
5th Hmnc Diff Blk
The PKP messages will appear on the relay display as long as their respective flags are
active. The messages will disappear from the display, when either the protection
element drops out before operation, such as when the condition clears before
reaching operation, or when the protection element operates.
The OP and BKR Status messages will appear on the relay display, when the respective
element operates, with the element function set to TRIP, or LATCHED ALARM. The
message will stay on the display after the condition clears, and will disappear upon
Reset command. If the element function is selected to ALARM, or CONTROL, the
message will disappear from the display, when the condition causing operation clears.
The Breaker Open and Breaker Close messages will appear on the display and stay for
5 seconds only, unless the reset command is initiated, or the element changes its
state. For example, if the breaker is detected Open, the message Breaker Open OK
will appear on the display and will stay for 5 seconds, unless the breaker status
changes to Close. If the breaker status changes to "Close" within 5 seconds after the
breaker has been detected open, the message Breaker Open OK will disappear, and
the message Breaker Close OK will appear and stay for 5 seconds.
The Contact Input ON/OFF, Virtual Input ON/OFF, and Remote Input ON/OFF messages
will not appear as target messages upon change of state. The state change, however,
will be logged in the Event recorder.
Examples of how the messages appear on the display:

Example 1:
Phase IOC1 Settings:
PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Trip
PH IOC1 PICKUP = 1.00 x CT
PH IOC1 DELAY = 0.20 s
When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied, the 345 display shows the
following target message:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Trip
STATE: PKP
After the 200 ms time delay expires, the display shows the following message only:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Trip
STATE: OP
435
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Example 2:
PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Latched Alarm
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: PKP
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: OP
Example 3:
PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Alarm
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: PKP
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Alarm
STATE: OP
Once the condition clears, the target message will disappear.
NOTE:
NOTE
436
Digital Energy

Chapter 5: Quick setup - Front
control panel
Quick setup - Front control panel
The Quick Setup utility is part of the 345 relay main menu, and can be used for quick and
easy programming. Power transformer parameters, and settings for the commonly used
transformer elements can be easily set. Use the Quick Setup utility to program the
following:
Relay Status
Nominal Frequency
W1 Phase CT Primary
W1 Ground CT Primary
W2 Phase CT Primary
W2 Ground CT Primary
Transformer Type
Transformer Rated Load
W1 Nominal Voltage
W1 Grounding
W2 Nominal Voltage
W2 Grounding
Transformer Percent Differential
Phase TOC1 Function
Ground TOC1 Function
Phase IOC1 Function
Ground IOC1 Function
Ensure the relay is in "Relay Ready" state before using Quick Setup.
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 1: Quick Setup menu
51
CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL
ACTUAL VALUES
QUICK SETUP
SETPOINTS
MAINTENANCE
QUICK SETUP
RELAY STATUS
XFMR PERCENT DIFF

PCNT DIFF FUNCTION
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
MINIMUM PICKUP
W1 PH CT PRIMARY
SLOPE 1
W1 PH CT SECONDARY
BREAKPOINT 1
W1 GND CT PRIMARY
BREAKPOINT 2
W1 GND CT SECONDARY
SLOPE 2
W2 PH CT PRIMARY
W2 PH CT SECONDARY
W2 GND CT PRIMARY
PHASE TOC1
PH TOC1 FUNCTION
W2 GND CT SECONDARY
PHASE CT INPUT
TRANSFORMER TYPE
PH TOC1 PICKUP
XFMR RATED LOAD
PH TOC1 CURVE
W1 NOM VOLTAGE
PH TOC1 TDM
W1 GROUNDING
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
W2 NOM VOLTAGE
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
W2 GROUNDING
XFMR PERCENT DIFF
PH TOC1 FUNCTION
GND TOC1 FUNCTION
GROUND TOC1
GND TOC1 FUNCTION
GND CT INPUT
PH IOC1 FUNCTION
GND TOC1 PICKUP
GND IOC1 FUNCTION
GND TOC1 CURVE

GND TOC1 TDM
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
PHASE IOC1
PH IOC1 FUNCTION
PH CT INPUT
PH IOC1 PICKUP
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
GROUND IOC1
GND IOC1 FUNCTION
GND CT INPUT
GND IOC1 PICKUP
897759A2.cdr
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR

RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
52
QUICK SETUP MENU
Quick Setup menu

The setpoints below can be programmed under the "Quick Setup" menu.
Note that monitoring of Breaker Status via 52a, 52b, or both of these contacts,, should be
programmed under SETPOINTS > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER.
PATH: QUICK SETUP >
RELAY STATUS
Range: Not Ready, Ready
Default: Not Ready
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
Range: 60 Hz, 50 Hz
Default: 60 Hz
W1 PH CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1
Default: 5 A
W1 GND/SGND CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000/600 A in steps of 1
Default: 5 A
W2 PH CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1
Default: 5 A
W2 GND/SGND CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000/600 A in steps of 1
Default: 5 A
TRANSFORMER TYPE
Range: Refer to above "Transformer Types" table
Default: Y/d30
XFMR RATED LOAD
Range: 0.01 to 50.00 MVA in steps of 0.01 MVA
Default: 5.0 MVA
W1 NOM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.1 to 65.0 kV in steps of 0.1 kV
Default: 13.8 kV
W1 GROUNDING
Range: Not Within Zone, Within Zone
Default: Not Within Zone
W2 NOM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.1 to 65.0 kV in steps of 0.1 kV
Default: 4.16 kV
W2 GROUNDING
XFMR PERCENT DIFF
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Disabled
53
QUICK SETUP MENU
PCNT DIFF FUNCTION

Default: Disabled
MINIMUM PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 0.10 x CT
SLOPE 1
Range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 25%
BREAKPOINT 1
Default: 1.50 x CT
BREAKPOINT 2
Default: 1.50 x CT
SLOPE 2
Default: 95%
PH TOC1 FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
PHASE CT INPUT
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
PH TOC1 PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x CT
PH TOC1 CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite
Time, IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse, IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/
Short
Default: Ext. Inverse
PH TOC1 TDM
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
GND TOC1 FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
54
QUICK SETUP MENU
GND CT INPUT
Default: CT(W1)
GND TOC1 PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x CT
GND TOC1 CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite
Time, IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse, IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/
Short
Default: Ext. Inverse
GND TOC1 TDM
Default: 1.00
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
Range: Do not operate, Operate
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
PH IOC1 FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
PH CT INPUT
Default: CT(W1)
PH IOC1 PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x CT
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
GND IOC FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
55
QUICK SETUP MENU
GND CT INPUT
Default: CT(W1)
GND IOC1 PICKUP
Default: 1.00 x CT
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
NOTE:
NOTE
The settings changed using the Quick Setup menu, are available for review and
modification by navigating through S2 SYSTEM SETUP and S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT
GROUP 1 in the SETPOINTS main menu.
menu are available for rew
56
Digital Energy

Chapter 6: Setpoints
Setpoints
Setpoints Main Menu

The 345 has a considerable number of programmable setpoints, all of which make the
relay extremely flexible. These setpoints have been grouped into a variety of pages and
subpages as shown below. Each setpoints menu has a section that describes in detail the
setpoints found on that menu.
Figure 1: Setpoints main menu
SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
S1 RELAY SETUP
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CLOCK
S3 PROTECTION
PASSWORD SECURITY
COMMUNICATIONS
S4 CONTROLS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
S3 PROTECTION
SETPOINT GROUP 1
SETPOINT GROUP 2
EVENT RECORDER
TRANSIENT RECDR
FRONT PANEL
INSTALLATION
S4 CONTROLS
CHANGE SETP GROUP
VIRTUAL INPUTS
LOGIC ELEMENTS
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CURRENT SENSING
W1 BREAKER FAIL
POWER SYSTEM
W2 BREAKER FAIL
TRANSFORMER
RESET
WNDG 1 BREAKER
WNDG 2 BREAKER
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
897757A1.cdr
61
SETPOINTS MAIN MENU
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Setpoint entry methods

Before placing the relay into IN SERVICE mode, setpoints defining system characteristics,
inputs, relay outputs, and protection settings must be entered using one of the following
methods:
Front panel, using the keypad and the display.
Front USB port, or rear RS485, Ethernet 100 FX, Ethernet 10/100 BaseT (optional) port,
and a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software supplied with the relay.
Rear serial RS485, and a SCADA system running user-written software.
Any of these methods can be used to enter the same information. A computer, however,
makes entry much easier. Files can be stored and downloaded for fast, error free entry
when a computer is used. To facilitate this process, the GE EnerVista CD with the EnerVista
SR3 Setup software is supplied with the relay.
The relay leaves the factory with setpoints programmed to default values, and these
values are shown throughout the setpoint message illustrations. Some of these factory
default values can be left unchanged whenever they satisfy the application.
At a minimum, the S2 SYSTEM SETUP setpoints must be entered for the system to function
correctly. To safeguard against the installation of a relay into which setpoints have not
been entered, the Relay Not Ready self-test warning is displayed. In addition, the critical
failure relay will be de-energized. Once the relay has been programmed for the intended
application, the S1 RELAY SETUP/ INSTALLATION/ RELAY STATUS setpoint should be
changed from Not Ready (the default) to Ready.
Common setpoints
To make the application of this device as simple as possible, similar methods of operation
and similar types of setpoints are incorporated in various features. Rather than repeat
operation descriptions for this class of setpoint throughout the manual, a general
description is presented in this overview. Details that are specific to a particular feature are
included in the discussion of the feature. The form and nature of these setpoints is
described below.
FUNCTION setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION setpoint determines the

operational characteristic of each feature. The range for these setpoints is two or
more of: Disabled, Enabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm, and Control.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: Disabled, the feature is not operational.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: Enabled, the feature is operational.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: Trip, then the feature is operational. When an
output is generated, the feature declares a Trip condition, and operates the Trip relay
(output relay 1), any other selected aux. output relays, and displays the appropriate
trip message.
If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: Alarm or Latched Alarm, then the feature is
operational. When an output is generated, the feature declares an Alarm condition
which operates any selected aux.output relays and displays the appropriate alarm
message.
If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: Control the feature is operational. When an output
is generated, the feature operates any selected output relays. The Trip, Alarm, and
Control function setpoint values are also used to select those operations that will be
stored in the Event Recorder.
62
RELAYS (36) setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> RELAYS (3-6) setpoint selects the
relays required to operate when the feature generates an output. The range is any
combination of the Auxiliary relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6).
PICKUP setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> PICKUP setpoint selects the threshold

above which the measured parameter causes an output from the measuring element.
SETPOINTS MAIN MENU
DELAY setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> DELAY setpoint selects a fixed time interval
to delay an input signal from appearing at the output. The time from a contact input
change of state or an AC parameter input level change to a contact closure of the 1
Trip relay, is the time selected as time delay in this setpoint plus approximately up to 2
power frequency periods.
DIRECTION setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> DIRECTION setpoint is available for

overcurrent features which are subject to control from a directional element. The
range is Disabled, Forward, and Reverse. If set to Disabled, the element is
allowed to operate for current flow in any direction. There is no supervision from the
directional element. If set to Forward, the element is allowed to operate for current
flow in the forward direction only, as determined by the directional element. If set to
Reverse, the element is allowed to operate for current flow in the reverse direction
only, as determined by the directional element.
Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams provide a complete comprehensive understanding of the operation of
each feature. These sequential logic diagrams illustrate how each setpoint, input
parameter, and internal logic is used in the feature to obtain an output. In addition to these
logic diagrams, written descriptions are provided in the setpoints chapter which includes
each feature.
Setpoints: Shown as a block with a heading labeled SETPOINT. The exact wording of
the displayed setpoint message identifies the setpoint. Major functional setpoint
selections are listed below the name and are incorporated in the logic.
Compensator Blocks: Shown as a block with an inset box labeled RUN with the
associated pickup/dropout setpoint shown directly above. Element operation of the
detector is controlled by the signal entering the RUN inset. The measurement/
comparison can only be performed if a logic 1 is provided at the RUN input. The
relationship between setpoint and input parameter is indicated by the following
symbols: < (less than) " > (greater than), etc.
Time Delays: Shown as a block with either pickup, drop-out, or both; times in
milliseconds or seconds. If the delay is adjustable, associated delay setpoint is shown
with block SETPOINT on the top of the delay block.
LED Indicators: Shown as the following schematic symbol, . The exact wording of
the front panel label identifies the indicator.
Logic: Described with basic logic gates (AND, OR, XOR, NAND, NOR). The inverter
(logical NOT), is shown as a circle: .
Setting text abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in the setpoints pages.
A: amperes
kA: kiloamperes
kV: kilovolts
MVA: mega-volt-amperes
AUX: auxiliary
COM, Comms: communications
CT: current transformer
GND: ground
Hz: Hertz
MAX: maximum
63
SETPOINTS MAIN MENU
64
MIN: minimum
SEC, s: seconds
Ctrl: control
Hr & hr: hour
O/L: overload
S1 RELAY SETUP
S1 Relay setup
Figure 2: Relay setup menu
S1 RELAY SETUP
CLOCK
S1 CLOCK
PASSWORD SECURITY
DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)
COMMUNICATIONS
TIME (HH:MM:SS)
EVENT RECORDER
DLS ENABLE
TRANSIENT RECDR
DLS START MONTH
FRONT PANEL
DLS START WEEK
INSTALLATION
DLS START WEEKDAY
S1 EVENT RECORDER
PICKUP EVENTS
DROPOUT EVENTS
DLS END MONTH
TRIP EVENTS
DLS END WEEK
ALARM EVENTS
DLS END WEEKDAY
CONTROL EVENTS
IRIG-B
CONTACT INPUTS
SNTP MODE
LOGIC ELEMENTS
SNTP PORT
VIRTUAL INPUTS
SNTP SERVER IP ADR
REMOTE INPUTS
UTC OFFSET
S1 PASSWORD SECURITY
LOC SETPOINTS PSWD
LOC CONTROLS PSWD
SETTING DATE/TIME
S1 TRANSIENT RECDR
BUFFER SETUP
TRIGGER MODE
TRIGGER POSITION
TRIGGER ON PKP
S1 COMMUNICATIONS
RS485
TRIGGER ON DPO
ETHERNET
TRIGGER ON TRIP
MODBUS PROTOCOL
TRIGGER ON ALARM
TRIGGER ON INPUT 1
IEC60870-5-103
TRIGGER ON INPUT 2
IEC60870-5-104
TRIGGER ON INPUT 3
DNP PROTOCOL
61850 PROTOCOL
S1 FRONT PANEL
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
MESSAGE TIMEOUT
SCREEN SAVER
W1 BKR OPEN COLOR
W1 BKR CLSD COLOR
W2 BKR OPEN COLOR
W2 BKR CLSD COLOR
S1 INSTALLATION
897764.cdr
RELAY NAME
RELAY STATUS
Clock
The 345 relay has an internal real time clock that performs time stamping via IRIG-B for
various features such as the event and transient recorders. This time stamping is available
with the IRIG-B signal connected to the relay terminals and set to Enabled. When an IRIG-
65
S1 RELAY SETUP
B device is connected to the relay terminals, the relay detects the DC shift or the Amplitude
Modulated signal automatically. Time stamping on multiple relays can be synchronized to
1.0 ms with the use of IRIG-B input. Time stamping is also optionally available using SNTP.
Time synchronization priority uses the IRIG-B and SNTP protocols - via Modbus, IEC608705-103, IEC60870-5-104, or DNP commands - as follows:
IRIG-B has the highest priority, so any other source of synchronization should be rejected if
IRIG-B is the synchronization source and an IRIG-B signal is available.
SNTP has the second highest priority, so if IRIG-B is not the synchronization source but
SNTP is, then any other source of synchronization should be rejected.
Synchronization commands are all eventually translated into a MODBUS function, and as
such are blocked from the MODBUS layer as required.
Any synchronization commands other than Modbus, IEC60870-5-103, IEC60870-5-104, or
DNP will be accepted only if IRIG-B and SNTP are not the synchronization sources. There is
no prioritization amongst synchronization commands. A synchronization command issued
from DNP for example, can be directly followed by another from MODBUS, for example.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK
DATE: (MM/DD/YYYY)
Range: Month: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec Day: 1 to 31 Year:
2009 to 2099
Default: Jan 15 2009
This setting sets the date in the specified format.
TIME: (HH:MM:SS)
Range: 0 to 23: 0 to 59: 0 to59
Default: 03:15:50
This setting sets the time in the specified format.
DLS ENABLE
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
With DLS Enabled, the main CPU has to maintain the information regarding
AV.m_DaylightSavingsActive, because it is necessary in the comms CPU to translate
from localtime to UTC in 61850 protocol. In addition, if SNTP is enabled, the main CPU will
receive UTC time from comms CPU and it needs to apply this in order to pass it to
localtime.
Without any other synchronization, DLS correction is applied only at 0200 hours on
daylight saving months.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK > DLS ENABLE [ENABLED]
DLS START MONTH:
Range: Not Set, January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September,
October, November, December
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the month for the DLS start time.
DLS START WEEK:
Range: Not Set, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the week of the month for the DLS start time.
66
S1 RELAY SETUP
DLS START WEEKDAY:

Range: Not Set, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT, SUN
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the weekday for the DLS start time.
DLS END MONTH:
Range: Not Set, January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September,
October, November, December
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the month for the end of the DLS time.
DLS END WEEK:
Range: Not Set, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the week of the month for the end of the DLS time.
DLS END WEEKDAY:
Range: Not Set, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT, SUN
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the weekday for the end of the DLS time.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK
IRIG-B:
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the IRIG-B signal for time stamp synchronization.
When the IRIG-B setting is enabled, the time received is directly stamped as local date and
time. If there is no signal, one event and alarm is generated. Any other attempted
synchronization commands should be ignored in the main CPU. Since the user has the
capability to enable both SNTP and IRIG-B via the HMI, the system will synchronize to SNTP,
provided SNTP packets are received, when an IRIG-B signal is unavailable.
1.
Set the IRIG-B to Enabled if the IRIG-B device is connected to the relay IRIG-B
terminals. The relay will display the message IRIG-B failure in the case of either no
IRIG-B signal from the connected IRIG-B device, or when the signal cannot be
decoded.
2.
Set the date and time per the specified date and time format.
3.
Set the start time of the Daylight Saving (DLS) time, by selecting the Month, the Week
of the month, and the Weekday defining the beginning of the Daylight Saving time.
4.
Set the end of the Daylight Saving time, by selecting the Month, the Week of the
month, and the Weekday defining the end of the Daylight Saving time.
The clock has a super-capacitor back-up, so that time, date, and events will be kept for up
to 3 days in cases of loss of relay control power.
Password security
Password security features are designed into the relay to provide protection against
unauthorized setpoint changes and control. The relay has programmable passwords for
both Local and Remote access, which can be used to allow setpoint changes and
command execution from both the front panel and the communications ports. These
passwords consist of 3 to 10 alphanumeric characters. The Local and the Remote
passwords are initially set after entering in a Master Reset Password (MRP). The Master
Reset Password (MRP) is set to NULL when the relay is shipped from the factory. When the
MRP is programmed to NULL all password security is disabled.. The remote user may
choose to allow the local user to change the local passwords.
67
S1 RELAY SETUP
Each interface (RS485, Ethernet, USB, and front panel keypad) is independent of one
another, meaning that enabling setpoint access on one interface does not enable access
for any of the other interfaces (i.e., the password must be explicitly entered via the
interface from which access is desired).
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software incorporates a facility for programming the relays
passwords as well as enabling/disabling setpoint access. For example, when an attempt is
made to modify a setpoint but access is restricted, the program will prompt the user to
enter the password and send it to the relay before the setpoint can actually be written to
the relay. If a SCADA system is used for relay programming, it is up to the programmer to
incorporate appropriate security for the application.
Aside from being logged out of security, which allows the user to read setpoints and actual
values only, three levels of security access are provided: Setpoint Level, Control Level, and
Master Level. The Setpoint and Control Levels can be attained either locally using the Local
passwords (USB port and keypad), or remotely using the Remote passwords (RS485 and
Ethernet ports). The user can have either Setpoint or Control Level active, but not both
simultaneously from the same interface. The Master Level is used for setting and resetting
of passwords, and includes all Setpoint and Control Level access rights. The Master Level
cannot be attained from the keypad. The Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10
characters in length, and must contain at least 2 letters and 2 numbers. The Master Level
can define whether the local user is permitted to change Local Passwords without having
to enter the Master Level. The Master Reset Password is encrypted, and is not viewable
from the keypad. If the Master Reset Password is lost, the user should contact the factory
to decrypt the Master Reset Password.
After password entry, the access level is maintained until a period of 5 minutes of inactivity
has elapsed, after which the password must be re-entered. A power-loss or entering in the
wrong password will log the user out of security.
Further definition of the access levels is described as follows:
SETPOINT LEVEL
Changing settings under QUICK SETUP menu
Changing settings under the SETPOINTS menu except the features requiring control
access listed below
Changing any setting under MAINTENANCE such as trip and close coil monitoring and
breaker maintenance settings, except the features requiring control access listed
below
Changing the Local or Remote Setpoint Password, depending on the interface being
accessed
CONTROL LEVEL
Reset command
Open and Close Breaker commands
Virtual Input commands
Clearing of event records, transient records, and other data
Uploading new firmware
Changing the Local or Remote Control Password, depending on the interface being
accessed
MASTER LEVEL
Setting and changing of all passwords including the Master Reset Password
Disabling password security
All Setpoint and Control Level access rights
For details on Password Security setup and handling using the EnerVista Setup software,
refer to Chapter 3.
68
Passwords
S1 RELAY SETUP
This section allows the user to change the Local Setpoint and Local Control Passwords. The
local user may change a local password from the keypad if all of the following are true:
Security is enabled
A valid local setpoint (or local control) password has initially been set
The remote user has the Overwrite Local Passwords setpoint set to NO
The local user knows the current local password.
For more details on the Password Security feature, refer to Chapter 3.

Figure 3: Menu for handling password security using 345 keypad
S1 PASSWORD SECURITY
LOC SETPOINTS PSWD
LOC CONTROLS PSWD
S1 LOC SETPOINTS PSWD

ENTER OLD PASSWORD
ENTER NEW PASSWORD

CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD
S1 LOC CONTROLS PSWD

ENTER OLD PASSWORD
ENTER NEW PASSWORD

897772.cdr
CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD
The following steps describe how to change the Local Setpoints Password from the
keypad. Similar steps are followed to change the Local Control Password.
ENTER OLD PASSWORD
The user is prompted to enter the current Local Setpoints Password. User the value up/
down keys to select characters, and use the message left/right keys to move the cursor.
Press the Enter key when done. An INVALID PASSWORD message will appear if a wrong
password is entered, security is disabled, the password has not been originally set, or the
local user does not have the rights to change the password. In addition, the user will be
automatically logged out of security from the keypad. If the correct password was entered,
the user is now logged in to the Setpoints Level from the keypad, and will be prompted to
enter a new password.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
The user is prompted to enter a new Local Setpoints Password. A valid password is
alphanumeric, and is 3 to 10 characters in length. An INVALID PASSWORD message will
appear if the new password does not meet the password requirements. If a valid password
was entered, the user will be prompted to re-enter the new password.
CONFIRM PASSWORD
The user is prompted to re-enter the new Local Setpoints Password. If the passwords do
not match, an ENTRY MISMATCH message will appear, the password will remain
unchanged, and the user will be returned to the Enter New Password page. If the
passwords match, a PASSWORD CHANGED message will appear indicating the Local
Setpoints Password has successfully been updated.
69
S1 RELAY SETUP
Communications
Figure 4: Communications main menu
S1 COMMUNICATIONS
RS485
S1 RS485
ETHERNET
MODBUS PROTOCOL
RS485 BAUD RATE
RS485 COMM PARITY
IEC 60870-5-103
REAR 485 PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104*
DNP PROTOCOL
61850 PROTOCOL**
* Available with comms Order Code 1
** Available with comms Order Code 2
S1 ETHERNET
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET IP MASK
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS
CONNECTION TYPE
S1 MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS SLAVE ADR
S1 60870-5-103
GENERAL
BINARY INPUTS
MEASURANDS
COMMANDS
S1 60870-5-104
GENERAL
CLIENT ADDRESS
POINT LIST
S1 DNP PROTOCOL
DNP GENERAL
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
DEFAULT VARIATION
DNP CLIENT ADDRESS

DNP POINTS LIST
897766.cdr
S1 61850 GOOSE
ENABLE GOOSE
ENABLE GOOSE Tx
RS485 interface
610
The 345 is equipped with one serial RS485 communication port. The RS485 port has
settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the
settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. This
port may be connected to a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software. This
S1 RELAY SETUP
software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade
the device firmware. A maximum of 32 345 -series devices can be daisy-chained and
connected to a DCS, PLC, or PC using the RS485 port.
Select the Settings > Communications > Serial Ports menu item in the EnerVista SR3
Setup program, or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > RS485 path on
the display, to configure the serial port.
Figure 5: Serial port configuration settings
The following settings are available to configure the RS485 port.

BAUD RATE
Range: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Default: 115200
This setting specifies the baud rate (bits per second) for the RS485 port.
PARITY
Range: None, Odd, Even
Default: None
This setting specifies the parity for the RS485 port.
REAR RS485 PROTOCOL
Range: Modbus, IEC60870-5-103, DNP 3.0
Default: Modbus
This setting specifies the protocol to be used for the rear RS485 port.
Ethernet
Select the Setpoints > S1 Relay Setup > Communications > Ethernet menu item in the
EnerVista SR3 Setup program, or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS >
ETHERNET path on the display, to configure the Ethernet port.
The following settings are available to configure the Ethernet port.
IP Address
Range: Standard IP Address format
Default: 000.000.000.000
This setting specifies the IP Address for the Ethernet port.
Subnet IP Mask
Default: 255.255.255.000
This setting specifies the Subnet IP Mask setting for the Ethernet port.
Gateway IP Address
Default: 000.000.000.000
This setting specifies the Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet port.
611
S1 RELAY SETUP
Connection Type
Range: Copper, fiber
Default: Copper
This setting specifies the connection type (Copper or Fiber) used for Ethernet
communication.
When changing Ethernet settings, power to the relay must be cycled in order for the new
settings to become active.
NOTE:
NOTE
Modbus
The Modicon Modbus protocol is supported by the 345 . Modbus is available via the RS485
serial link (Modbus RTU). The 345 always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never
initiates communications; it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master
device. A subset of the Modbus protocol format is supported that allows extensive
monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register
commands.Refer to the 345 Feeder Protection System Communications Guide for
additional details on the Modbus protocol and the Modbus memory map.
The Modbus server can simultaneously support two clients over serial RS485. The server is
capable of reporting any indication or measurement and operating any output present in
the device. A user-configurable input and output map is also implemented.
The 345 operates as a Modbus slave device only
Select the Settings > Communications > Modbus > Protocol menu item in EnerVista SR3
Setup software, or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > MODBUS
PROTOCOL path to set up the modbus protocol as shown below.
Figure 6: Modbus protocol configuration settings
The following Modbus settings are available:

MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
Default: 254
This setting specifies the Modbus slave address . Each device must have a unique
address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address to which all Modbus slave
devices listen. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the
same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to
the link should use the next higher address starting at 1.
Please refer to the 345 Communications Guide for details on how to set up the Modbus
communications protocol.
612
IEC 60870-5-103 serial

communication
S1 RELAY SETUP
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IEC61870-5-103

Figure 7: IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication menu
S1 60870-5-103
GENERAL
S1 103 GENERAL
BINARY INPUTS
SLAVE ADDRESS
MEASURANDS
SYNCH TIMEOUT
COMMANDS
S1 103 FIRST ASDU
S1 103 B INPUTS
ID TYPE
POINT 0
FUNCTION TYPE
POINT 0 FUNC TYPE
INFORMATION NO
POINT 0 INFO NO:
SCAN TIMEOUT
...
FIRST ANLG ENTRY
POINT 63
FIRST ANLG FACTOR
POINT 63FUNC TYPE
FIRST ANLG OFFSET
POINT 63 INFO NO:
...
NINTH ANLG ENTRY
NINTH ANLG FACTOR
S1 103 MEASURANDS
NINTH ANLG OFFSET
FIRST ASDU
.
.
.
.
SECOND ASDU
THIRD ASDU
FOURTH ASDU
S1 103 FOURTH ASDU

ID TYPE
FUNCTION TYPE
S1 103 COMMANDS
INFORMATION NO
CMD 0 FUNC TYPE
SCAN TIMEOUT
CMD 0 INFO NO:
FIRST ANLG ENTRY
CMD 0 ON OPER:
FIRST ANLG FACTOR
CMD 0 OFF OPER:
FIRST ANLG OFFSET
...
...
CMD 15 FUNC TYPE:
NINTH ANLG ENTRY
CMD 15 INFO NO:
NINTH ANLG FACTOR
CMD 15 ON OPER:
NINTH ANLG OFFSET
CMD 15 OFF OPER:
897770.cdr
The following table, from the 345 Communications Guide, shows the list of Binary Inputs.
Code
Type
FC134B
unsigned 16 bits
Definition
DNP Binary Inputs
Off
0x0040
Contact IN 1 On
0x0041
Contact IN 2 On
0x0042
Contact IN 3 On
0x0043
Contact IN 4 On
0x0044
Contact IN 5 On
0x0045
Contact IN 6 On
0x0046
Contact IN 7 On
0x0047
Contact IN 8 On
0x0048
Contact IN 9 On
613
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
614
Type
Definition
0x0049
Contact IN 10 On
0x0060
Contact IN 1 Off
0x0061
Contact IN 2 Off
0x0062
Contact IN 3 Off
0x0063
Contact IN 4 Off
0x0064
Contact IN 5 Off
0x0065
Contact IN 6 Off
0x0066
Contact IN 7 Off
0x0067
Contact IN 8 Off
0x0068
Contact IN 9 Off
0x0069
Contact IN 10 Off
0x0080
Virtual IN 1 On
0x0081
Virtual IN 2 On
0x0082
Virtual IN 3 On
0x0083
Virtual IN 4 On
0x0084
Virtual IN 5 On
0x0085
Virtual IN 6 On
0x0086
Virtual IN 7 On
0x0087
Virtual IN 8 On
0x0088
Virtual IN 9 On
0x0089
Virtual IN 10 On
0x008A
Virtual IN 11 On
0x008B
Virtual IN 12 On
0x008C
Virtual IN 13 On
0x008D
Virtual IN 14 On
0x008E
Virtual IN 15 On
0x008F
Virtual IN 16 On
0x0090
Virtual IN 17 On
0x0091
Virtual IN 18 On
0x0092
Virtual IN 19 On
0x0093
Virtual IN 20 On
0x0094
Virtual IN 21 On
0x0095
Virtual IN 22 On
0x0096
Virtual IN 23 On
0x0097
Virtual IN 24 On
0x0098
Virtual IN 25 On
0x0099
Virtual IN 26 On
0x009A
Virtual IN 27 On
0x009B
Virtual IN 28 On
0x009C
Virtual IN 29 On
0x009D
Virtual IN 30 On
0x009E
Virtual IN 31 On
0x009F
Virtual IN 32 On
0x01C0
Remote IN 1 On
0x01C1
Remote IN 2 On
0x01C2
Remote IN 3 On
0x01C3
Remote IN 4 On
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x01C4
Remote IN 5 On
0x01C5
Remote IN 6 On
0x01C6
Remote IN 7 On
0x01C7
Remote IN 8 On
0x01C8
Remote IN 9 On
0x01C9
Remote IN 10 On
0x01CA
Remote IN 11 On
0x01CB
Remote IN 12 On
0x01CC
Remote IN 13 On
0x01CD
Remote IN 14 On
0x01CE
Remote IN 15 On
0x01CF
Remote IN 16 On
0x01D0
Remote IN 17 On
0x01D1
Remote IN 18 On
0x01D2
Remote IN 19 On
0x01D3
Remote IN 20 On
0x01D4
Remote IN 21 On
0x01D5
Remote IN 22 On
0x01D6
Remote IN 23 On
0x01D7
Remote IN 24 On
0x01D8
Remote IN 25 On
0x01D9
Remote IN 26 On
0x01DA
Remote IN 27 On
0x01DB
Remote IN 28 On
0x01DC
Remote IN 29 On
0x01DD
Remote IN 30 On
0x01DE
Remote IN 31 On
0x01DF
Remote IN 32 On
0x01E0
Remote IN 1 Off
0x01E1
Remote IN 2 Off
0x01E2
Remote IN 3 Off
0x01E3
Remote IN 4 Off
0x01E4
Remote IN 5 Off
0x01E5
Remote IN 6 Off
0x01E6
Remote IN 7 Off
0x01E7
Remote IN 8 Off
0x01E8
Remote IN 9 Off
0x01E9
Remote IN 10 Off
0x01EA
Remote IN 11 Off
0x01EB
Remote IN 12 Off
0x01EC
Remote IN 13 Off
0x01ED
Remote IN 14 Off
0x01EE
Remote IN 15 Off
0x01EF
Remote IN 16 Off
0x01F0
Remote IN 17 Off
0x01F1
Remote IN 18 Off
0x01F2
Remote IN 19 Off
615
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
616
Type
Definition
0x01F3
Remote IN 20 Off
0x01F4
Remote IN 21 Off
0x01F5
Remote IN 22 Off
0x01F6
Remote IN 23 Off
0x01F7
Remote IN 24 Off
0x01F8
Remote IN 25 Off
0x01F9
Remote IN 26 Off
0x01FA
Remote IN 27 Off
0x01FB
Remote IN 28 Off
0x01FC
Remote IN 29 Off
0x01FD
Remote IN 30 Off
0x01FE
Remote IN 31 Off
0x01FF
Remote IN 32 Off
0x8002
Any Trip
0x8042
Therm O/L Trip OP
0x8044
Therm O/L Trip DPO
0x804A
Therm PhA Trip OP
0x804C
Therm PhA Trip DPO
0x8052
Therm PhB Trip OP
0x8054
Therm PhB Trip DPO
0x8062
Therm PhC Trip OP
0x8064
Therm PhC Trip DPO
0x84C1
LE 1 Trip PKP
0x84C2
LE 1 Trip OP
0x84C4
LE 1 Trip DPO
0x8501
LE 2 Trip PKP
0x8502
LE 2 Trip OP
0x8504
LE 2 Trip DPO
0x8541
LE 3 Trip PKP
0x8542
LE 3 Trip OP
0x8544
LE 3 Trip DPO
0x8581
LE 4 Trip PKP
0x8582
LE 4 Trip OP
0x8584
LE 4 Trip DPO
0x85C1
LE 5 Trip PKP
0x85C2
LE 5 Trip OP
0x85C4
LE 5 Trip DPO
0x8601
LE 6 Trip PKP
0x8602
LE 6 Trip OP
0x8604
LE 6 Trip DPO
0x8641
LE 7 Trip PKP
0x8642
LE 7 Trip OP
0x8644
LE 7 Trip DPO
0x8681
LE 8 Trip PKP
0x8682
LE 8 Trip OP
0x8684
LE 8 Trip DPO
0x9001
Ph IOC1 Trip PKP
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x9002
Ph IOC1 Trip OP
0x9004
Ph IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9009
Ph A IOC1 Trip PKP
0x900A
Ph A IOC1 Trip OP
0x900C
Ph A IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9011
Ph B IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9012
Ph B IOC1 Trip OP
0x9014
Ph B IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9021
Ph C IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9022
Ph C IOC1 Trip OP
0x9024
Ph C IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9041
Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9042
Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP
0x9044
Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9081
Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9082
Gnd IOC1 Trip OP
0x9084
Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO
0x90C1
Ph TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90C2
Ph TOC1 Trip OP
0x90C4
Ph TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90C9
Ph A TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90CA
Ph A TOC1 Trip OP
0x90CC
Ph A TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90D1
Ph B TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90D2
Ph B TOC1 Trip OP
0x90D4
Ph B TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90E1
Ph C TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90E2
Ph C TOC1 Trip OP
0x90E4
Ph C TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9101
Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9102
Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP
0x9104
Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9141
Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9142
Gnd TOC1 Trip OP
0x9144
Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9181
Ph IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9182
Ph IOC2 Trip OP
0x9184
Ph IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9189
Ph A IOC2 Trip PKP
0x918A
Ph A IOC2 Trip OP
0x918C
Ph A IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9191
Ph B IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9192
Ph B IOC2 Trip OP
0x9194
Ph B IOC2 Trip DPO
0x91A1
Ph C IOC2 Trip PKP
0x91A2
Ph C IOC2 Trip OP
0x91A4
Ph C IOC2 Trip DPO
617
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
618
Type
Definition
0x91C1
Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP
0x91C2
Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP
0x91C4
Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9201
Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9202
Gnd IOC2 Trip OP
0x9204
Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9241
Ph TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9242
Ph TOC2 Trip OP
0x9244
Ph TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9249
Ph A TOC2 Trip PKP
0x924A
Ph A TOC2 Trip OP
0x924C
Ph A TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9251
Ph B TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9252
Ph B TOC2 Trip OP
0x9254
Ph B TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9261
Ph C TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9262
Ph C TOC2 Trip OP
0x9264
Ph C TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9281
Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9282
Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP
0x9284
Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO
0x92C1
Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP
0x92C2
Gnd TOC2 Trip OP
0x92C4
Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9301
SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9302
SGnd TOC1 Trip OP
0x9304
SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9641
SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9642
SGnd IOC1 Trip OP
0x9644
SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9681
SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9682
SGnd IOC2 Trip OP
0x9684
SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9701
Pcnt Diff Trip PKP
0x9702
Pcnt Diff Trip OP
0x9704
Pcnt Diff Trip DPO
0x970A
Ph Diff A Trip OP
0x970C
Ph Diff A Trip DPO
0x9712
Ph Diff B Trip OP
0x9714
Ph Diff B Trip DPO
0x9722
Ph Diff C Trip OP
0x9724
Ph Diff C Trip DPO
0x9741
RGF1 Trip PKP
0x9742
RGF1 Trip OP
0x9744
RGF1 Trip DPO
0x9781
RGF2 Trip PKP
0x9782
RGF2 Trip OP
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x9784
RGF2 Trip DPO
0x97C1
Inst Diff Trip PKP
0x97C2
Inst Diff Trip OP
0x97C4
Inst Diff Trip DPO
0x9801
NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9802
NSeq TOC1 Trip OP
0x9804
NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9841
NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9842
NSeq TOC2 Trip OP
0x9844
NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO
0x99C1
SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP
0x99C2
SGnd TOC2 Trip OP
0x99C4
SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9C01
LE 9 Trip PKP
0x9C02
LE 9 Trip OP
0x9C04
LE 9 Trip DPO
0x9C41
LE 10 Trip PKP
0x9C42
LE 10 Trip OP
0x9C44
LE 10 Trip DPO
0x9C81
LE 11 Trip PKP
0x9C82
LE 11 Trip OP
0x9C84
LE 11 Trip DPO
0x9CC1
LE 12 Trip PKP
0x9CC2
LE 12 Trip OP
0x9CC4
LE 12 Trip DPO
0x9D01
LE 13 Trip PKP
0x9D02
LE 13 Trip OP
0x9D04
LE 13 Trip DPO
0x9D41
LE 14 Trip PKP
0x9D42
LE 14 Trip OP
0x9D44
LE 14 Trip DPO
0x9D81
LE 15 Trip PKP
0x9D82
LE 15 Trip OP
0x9D84
LE 15 Trip DPO
0x9DC1
LE 16 Trip PKP
0x9DC2
LE 16 Trip OP
0x9DC4
LE 16 Trip DPO
0xA002
Any Alarm
0xA042
Therm Lvl Alrm OP
0xA044
Therm Lvl Alrm DPO
0xA04A
Therm PhA Alrm OP
0xA04C
Therm PhA Alrm DPO
0xA052
Therm PhB Alrm OP
0xA054
Therm PhB Alrm DPO
0xA062
Therm PhC Alrm OP
0xA064
Therm PhC Alrm DPO
0xA4C1
LE 1 Alarm PKP
619
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
620
Type
Definition
0xA4C2
LE 1 Alarm OP
0xA4C4
LE 1 Alarm DPO
0xA501
LE 2 Alarm PKP
0xA502
LE 2 Alarm OP
0xA504
LE 2 Alarm DPO
0xA541
LE 3 Alarm PKP
0xA542
LE 3 Alarm OP
0xA544
LE 3 Alarm DPO
0xA581
LE 4 Alarm PKP
0xA582
LE 4 Alarm OP
0xA584
LE 4 Alarm DPO
0xA5C1
LE 5 Alarm PKP
0xA5C2
LE 5 Alarm OP
0xA5C4
LE 5 Alarm DPO
0xA601
LE 6 Alarm PKP
0xA602
LE 6 Alarm OP
0xA604
LE 6 Alarm DPO
0xA641
LE 7 Alarm PKP
0xA642
LE 7 Alarm OP
0xA644
LE 7 Alarm DPO
0xA681
LE 8 Alarm PKP
0xA682
LE 8 Alarm OP
0xA684
LE 8 Alarm DPO
0xABC1
HI Amb Temp PKP
0xABC2
HI Amb Temp OP
0xABC4
HI Amb Temp DPO
0xAC01
LO Amb Temp PKP
0xAC02
LO Amb Temp OP
0xAC04
LO Amb Temp DPO
0xAC42
Self Test Alarm OP
0xAD01
R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD02
R1 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD04
R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD41
R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD42
R2 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD44
R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD81
BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAD82
BKR1 Fail Alrm OP
0xAD84
BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO
0xADC2
BKR Stat Fail OP
0xAEC2
BKR2 Stat Fail OP
0xAF41
BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAF42
BKR2 Fail Alrm OP
0xAF44
BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO
0xB001
Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB002
Ph IOC1 Alarm OP
0xB004
Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0xB009
Ph A IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB00A
Ph A IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB00C
Ph A IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB011
Ph B IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB012
Ph B IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB014
Ph B IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB021
Ph C IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB022
Ph C IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB024
Ph C IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB041
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB042
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB044
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB081
Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB082
Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP
0xB084
Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB0C1
Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB0C2
Ph TOC1 Alarm OP
0xB0C4
Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB0C9
Ph A TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0CA
Ph A TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0CC
Ph A TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB0D1
Ph B TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0D2
Ph B TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0D4
Ph B TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB0E1
Ph C TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0E2
Ph C TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0E4
Ph C TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB101
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB102
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB104
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB141
Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB142
Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP
0xB144
Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB181
Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB182
Ph IOC2 Alarm OP
0xB184
Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB189
Ph A IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB18A
Ph A IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB18C
Ph A IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB191
Ph B IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB192
Ph B IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB194
Ph B IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB1A1
Ph C IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB1A2
Ph C IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB1A4
Ph C IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB1C1
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB1C2
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP
621
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
622
Type
Definition
0xB1C4
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB201
Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB202
Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP
0xB204
Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB241
Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB242
Ph TOC2 Alarm OP
0xB244
Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB249
Ph A TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB24A
Ph A TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB24C
Ph A TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB251
Ph B TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB252
Ph B TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB254
Ph B TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB261
Ph C TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB262
Ph C TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB264
Ph C TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB281
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB282
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB284
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB2C1
Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB2C2
Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP
0xB2C4
Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB301
SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB302
SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB304
SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB641
SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB642
SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB644
SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB681
SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB682
SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB684
SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB701
Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP
0xB702
Pcnt Diff Alrm OP
0xB704
Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO
0xB709
Ph Dif A Alarm PKP
0xB70A
Ph Dif A Alarm OP
0xB70C
Ph Dif A Alarm DPO
0xB711
Ph Dif B Alarm PKP
0xB712
Ph Dif B Alarm OP
0xB714
Ph Dif B Alarm DPO
0xB721
Ph Dif C Alarm PKP
0xB722
Ph Dif C Alarm OP
0xB724
Ph Dif C Alarm DPO
0xB741
RGF1 Alarm PKP
0xB742
RGF1 Alarm OP
0xB744
RGF1 Alarm DPO
0xB781
RGF2 Alarm PKP
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0xB782
RGF2 Alarm OP
0xB784
RGF2 Alarm DPO
0xB7C1
Inst Diff Alrm PKP
0xB7C2
Inst Diff Alrm OP
0xB7C4
Inst Diff Alrm DPO
0xB801
NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB802
NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB804
NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB841
NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB842
NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB844
NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB9C1
SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB9C2
SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB9C4
SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xBC01
LE 9 Alarm PKP
0xBC02
LE 9 Alarm OP
0xBC04
LE 9 Alarm DPO
0xBC41
LE 10 Alarm PKP
0xBC42
LE 10 Alarm OP
0xBC44
LE 10 Alarm DPO
0xBC81
LE 11 Alarm PKP
0xBC82
LE 11 Alarm OP
0xBC84
LE 11 Alarm DPO
0xBCC1
LE 12 Alarm PKP
0xBCC2
LE 12 Alarm OP
0xBCC4
LE 12 Alarm DPO
0xBD01
LE 13 Alarm PKP
0xBD02
LE 13 Alarm OP
0xBD04
LE 13 Alarm DPO
0xBD41
LE 14 Alarm PKP
0xBD42
LE 14 Alarm OP
0xBD44
LE 14 Alarm DPO
0xBD81
LE 15 Alarm PKP
0xBD82
LE 15 Alarm OP
0xBD84
LE 15 Alarm DPO
0xBDC1
LE 16 Alarm PKP
0xBDC2
LE 16 Alarm OP
0xBDC4
LE 16 Alarm DPO
0xC042
Output Relay 3 On
0xC082
Output Relay 4 On
0xC0C2
Output Relay 5 On
0xC102
Output Relay 6 On
0xC142
Self-Test Rly 7 On
0xC182
Output Relay 1 On
0xC1C2
Output Relay 2 On
0xC202
BKR Connected
0xC2C2
BKR2 Connected
623
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
624
Type
Definition
0xC4C1
LE 1 PKP
0xC4C2
LE 1 OP
0xC4C4
LE 1 DPO
0xC501
LE 2 PKP
0xC502
LE 2 OP
0xC504
LE 2 DPO
0xC541
LE 3 PKP
0xC542
LE 3 OP
0xC544
LE 3 DPO
0xC581
LE 4 PKP
0xC582
LE 4 OP
0xC584
LE 4 DPO
0xC5C1
LE 5 PKP
0xC5C2
LE 5 OP
0xC5C4
LE 5 DPO
0xC601
LE 6 PKP
0xC602
LE 6 OP
0xC604
LE 6 DPO
0xC641
LE 7 PKP
0xC642
LE 7 OP
0xC644
LE 7 DPO
0xC681
LE 8 PKP
0xC682
LE 8 OP
0xC684
LE 8 DPO
0xC882
Setpoint Group2 On
0xCA02
52a Contact OP
0xCA42
52b Contact OP
0xCCC2
BKR Stat Open
0xCD02
BKR Stat Clsd
0xCD42
Setpoint Group1 On
0xDA02
BKR2 52a Cont OP
0xDA42
BKR2 52b Cont OP
0xDA82
BKR2 Stat Open
0xDAC2
BKR2 Stat Clsd
0xDB02
Trip BKR 1 OP
0xDB42
Trip BKR 2 OP
0xDC01
LE 9 PKP
0xDC02
LE 9 OP
0xDC04
LE 9 DPO
0xDC41
LE 10 PKP
0xDC42
LE 10 OP
0xDC44
LE 10 DPO
0xDC81
LE 11 PKP
0xDC82
LE 11 OP
0xDC84
LE 11 DPO
0xDCC1
LE 12 PKP
0xDCC2
LE 12 OP
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
IEC60870-5-104
protocol
Type
Definition
0xDCC4
LE 12 DPO
0xDD01
LE 13 PKP
0xDD02
LE 13 OP
0xDD04
LE 13 DPO
0xDD41
LE 14 PKP
0xDD42
LE 14 OP
0xDD44
LE 14 DPO
0xDD81
LE 15 PKP
0xDD82
LE 15 OP
0xDD84
LE 15 DPO
0xDDC1
LE 16 PKP
0xDDC2
LE 16 OP
0xDDC4
LE 16 DPO
0xE002
Any Block
0xE042
Therm O/L Blck
0xE182
Output Relay 1 BLK
0xE1C2
Output Relay 2 BLK
0xE882
Group Change Blk
0xF002
Ph IOC1 Block
0xF042
Ntrl IOC1 Block
0xF082
Gnd IOC1 Block
0xF0C2
Ph TOC1 Block
0xF102
Ntrl TOC1 Block
0xF142
Gnd TOC1 Block
0xF182
Ph IOC2 Block
0xF1C2
Ntrl IOC2 Block
0xF202
Gnd IOC2 Block
0xF242
Ph TOC2 Block
0xF282
Ntrl TOC2 Block
0xF2C2
Gnd TOC2 Block
0xF302
SGnd TOC1 Block
0xF642
SGnd IOC1 Block
0xF682
SGnd IOC2 Block
0xF702
Pcnt Diff Block
0xF742
RGF1 Block
0xF782
RGF2 Block
0xF7C2
Inst Diff Block
0xF802
NSeq TOC1 Blk
0xF842
NSeq TOC2 Blk
0xF9C2
SGnd TOC2 Block
0xFB02
Trip BKR1 Blk
0xFB42
Trip BKR2 Blk
0xFB82
2nd Hmnc Diff Blk
0xFBC2
5th Hmnc Diff Blk
Figure 8: IEC 60870-5-104 protocol menu
625
S1 RELAY SETUP
S1 60870-5-104
GENERAL
S1 104 GENERAL
CLIENT ADDRESS
FUNCTION
POINT LIST
TCP PORT
SLAVE ADDRESS
CYCLIC DATA PERIOD
TCP CONN. TIMEOUT
OBJ INFO ADDR BIN
OBJ INFO ADDR ALOG
OBJ INFO ADDR CNTR
OBJ INFO ADDR CMD
S1 104 CLIENT ADDRESS

CLIENT ADDRESS 1
104 BINARY INPUTS

POINT 0
POINT 1
...
POINT 63
104 ANALOG INPUTS

POINT 0 ENTRY
CLIENT ADDRESS 2
POINT 0 SCALE FCTR
...
POINT 0 DEADBAND
.
.
...
.
POINT 31 ENTRY
.
POINT 31 SCALE FCTR
CLIENT ADDRESS 5
S1 104 POINT LIST
POINT 31 DEADBAND
BINARY INPUTS
ANALOG INPUTS
BINARY OUTPUTS
104 BINARY OUTPUTS

POINT 0 ON:
POINT 0 OFF:
897794A1.cdr
626
...
.
.
POINT 15 ON:
.
POINT 15 OFF:
.
S1 RELAY SETUP
DNP communication
The menu structure for the DNP protocol is shown below.

keypad, please refer to the 345 Instruction Manual, Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > DNP PROTOCOL > DNP GENERAL
Figure 9: DNP communication menu
S1 DNP
DNP GENERAL
S1 DNP GENERAL
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE*

DEFAULT VARIATION
DNP ADDRESS
DNP CLIENT ADDRESS*
DNP TCP/UDP PORT
DNP POINTS LIST
CHANNEL 1 PORT
CHANNEL 2 PORT
TME SYNC IIN PER.
* Ethernet only
DNP MSG FRAG SIZE

DNP TCP CONN. T/O
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE*

FUNCTION
TIMEOUT
MAX RETRIES
DEST ADDRESS
POINT 0
POINT 1
DEFAULT VARIATION
POINT 2
DNP OBJECT 1
...
DNP OBJECT 2
POINT 63
DNP OBJECT 20
DNP OBJECT 21
POINT 0 ON
DNP OBJECT 22
POINT 0 OFF
DNP OBJECT 23
DNP OBJECT 30
POINT 1 ON
DNP OBJECT 32
POINT 1 OFF
...
DNP CLIENT ADDRESS*
POINT 15 ON
CLIENT ADDRESS 1
POINT 15 OFF
CLIENT ADDRESS 2
CLIENT ADDRESS 3
POINT 0 ENTRY
CLIENT ADDRESS 4
CLIENT ADDRESS 5
POINT 1 ENTRY
...
POINT 31 ENTRY
S1 DNP POINTS LIST

BINARY INPUTS
897769.cdr
BINARY OUTPUTS
ANALOG INPUTS
The following table, from the 345 Communications Guide, shows the list of DNP Binary
Inputs.
Code
Type
FC134B
unsigned 16 bits
Definition
DNP Binary Inputs
Off
0x0040
Contact IN 1 On
0x0041
Contact IN 2 On
627
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
628
Type
Definition
0x0042
Contact IN 3 On
0x0043
Contact IN 4 On
0x0044
Contact IN 5 On
0x0045
Contact IN 6 On
0x0046
Contact IN 7 On
0x0047
Contact IN 8 On
0x0048
Contact IN 9 On
0x0049
Contact IN 10 On
0x0060
Contact IN 1 Off
0x0061
Contact IN 2 Off
0x0062
Contact IN 3 Off
0x0063
Contact IN 4 Off
0x0064
Contact IN 5 Off
0x0065
Contact IN 6 Off
0x0066
Contact IN 7 Off
0x0067
Contact IN 8 Off
0x0068
Contact IN 9 Off
0x0069
Contact IN 10 Off
0x0080
Virtual IN 1 On
0x0081
Virtual IN 2 On
0x0082
Virtual IN 3 On
0x0083
Virtual IN 4 On
0x0084
Virtual IN 5 On
0x0085
Virtual IN 6 On
0x0086
Virtual IN 7 On
0x0087
Virtual IN 8 On
0x0088
Virtual IN 9 On
0x0089
Virtual IN 10 On
0x008A
Virtual IN 11 On
0x008B
Virtual IN 12 On
0x008C
Virtual IN 13 On
0x008D
Virtual IN 14 On
0x008E
Virtual IN 15 On
0x008F
Virtual IN 16 On
0x0090
Virtual IN 17 On
0x0091
Virtual IN 18 On
0x0092
Virtual IN 19 On
0x0093
Virtual IN 20 On
0x0094
Virtual IN 21 On
0x0095
Virtual IN 22 On
0x0096
Virtual IN 23 On
0x0097
Virtual IN 24 On
0x0098
Virtual IN 25 On
0x0099
Virtual IN 26 On
0x009A
Virtual IN 27 On
0x009B
Virtual IN 28 On
0x009C
Virtual IN 29 On
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x009D
Virtual IN 30 On
0x009E
Virtual IN 31 On
0x009F
Virtual IN 32 On
0x01C0
Remote IN 1 On
0x01C1
Remote IN 2 On
0x01C2
Remote IN 3 On
0x01C3
Remote IN 4 On
0x01C4
Remote IN 5 On
0x01C5
Remote IN 6 On
0x01C6
Remote IN 7 On
0x01C7
Remote IN 8 On
0x01C8
Remote IN 9 On
0x01C9
Remote IN 10 On
0x01CA
Remote IN 11 On
0x01CB
Remote IN 12 On
0x01CC
Remote IN 13 On
0x01CD
Remote IN 14 On
0x01CE
Remote IN 15 On
0x01CF
Remote IN 16 On
0x01D0
Remote IN 17 On
0x01D1
Remote IN 18 On
0x01D2
Remote IN 19 On
0x01D3
Remote IN 20 On
0x01D4
Remote IN 21 On
0x01D5
Remote IN 22 On
0x01D6
Remote IN 23 On
0x01D7
Remote IN 24 On
0x01D8
Remote IN 25 On
0x01D9
Remote IN 26 On
0x01DA
Remote IN 27 On
0x01DB
Remote IN 28 On
0x01DC
Remote IN 29 On
0x01DD
Remote IN 30 On
0x01DE
Remote IN 31 On
0x01DF
Remote IN 32 On
0x01E0
Remote IN 1 Off
0x01E1
Remote IN 2 Off
0x01E2
Remote IN 3 Off
0x01E3
Remote IN 4 Off
0x01E4
Remote IN 5 Off
0x01E5
Remote IN 6 Off
0x01E6
Remote IN 7 Off
0x01E7
Remote IN 8 Off
0x01E8
Remote IN 9 Off
0x01E9
Remote IN 10 Off
0x01EA
Remote IN 11 Off
0x01EB
Remote IN 12 Off
629
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
630
Type
Definition
0x01EC
Remote IN 13 Off
0x01ED
Remote IN 14 Off
0x01EE
Remote IN 15 Off
0x01EF
Remote IN 16 Off
0x01F0
Remote IN 17 Off
0x01F1
Remote IN 18 Off
0x01F2
Remote IN 19 Off
0x01F3
Remote IN 20 Off
0x01F4
Remote IN 21 Off
0x01F5
Remote IN 22 Off
0x01F6
Remote IN 23 Off
0x01F7
Remote IN 24 Off
0x01F8
Remote IN 25 Off
0x01F9
Remote IN 26 Off
0x01FA
Remote IN 27 Off
0x01FB
Remote IN 28 Off
0x01FC
Remote IN 29 Off
0x01FD
Remote IN 30 Off
0x01FE
Remote IN 31 Off
0x01FF
Remote IN 32 Off
0x8002
Any Trip
0x8042
Therm O/L Trip OP
0x8044
Therm O/L Trip DPO
0x804A
Therm PhA Trip OP
0x804C
Therm PhA Trip DPO
0x8052
Therm PhB Trip OP
0x8054
Therm PhB Trip DPO
0x8062
Therm PhC Trip OP
0x8064
Therm PhC Trip DPO
0x84C1
LE 1 Trip PKP
0x84C2
LE 1 Trip OP
0x84C4
LE 1 Trip DPO
0x8501
LE 2 Trip PKP
0x8502
LE 2 Trip OP
0x8504
LE 2 Trip DPO
0x8541
LE 3 Trip PKP
0x8542
LE 3 Trip OP
0x8544
LE 3 Trip DPO
0x8581
LE 4 Trip PKP
0x8582
LE 4 Trip OP
0x8584
LE 4 Trip DPO
0x85C1
LE 5 Trip PKP
0x85C2
LE 5 Trip OP
0x85C4
LE 5 Trip DPO
0x8601
LE 6 Trip PKP
0x8602
LE 6 Trip OP
0x8604
LE 6 Trip DPO
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x8641
LE 7 Trip PKP
0x8642
LE 7 Trip OP
0x8644
LE 7 Trip DPO
0x8681
LE 8 Trip PKP
0x8682
LE 8 Trip OP
0x8684
LE 8 Trip DPO
0x9001
Ph IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9002
Ph IOC1 Trip OP
0x9004
Ph IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9009
Ph A IOC1 Trip PKP
0x900A
Ph A IOC1 Trip OP
0x900C
Ph A IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9011
Ph B IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9012
Ph B IOC1 Trip OP
0x9014
Ph B IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9021
Ph C IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9022
Ph C IOC1 Trip OP
0x9024
Ph C IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9041
Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9042
Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP
0x9044
Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9081
Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9082
Gnd IOC1 Trip OP
0x9084
Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO
0x90C1
Ph TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90C2
Ph TOC1 Trip OP
0x90C4
Ph TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90C9
Ph A TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90CA
Ph A TOC1 Trip OP
0x90CC
Ph A TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90D1
Ph B TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90D2
Ph B TOC1 Trip OP
0x90D4
Ph B TOC1 Trip DPO
0x90E1
Ph C TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90E2
Ph C TOC1 Trip OP
0x90E4
Ph C TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9101
Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9102
Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP
0x9104
Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9141
Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9142
Gnd TOC1 Trip OP
0x9144
Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9181
Ph IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9182
Ph IOC2 Trip OP
0x9184
Ph IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9189
Ph A IOC2 Trip PKP
0x918A
Ph A IOC2 Trip OP
631
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
632
Type
Definition
0x918C
Ph A IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9191
Ph B IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9192
Ph B IOC2 Trip OP
0x9194
Ph B IOC2 Trip DPO
0x91A1
Ph C IOC2 Trip PKP
0x91A2
Ph C IOC2 Trip OP
0x91A4
Ph C IOC2 Trip DPO
0x91C1
Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP
0x91C2
Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP
0x91C4
Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9201
Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9202
Gnd IOC2 Trip OP
0x9204
Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9241
Ph TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9242
Ph TOC2 Trip OP
0x9244
Ph TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9249
Ph A TOC2 Trip PKP
0x924A
Ph A TOC2 Trip OP
0x924C
Ph A TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9251
Ph B TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9252
Ph B TOC2 Trip OP
0x9254
Ph B TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9261
Ph C TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9262
Ph C TOC2 Trip OP
0x9264
Ph C TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9281
Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9282
Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP
0x9284
Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO
0x92C1
Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP
0x92C2
Gnd TOC2 Trip OP
0x92C4
Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9301
SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9302
SGnd TOC1 Trip OP
0x9304
SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9641
SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9642
SGnd IOC1 Trip OP
0x9644
SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9681
SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9682
SGnd IOC2 Trip OP
0x9684
SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9701
Pcnt Diff Trip PKP
0x9702
Pcnt Diff Trip OP
0x9704
Pcnt Diff Trip DPO
0x970A
Ph Diff A Trip OP
0x970C
Ph Diff A Trip DPO
0x9712
Ph Diff B Trip OP
0x9714
Ph Diff B Trip DPO
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x9722
Ph Diff C Trip OP
0x9724
Ph Diff C Trip DPO
0x9741
RGF1 Trip PKP
0x9742
RGF1 Trip OP
0x9744
RGF1 Trip DPO
0x9781
RGF2 Trip PKP
0x9782
RGF2 Trip OP
0x9784
RGF2 Trip DPO
0x97C1
Inst Diff Trip PKP
0x97C2
Inst Diff Trip OP
0x97C4
Inst Diff Trip DPO
0x9801
NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9802
NSeq TOC1 Trip OP
0x9804
NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9841
NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9842
NSeq TOC2 Trip OP
0x9844
NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO
0x99C1
SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP
0x99C2
SGnd TOC2 Trip OP
0x99C4
SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9C01
LE 9 Trip PKP
0x9C02
LE 9 Trip OP
0x9C04
LE 9 Trip DPO
0x9C41
LE 10 Trip PKP
0x9C42
LE 10 Trip OP
0x9C44
LE 10 Trip DPO
0x9C81
LE 11 Trip PKP
0x9C82
LE 11 Trip OP
0x9C84
LE 11 Trip DPO
0x9CC1
LE 12 Trip PKP
0x9CC2
LE 12 Trip OP
0x9CC4
LE 12 Trip DPO
0x9D01
LE 13 Trip PKP
0x9D02
LE 13 Trip OP
0x9D04
LE 13 Trip DPO
0x9D41
LE 14 Trip PKP
0x9D42
LE 14 Trip OP
0x9D44
LE 14 Trip DPO
0x9D81
LE 15 Trip PKP
0x9D82
LE 15 Trip OP
0x9D84
LE 15 Trip DPO
0x9DC1
LE 16 Trip PKP
0x9DC2
LE 16 Trip OP
0x9DC4
LE 16 Trip DPO
0xA002
Any Alarm
0xA042
Therm Lvl Alrm OP
0xA044
Therm Lvl Alrm DPO
633
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
634
Type
Definition
0xA04A
Therm PhA Alrm OP
0xA04C
Therm PhA Alrm DPO
0xA052
Therm PhB Alrm OP
0xA054
Therm PhB Alrm DPO
0xA062
Therm PhC Alrm OP
0xA064
Therm PhC Alrm DPO
0xA4C1
LE 1 Alarm PKP
0xA4C2
LE 1 Alarm OP
0xA4C4
LE 1 Alarm DPO
0xA501
LE 2 Alarm PKP
0xA502
LE 2 Alarm OP
0xA504
LE 2 Alarm DPO
0xA541
LE 3 Alarm PKP
0xA542
LE 3 Alarm OP
0xA544
LE 3 Alarm DPO
0xA581
LE 4 Alarm PKP
0xA582
LE 4 Alarm OP
0xA584
LE 4 Alarm DPO
0xA5C1
LE 5 Alarm PKP
0xA5C2
LE 5 Alarm OP
0xA5C4
LE 5 Alarm DPO
0xA601
LE 6 Alarm PKP
0xA602
LE 6 Alarm OP
0xA604
LE 6 Alarm DPO
0xA641
LE 7 Alarm PKP
0xA642
LE 7 Alarm OP
0xA644
LE 7 Alarm DPO
0xA681
LE 8 Alarm PKP
0xA682
LE 8 Alarm OP
0xA684
LE 8 Alarm DPO
0xABC1
HI Amb Temp PKP
0xABC2
HI Amb Temp OP
0xABC4
HI Amb Temp DPO
0xAC01
LO Amb Temp PKP
0xAC02
LO Amb Temp OP
0xAC04
LO Amb Temp DPO
0xAC42
Self Test Alarm OP
0xAD01
R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD02
R1 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD04
R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD41
R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD42
R2 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD44
R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD81
BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAD82
BKR1 Fail Alrm OP
0xAD84
BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO
0xADC2
BKR Stat Fail OP
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0xAEC2
BKR2 Stat Fail OP
0xAF41
BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAF42
BKR2 Fail Alrm OP
0xAF44
BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO
0xB001
Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB002
Ph IOC1 Alarm OP
0xB004
Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB009
Ph A IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB00A
Ph A IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB00C
Ph A IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB011
Ph B IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB012
Ph B IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB014
Ph B IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB021
Ph C IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB022
Ph C IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB024
Ph C IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB041
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB042
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB044
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB081
Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB082
Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP
0xB084
Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB0C1
Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB0C2
Ph TOC1 Alarm OP
0xB0C4
Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB0C9
Ph A TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0CA
Ph A TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0CC
Ph A TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB0D1
Ph B TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0D2
Ph B TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0D4
Ph B TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB0E1
Ph C TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB0E2
Ph C TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB0E4
Ph C TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB101
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB102
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB104
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB141
Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB142
Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP
0xB144
Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB181
Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB182
Ph IOC2 Alarm OP
0xB184
Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB189
Ph A IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB18A
Ph A IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB18C
Ph A IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB191
Ph B IOC2 Alrm PKP
635
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
636
Type
Definition
0xB192
Ph B IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB194
Ph B IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB1A1
Ph C IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB1A2
Ph C IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB1A4
Ph C IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB1C1
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB1C2
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB1C4
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB201
Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB202
Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP
0xB204
Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB241
Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB242
Ph TOC2 Alarm OP
0xB244
Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB249
Ph A TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB24A
Ph A TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB24C
Ph A TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB251
Ph B TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB252
Ph B TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB254
Ph B TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB261
Ph C TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB262
Ph C TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB264
Ph C TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB281
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB282
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB284
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB2C1
Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB2C2
Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP
0xB2C4
Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB301
SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB302
SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB304
SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB641
SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB642
SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB644
SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB681
SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB682
SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB684
SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB701
Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP
0xB702
Pcnt Diff Alrm OP
0xB704
Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO
0xB709
Ph Dif A Alarm PKP
0xB70A
Ph Dif A Alarm OP
0xB70C
Ph Dif A Alarm DPO
0xB711
Ph Dif B Alarm PKP
0xB712
Ph Dif B Alarm OP
0xB714
Ph Dif B Alarm DPO
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0xB721
Ph Dif C Alarm PKP
0xB722
Ph Dif C Alarm OP
0xB724
Ph Dif C Alarm DPO
0xB741
RGF1 Alarm PKP
0xB742
RGF1 Alarm OP
0xB744
RGF1 Alarm DPO
0xB781
RGF2 Alarm PKP
0xB782
RGF2 Alarm OP
0xB784
RGF2 Alarm DPO
0xB7C1
Inst Diff Alrm PKP
0xB7C2
Inst Diff Alrm OP
0xB7C4
Inst Diff Alrm DPO
0xB801
NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB802
NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB804
NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB841
NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB842
NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB844
NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB9C1
SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB9C2
SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB9C4
SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xBC01
LE 9 Alarm PKP
0xBC02
LE 9 Alarm OP
0xBC04
LE 9 Alarm DPO
0xBC41
LE 10 Alarm PKP
0xBC42
LE 10 Alarm OP
0xBC44
LE 10 Alarm DPO
0xBC81
LE 11 Alarm PKP
0xBC82
LE 11 Alarm OP
0xBC84
LE 11 Alarm DPO
0xBCC1
LE 12 Alarm PKP
0xBCC2
LE 12 Alarm OP
0xBCC4
LE 12 Alarm DPO
0xBD01
LE 13 Alarm PKP
0xBD02
LE 13 Alarm OP
0xBD04
LE 13 Alarm DPO
0xBD41
LE 14 Alarm PKP
0xBD42
LE 14 Alarm OP
0xBD44
LE 14 Alarm DPO
0xBD81
LE 15 Alarm PKP
0xBD82
LE 15 Alarm OP
0xBD84
LE 15 Alarm DPO
0xBDC1
LE 16 Alarm PKP
0xBDC2
LE 16 Alarm OP
0xBDC4
LE 16 Alarm DPO
0xC042
Output Relay 3 On
0xC082
Output Relay 4 On
637
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
638
Type
Definition
0xC0C2
Output Relay 5 On
0xC102
Output Relay 6 On
0xC142
Self-Test Rly 7 On
0xC182
Output Relay 1 On
0xC1C2
Output Relay 2 On
0xC202
BKR Connected
0xC2C2
BKR2 Connected
0xC4C1
LE 1 PKP
0xC4C2
LE 1 OP
0xC4C4
LE 1 DPO
0xC501
LE 2 PKP
0xC502
LE 2 OP
0xC504
LE 2 DPO
0xC541
LE 3 PKP
0xC542
LE 3 OP
0xC544
LE 3 DPO
0xC581
LE 4 PKP
0xC582
LE 4 OP
0xC584
LE 4 DPO
0xC5C1
LE 5 PKP
0xC5C2
LE 5 OP
0xC5C4
LE 5 DPO
0xC601
LE 6 PKP
0xC602
LE 6 OP
0xC604
LE 6 DPO
0xC641
LE 7 PKP
0xC642
LE 7 OP
0xC644
LE 7 DPO
0xC681
LE 8 PKP
0xC682
LE 8 OP
0xC684
LE 8 DPO
0xC882
Setpoint Group2 On
0xCA02
52a Contact OP
0xCA42
52b Contact OP
0xCCC2
BKR Stat Open
0xCD02
BKR Stat Clsd
0xCD42
Setpoint Group1 On
0xDA02
BKR2 52a Cont OP
0xDA42
BKR2 52b Cont OP
0xDA82
BKR2 Stat Open
0xDAC2
BKR2 Stat Clsd
0xDB02
Trip BKR 1 OP
0xDB42
Trip BKR 2 OP
0xDC01
LE 9 PKP
0xDC02
LE 9 OP
0xDC04
LE 9 DPO
0xDC41
LE 10 PKP
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0xDC42
LE 10 OP
0xDC44
LE 10 DPO
0xDC81
LE 11 PKP
0xDC82
LE 11 OP
0xDC84
LE 11 DPO
0xDCC1
LE 12 PKP
0xDCC2
LE 12 OP
0xDCC4
LE 12 DPO
0xDD01
LE 13 PKP
0xDD02
LE 13 OP
0xDD04
LE 13 DPO
0xDD41
LE 14 PKP
0xDD42
LE 14 OP
0xDD44
LE 14 DPO
0xDD81
LE 15 PKP
0xDD82
LE 15 OP
0xDD84
LE 15 DPO
0xDDC1
LE 16 PKP
0xDDC2
LE 16 OP
0xDDC4
LE 16 DPO
0xE002
Any Block
0xE042
Therm O/L Blck
0xE182
Output Relay 1 BLK
0xE1C2
Output Relay 2 BLK
0xE882
Group Change Blk
0xF002
Ph IOC1 Block
0xF042
Ntrl IOC1 Block
0xF082
Gnd IOC1 Block
0xF0C2
Ph TOC1 Block
0xF102
Ntrl TOC1 Block
0xF142
Gnd TOC1 Block
0xF182
Ph IOC2 Block
0xF1C2
Ntrl IOC2 Block
0xF202
Gnd IOC2 Block
0xF242
Ph TOC2 Block
0xF282
Ntrl TOC2 Block
0xF2C2
Gnd TOC2 Block
0xF302
SGnd TOC1 Block
0xF642
SGnd IOC1 Block
0xF682
SGnd IOC2 Block
0xF702
Pcnt Diff Block
0xF742
RGF1 Block
0xF782
RGF2 Block
0xF7C2
Inst Diff Block
0xF802
NSeq TOC1 Blk
0xF842
NSeq TOC2 Blk
0xF9C2
SGnd TOC2 Block
639
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE

details
Type
Definition
0xFB02
Trip BKR1 Blk
0xFB42
Trip BKR2 Blk
0xFB82
2nd Hmnc Diff Blk
0xFBC2
5th Hmnc Diff Blk
The 345 firmware supports IEC61850 GOOSE communications on the optional

communications daughter board.
Portions of the IEC61850 standard not pertaining to GOOSE, are not implemented in the
345 relay.
The 345 relay does not support
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) standard ISO/IEC 9506
the mapping of analogue values to data points in data sets in either the transmit or
receive direction
a file system to maintain SCL, ICD or CID files, for IEC61850 GOOSE. As such the
implementation stores GOOSE configuration using MODBUS set points.
Configuration of transmission and reception settings for the GOOSE feature are performed
using EnerVista SR3 Setup Software.
The 345 firmware accepts GOOSE messages from UR, F650 and UR Plus. The
interoperability with other manufacturers will be guaranteed in almost all cases, by
implementing the reception side with nested structures (one level of nesting) and all the
standard data types.
GOOSE settings changes will take effect only after the 345 relay is re-booted. One setting is
available to Enable/Disable both Transmission and Reception. It is possible to change this
setting from the Front Panel of the relay.
Figure 10: EnerVista SR3 GOOSE General Settings
640
S1 RELAY SETUP
Event recorder
The Event Recorder runs continuously, capturing and storing the last 256 events. All events
are stored in a non-volatile memory where the information is maintained for up to 3 days
in case of lost relay control power.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > EVENT RECORDER
PICKUP EVENTS
Default: Enabled
When set to Enabled, the event recorder records the events that occur when a
protection element picks up.
DROPOUT EVENTS
Default: Disabled
When set to Enabled the event recorder records the dropout state of a protection
element.
TRIP EVENTS
Default: Enabled
The trip events include all programmed relay elements set to trip the breaker. The text
TRIP followed by the name of the operated element is recorded.
ALARM EVENTS
Default: Enabled
These events include the elements programmed as an ALARM or LATCHED ALARM
function, which detect power system conditions considered as an alarm.
CONTROL EVENTS
Default: Enabled
If set to Enabled, the event recorder records events caused by the performance of the
programmed control elements.
CONTACT INPUTS
Default: Enabled
When set to Enabled, the event recorder will record the event, when a contact input
changes its state.
LOGIC ELEMENT
Default: Enabled
When set to Enabled, the event recorder records the events, which occur upon state
change of any programmed remote input.
VIRTUAL INPUTS
Default: Enabled
changes of any logic element.
641
S1 RELAY SETUP
REMOTE INPUTS
Default: Enabled
change of any programmed remote input.
SETTING DATE/TIME
Default: Enabled
When set to Enabled, the event recorder records the event of the changing of the date
and time.
Transient recorder
The Transient Recorder contains waveforms captured at the same sampling rate as the
other relay data at the point of trigger. By default, the Transient Recorder captures data for
all analog currents: Winding 1 three-phase currents and ground, and Winding 2 threephase currents and ground. Triggering of the transient recorder occurs, when an event is
detected, causing a pickup, trip, dropout, or alarm, any one of which has been "Enabled" to
activate the trigger. The transient recorder trigger may also be activated when any of the
selected trigger inputs 1 to 3 is detected as having On status.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > TRANSIENT RECDR
BUFFER SETUP
Range: 1 x 192, 3 x 64, 6 x 32
Default: 3 x 64
Each selection from the range is expressed by two numbers; the first identifies the
number of records, whereas the second stands for the number of cycles per record.
TRIGGER MODE
Range: Overwrite, Protected
Default: Overwrite
When the Overwrite setting is selected, the new records overwrite the old ones,
meaning the relay will always keep the newest records. In Protected mode, the relay
will keep the number of records corresponding to the selected number, only without
overwriting.
TRIGGER POSITION
Default: 0%
This setting indicates the location of the trigger with respect to the selected length of
record. For example at 20% selected trigger position, the length of each record will be
split on 20% pre-trigger data, and 80% post-trigger data.
TRIGGER ON PKP
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of Yes setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Pickup condition
detected from any protection or control element.
642
S1 RELAY SETUP
TRIGGER ON DPO
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of Yes setting enables triggering for the recorder upon a Dropout condition
TRIGGER ON TRIP
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of Yes setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Trip condition
TRIGGER ON ALARM
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of Yes setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Alarm condition
TRIGGER ON INPUT 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Selection of input or logic element from the settings range enables triggering input for
the recorder. A record will be triggered if the status of the selected input changes to On.
Front panel
The user can send a message to the display, that will override any normal message by
sending text through Modbus. Refer to the 345 Feeder Protection System Communications
Guide for register details.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > FRONT PANEL
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
Range: 1 s to 65535 s
Default: 5 s
Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for
several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These
messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the
display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
MESSAGE TIMEOUT
Range: 1 s to 65535 s
Default: 30 s
If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default
message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on
the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values.
SCREEN SAVER
Range: Off, 1 min to 10000 min
Default: Off
The life of the LCD backlight can be prolonged by enabling the Screen Saver mode.
If the keypad is inactive for the selected period of time, the relay automatically shuts off
the LCD screen. Any activity (keypress, alarm, trip, or target message) will restore screen
messages.
643
S1 RELAY SETUP
W1 BKR OPEN COLOR

Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Green
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Open conditions.
W1 BKR CLSD COLOR
Default: Red
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Closed conditions.
W2 BKR OPEN COLOR
Default: Green
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Open conditions.
W2 BKR CLSD COLOR
Default: Red
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Closed conditions.
Installation
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > INSTALLATION
RELAY NAME
Range: Feeder Name, Alpha-numeric (18 characters)
Default: Feeder Name
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will
appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which
are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the communications channel.
RELAY STATUS
Range: Not Ready, Ready
Default: Not Ready
Allows the user to activate/deactivate the relay. The relay is not operational when set to
"Not Ready."
644
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
S2 System Setup
Figure 11: System Setup menu
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CURRENT SENSING
POWER SYSTEM
TRANSFORMER
WNDG 1 BREAKER
WNDG 2 BREAKER
S2 CURRENT SENSING
W1 PH CT PRIMARY
W1 PH CT SECONDARY
W1 [SENS] GND CT PRIMARY
W1 [SENS] GND CT SEC
W2 PH CT PRIMARY
W2 PH CT SECONDARY
W2 [SENS] GND CT PRIMARY
W2 [SENS] GND CT SEC
S2 POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
SYSTEM ROTATION
S2 TRANSFORMER
XFMR RATED LOAD
XFMR TYPE
PHASE COMPENSATION
W1 NOM VOLTAGE
W1 GROUNDING
W2 NOM VOLTAGE
W2 GROUNDING
S2 WNDG 1 BREAKER
52a CONTACT
52b CONTACT
BKR CONNECTED
897765A2.cdr
S2 WNDG 2 BREAKER
52a CONTACT
52b CONTACT
BKR CONNECTED
645
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
Current sensing
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING
W1 PH CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 5 A
Enter the rated phase CT primary current of the three-phase current transformers
associated with Winding 1.
W1 PH CT SECONDARY
Default: 1 A
Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). Enter the
rated phase CT secondary current of the three-phase current transformers associated
with Winding 1.
W1 GND CT PRIMARY
Default: 5 A
Enter the rated ground CT primary current of the ground current transformers
W1 GND CT SECONDARY
Default: 1 A
rated ground CT secondary current of the ground current transformers associated with
Winding 1.
W2 PH CT PRIMARY
Default: 5 A
Enter the rated phase CT primary current of the three-phase current transformers
W2 PH CT SECONDARY
Default: 1 A
rated phase CT secondary current of the three-phase current transformers associated
with Winding 2.
W2 GND CT PRIMARY
Default: 5 A
Enter the rated ground CT primary current of the ground current transformers
W2 GND CT SECONDARY
Default: 1 A
rated ground CT secondary current of the ground current transformers associated with
Winding 2.
646
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
Power system
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
Range: 60 Hz, 50 Hz
Default: 60 Hz
Enter the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a default to set the
optimal digital sampling rate.
SYSTEM ROTATION
Range: ABC, ACB,
Default: ABC
Enter the phase sequence of the power system.
Transformer
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER
XFMR RATED LOAD
Range: 0.00 to 200.00 MVA in steps of 0.01
Default: 5.00 MVA
Enter the self-cooled (100%) load rating for the power transformer.
TRANSFORMER TYPE
Range: Refer to above "Transformer Types" table
Default: y/D30
Select the transformer connection from a list of transformer types shown in table XX
Transformer types .
PHASE COMPENSATION
Range: Internal (software), External (withCTs)
Default: Internal (software)
Select the type of phase compensation to be performed by the relay. If set to Internal
(software), the transformer magnitude and phase shift compensations are performed
internally by the relay algorithm. If set to External (with CTs), the transformer phase
shift is externally compensated by the CT connections. The relay still performs
magnitude compensation when the External (with CTs) option is selected.
W1 NOM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.01 to 250.00 KV in steps of 0.01
Default: 13.80 KV
Enter the nominal phase-to phase-voltage rating of Winding 1 of the transformer.
W1 GROUNDING
Select the setting Within Zone, if there is a grounding path at Winding 1 side of the
transformer such as grounded neutral, grounding transformer, or grounded corner of a
delta winding. Select Not Within Zone, if there is no grounding path for Winding 1 in the
zone.
W2 NOM VOLTAGE
Range: 0.01 to 250.00 KV in steps of 0.01
Default: 4.16 KV
Enter the nominal phase-to phase-voltage rating of Winding 2 of the transformer.
647
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
W2 GROUNDING
Select the setting Within Zone, if there is a grounding path at the Winding 2 side of the
transformer, such as grounded neutral, grounding transformer, or grounded corner of a
delta winding. Select Not Within Zone, if there is no grounding path for Winding 2 in the
zone.
The Delta connection of CTs inherently has the effect of removing the zero sequence
components of the phase currents. If there were a grounding bank on the Delta winding
of the power transformer within the zone of protection, a ground fault would result in
differential (zero sequence) current and false trips. In such case, it would be necessary to
insert a zero sequence current trap with the wye connected CTs on the Delta winding of
the transformer.
In general, zero sequence removal is necessary if zero sequence can flow into and out of
one transformer winding but not the other winding. Transformer windings that are
grounded inside zone protection allow zero sequence current flow in that winding, and
therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary.
Transformer setup phase & magnitude compensations

Percent (biased) differential protection is the main type of protection for power
transformers with respect to detecting all types of transformer internal faults. This
protection is based on Kirchoffs Law where the algebraic sum of all currents flowing in
and out of the protected equipment is equal to zero. However, when applying this law to
transformer protection, one should keep in mind that direct summation of the measured
per-phase transformer currents does not automatically result in a zero differential current.
This is because:
1.
The transformer voltage ratio results in different winding nominal currents.
2.
The winding CTs are not rated to exactly match the winding nominal currents.
3.
Physically, the transformer windings are connected in Delta, Wye, or Zig-Zag

configuration, and each introduces a phase shift.
For correct performance of percent differential protection, it is necessary to adjust the
magnitude and phase relationships of the CT secondary currents for each winding, in order
to obtain near zero differential currents under normal transformer operating conditions.
Traditionally, the phase shift between the currents from the transformer windings has
been adjusted by connecting the CTs from the Wye winding in Delta connection, and the
CTs from the Delta winding in Wye connection. The magnitude of this adjustment is
accomplished using interposing CTs, or tapped relay windings. This, however, is not
required when the 345 relay is installed.
The 345 relay simplifies the process by performing the magnitude and phase shift
compensations automatically (internally). Upon receiving entered settings for the
protected transformer and winding CT ratings, the relay automatically calculates and
applies the correct magnitude of scaling to the winding currents, as well as the correct
phase shift, in order to prepare the currents for summation. In order to performing the
appropriate current compensation, all winding CTs must be connected in Wye (polarity
markings pointing away from the transformer).
Magnitude Compensation Reference: Percent differential protection by the 345 relay uses
the user-entered phase-to-phase voltage and the CT primary settings for Winding 1 as a
reference for current magnitude compensation.
648
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
Phase Shift Compensation Reference: Percent differential protection by the 345 relay uses
either the Delta or the Zig-Zag currents (depending on the transformer setup) as a phase
shift reference to perform the phase shift compensation. When a Wye/Wye transformer is
selected in the setup, the currents from the first Wye winding are used as a reference for
the phase shift compensation.
EXAMPLE:
This section describes the process of automatic current magnitude and phase shift
compensation using a specific example that shows how CT ratios, transformer voltage
ratios, and transformer phase shifts are used to generate the correction factors. These
correction factors are applied to the current signals to obtain extremely accurate
differential currents. The menu paths in the example are shown graphically in the above
figure.
Consider a typical Wye/Delta power transformer with the following data:
Connection: Y/d30 (i.e. delta winding phase currents lag the corresponding wye
winding phase currents by 30)
Transformer rated load: 5/7/9 MVA
Winding 1: 13.8 kV nominal, 500/5 CT ratio
Winding 2: 4.16 kV nominal, 1500/5 CT ratio.
The following sections will illustrate auto-configuration principles using in the example.
The current transformer ratings per each winding are entered as:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING > W1 PHASE CT PRIMARY: 500 A
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING > W2 PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1500 A
The transformer type is entered as:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > TRANSFORMER TYPE: Y/d30
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > XFMR RATED LOAD: 5 MVA
S2 SYSTEM SETU > TRANSFORMER > W1 NOM F-F VOLTAGE: 13.8 kV
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W1 GROUNDING: Within Zone
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W2 NOM F-F VOLTAGE: 4.16 kV
S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W2 GROUNDING: Not Within Zone
AUTOMATIC CT MISMATCH COMPENSATION
The 1500/5 CT on winding 2 does not perfectly match the 500/5 CT on Winding 1. The
perfectly matched winding 2 CT primary at nominal winding 2 voltage is calculated as
follows:
Eq. 1
where:
CT1 = Winding 1 CT primary rating
V1 = Winding 1 nominal voltage
CT2 = Winding 2 CT primary rating
V2 = Winding 2 nominal voltage
Thus, for any load, the Winding 2 CT secondary current is higher (per unit) than the Winding
1 CT secondary current. The mismatch factor is 1658.6 / 1500 = 1.1057.
The 345 relay calculates the magnitude correction factor for Winding 2 as follows:
Eq. 2
The 345 calculates and automatically corrects the CT mismatch to a maximum mismatch
factor of 16.
649
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
Hence, the measured currents from winding 2 will be automatically compensated by the
relay applying the correction factor of 0.904. The currents from winding 1 are not
multiplied by any correction factor, as they are always used by the relay as a magnitude
reference.
Based on 100% transformer loading (5MVA), the measured winding currents are:
Winding 1 CT: measured
Eq. 3
- winding 1 nominal current

Winding 2 CT: measured
Eq. 4
- winding 2 nominal current

Based on 100% transformer loading, the compensated currents expressed in times CT (w1)
as a reference and used by the percent differential protection will be as shown:
Eq. 5
Eq. 6
PHASE SHIFT COMPENSATION

The source phase sequence must be stated when describing the winding phase
relationships since these relationships change when the phase sequence changes. The
example below shows why this happens, using a transformer described in IEC
nomenclature as Yd1 or in GE Multilin nomenclature as Y/d30.
Figure 12: Example transformer
IB
IC
Ia'
Ib'
Ic'
Ia = Ia' Ic'
Ib = Ib' Ia'
Ic = Ic' Ib'
IA
897716A1.CDR
The above figure shows the physical connections within the transformer that produce a
phase angle in the delta winding lagging the respective wye winding by 30. The winding
currents are also identified. Note that the total current out of the delta winding is described
by an equation. Now assume that a source, with a sequence of ABC, is connected to
transformer terminals ABC, respectively. The currents that would be present for a balanced
load are shown below.
650
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 13: Phasors for ABC sequence
897717A1.CDR
Note that the delta winding currents lag the wye winding currents by 30, which is in
agreement with the transformer nameplate.
Now assume that a source, with a sequence of ACB is connected to transformer terminals
A, C, B respectively. The currents that would be present for a balanced load are shown
below:
Figure 14: Phasors for ACB sequence
828718A1.CDR
Note that the delta winding currents leads the wye winding currents by 30, (which is a
type Yd11 in IEC nomenclature and a type Y/d330 in GE Multilin nomenclature) which is in
disagreement with the transformer nameplate. This is because the physical connections
and hence the equations used to calculate current for the delta winding have not changed.
The transformer nameplate phase relationship information is only correct for a stated
phase sequence.
It may be suggested that for the ACB sequence the phase relationship can be returned to
that shown on the transformer nameplate by connecting source phases A, B and C to
transformer terminals A, C, and B respectively. This will restore the nameplate phase shifts
but will cause incorrect identification of phases B and C within the relay, and is therefore
not recommended.
651
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
All information presented in this manual is based on connecting the relay phase A, B and C
terminals to the power system phases A, B and C respectively. The transformer types and
phase relationships presented are for a system phase sequence of ABC, in accordance
with the standards for power transformers. Users with a system phase sequence of ACB
must determine the transformer type for this sequence.
The following diagram shows the internal connections of the Y/d30? transformer from our
example:
WINDING 1 (WYE)
C
B
b
c
WINDING 2 (DELTA)
The 345 performs this phase angle correction internally based on the following setpoint.
Set S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > TRANSFORMER TYPE to Y/d30.
The 345 supports all standard two-winding transformer types. Each transformer type from
the Transformer Types table below provides the following information:
transformer type notation as it appears on the display
winding connection (wye, delta, or zig-zag)
and ground CT assignment
angle by which a winding lags winding 1
diagrams showing the phase
relationships of voltage phasors,
where (the arrow sign)
indicates the reference phase
Transformer type
Y/d30
Voltage
phasors
Phase
shift
Wdg.
Connection
WYE
(gnd 1/2)
30 lag
DELTA
30 Lag
897721A1.CDR
phase angle correction (or phase shift)

that is initially performed to calculate
differential currents
As shown in the Y/d30 entry of the transformer types table, the 30 lag of the Delta
results into 0 phase shift applied to its currents (Delta phase reference), and 30 phase
angle correction (phase shift) applied to the winding 1 currents (Wye winding). These angle
corrections are described in the table as Phase shift.
In our example, the transformer has the Y-D connection. Traditionally, CTs on the Wye
connected transformer winding (winding 1) would be connected in a delta arrangement,
which compensates for the phase angle lag introduced in the Delta connected winding
(winding 2), so that line currents from both windings can be compared at the relay. The
Delta connection of CTs, however, inherently has the effect of removing the zero sequence
components of the phase currents. If there were a grounding bank on the Delta winding of
652
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
the power transformer within the zone of protection, a ground fault would result in
differential (zero sequence) current and false trips. In such a case, it would be necessary to
insert a zero sequence current trap with the Wye connected CTs on the Delta winding of
the transformer.
In general, zero sequence removal is necessary if zero sequence can flow into and out of
one transformer winding but not the other winding. Transformer windings that are
grounded inside the zone of protection allow zero sequence current flow in that winding,
and therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary.
The 345 performs this phase angle compensation and zero sequence removal
automatically, based on the settings entered for the transformer. All CTs are connected
Wye (polarity markings pointing away from the transformer). All currents are phase and
zero sequence compensated internally before the calculation of differential and restraint
quantities.
The phase reference winding (wf) is the winding which will have a phase shift of 0 applied
to it. The phase reference winding is chosen to be the delta or zigzag (non-wye) winding
with the lowest winding index, if one exists. For a transformer that has no delta or zigzag
windings, the first winding is chosen.
The phase compensation angle ?comp is the angle by which a winding current is shifted
to refer it to the phase reference winding, and is calculated by the 345 for each winding as
follows:
Eq. 7
where Rotation = ABC

Eq. 8
where Rotation = ACB

In our example, the phase reference winding would be winding 2 (i.e. wf = 2). The phase
compensation angle for each winding would then be calculated as follows (assuming
Rotation = ABC):
Eq. 9
TRANSFORMER TYPES
A complete table of two-winding transformer types is shown below.
653
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
Table 1: Transformer types

Transformer Wdg. Connection
Type
2W External 1
Correction
WYE (gnd 1/2)
WYE (gnd 2/3)

0
WYE (gnd 1/2)
180
lag
WYE (gnd 2/3)

180 lag
WYE (gnd 1/2)
150
lag
DELTA (gnd 2/
3) 150 lag
WYE (gnd 1/2)
330
lag
DELTA (gnd 2/
3) 330 lag
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
60 lag
DELTA (gnd 2/
3) 60 lag
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
180
lag
DELTA (gnd 2/
3) 180 lag
Y/y180
Y/d150
Y/d330
D/d60
D/d180
654
Voltage Phase Transformer Wdg. Connection

Type
Phasors Shift
(comp)
Y/y0
Y/d30
Y/d210
D/d0
D/d120
D/d240
Voltage Phase
Phasors Shift
(comp)
WYE (gnd 1/2)
WYE (gnd 2/3)

0
WYE (gnd 1/2)
30 lag
DELTA (gnd 2/
3) 30 lag
WYE (gnd 1/2)
210
lag
DELTA (gnd 2/
3) 210 lag
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
DELTA (gnd 2/
3) 0
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
120
lag
DELTA (gnd 2/
3) 120 lag
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
240
lag
DELTA (gnd 2/
3) 240 lag
S2 SYSTEM SETUP

Type
D/d300
D/y150
D/y330
Y/z150
Y/z330
D/z60

Type
Phasors Shift
(comp)
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
300
lag
DELTA (gnd 2/
3) 300 lag
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
WYE (gnd 2/3)

150 lag
210
lag
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
WYE (gnd 2/3)

330 lag
30 lag
WYE (gnd 1/2)
150
lag
ZIG-ZAG (gnd
2/3) 150 lag
WYE (gnd 1/2)
330
lag
ZIG-ZAG (gnd
2/3) 330 lag
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
60 lag
ZIG-ZAG (gnd
2/3) 60 lag
D/y30
D/y210
Y/z30
Y/z210
D/z0
D/z120
Voltage Phase
Phasors Shift
(comp)
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
WYE (gnd 2/3)

30 lag
330
lag
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
WYE (gnd 2/3)

210 lag
150
lag
WYE (gnd 1/2)
30 lag
ZIG-ZAG (gnd
2/3) 30 lag
WYE (gnd 1/2)
210
lag
ZIG-ZAG (gnd
2/3) 210 lag
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
ZIG-ZAG (gnd
2/3) 0 lag
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
120
lag
ZIG-ZAG (gnd
2/3) 120 lag
655
S2 SYSTEM SETUP

Type
D/z180
D/z300

Type
Phasors Shift
(comp)
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
180
lag
ZIG-ZAG (gnd
2/3) 180 lag
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
300
lag
ZIG-ZAG (gnd
2/3) 300 lag
D/z240
3W External
Correction
Voltage Phase
Phasors Shift
(comp)
DELTA (gnd 1/
2)
240
lag
ZIG-ZAG (gnd
2/3) 240 lag
WYE
23
WYE 0
WYE 0
The following table shows the linear combination of phases of a transformer winding that
achieves the phase shift and zero sequence removal for typical values of comp,
where:
IA[w] = uncompensated winding w phase A current
IAp[w] = phase and zero sequence compensated winding w phase A current.
Table 2:
COMP[W]
GROUNDING[W] = "NOT WITHIN ZONE"
GROUNDING[W] = "WITHIN ZONE"
30 lag
60 lag
90 lag
656
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
COMP[W]
GROUNDING[W] = "NOT WITHIN ZONE"
GROUNDING[W] = "WITHIN ZONE"
120 lag
150 lag
180 lag
210 lag
240 lag
270 lag
300 lag
330 lag
MAGNITUDE, PHASE ANGLE, AND ZERO SEQUENCE COMPENSATION

Transformer magnitude, phase angle, and zero-sequence compensation calculations
Complete magnitude, phase angle, and zero sequence compensation is as follows:
657
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
Winding 1 compensated currents:
Winding 2 compensated currents:
where:
- magnitude, phase and zero sequence compensated winding w phase currents
- magnitude compensation factor for winding 2 (see previous sections)
- phase and zero sequence compensated winding phase currents (see earlier).
In our example, the following phase and zero-sequence compensation equations would
be used:
For Winding 1 (Wye grounded neutral):
For Winding 2 (Delta):
The complete compensated winding 1 and winding 2 currents would be as follows:
658
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT CURRENT CALCULATIONS

Differential currents are calculated as follows:
Restraint currents are calculated as follows:
where,
are the phase differential currents, and
are the phase restraint currents.

Per the example, the per-phase differential and restraint currents would be as follows:
Winding breakers
The status of the Winding 1 breaker is monitored by the 345 relay using the status of either
one or two contact inputs, 52a (CI#1) and 52b (CI#2), wired to the Winding 1 breaker
auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b, and the status of the Winding 2 breaker 52a (CI#3) and 52b
(CI#4) wired to Winding 2 breaker aux contacts 52a and 52b respectively (see below).
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > WNDG 1 BREAKER
52a CONTACT
Range: Disabled, Contact Input 1
Default: Disabled
Select Contact Input 1 [52a (CI#1)] if connected to breaker auxiliary contact 52a.
52b CONTACT
Default: Disabled
Select Contact Input 2 [52b (CI#2)] if connected to breaker auxiliary contact 52b.
659
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
BKR CONNECTED
Range: Contact Input 5 to 10, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Select a contact input to show whether the breaker is connected (Racked-in, or
disconnect switches switched-on), or disconnected (racked-out, or disconnect switches
switched-off) to the system.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > WNDG 2 BREAKER
52a CONTACT
Default: Disabled
Select Contact Input 3 [52a (CI#3)] if connected to Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contact
52a.
52b CONTACT
Default: Disabled
Select Contact Input 4 [52b (CI#4)] if connected to Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contact
52b.
BKR CONNECTED
Range: Contact Input 5 to 10, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Select a contact input to show whether the breaker is connected (Racked-in, or
disconnect switches switched-on), or disconnected (racked-out, or disconnect switches
switched-off) to the system.
NOTE:
NOTE
It is highly recommended to monitor the status of the Winding 1 and Winding 2 breakers
using both breaker auxiliary contacts 52a, and 52b; however using only one of them is also
acceptable.
The breaker status when disconnected from the main power circuit, such by drawout
breaker racking mechanism, or isolated by the associated disconnect switches on a fixed
circuit breaker, is provided by monitoring the contact input setting for BKR
CONNECTED.The logic for Breaker Open, and Breaker Close status is shown in the table
below:
Table 3: Breaker open / Breaker closed status logic
52a contact
configured
52b contact
configured
Yes
Yes
Breaker status
Open
Close
52a contact open
52a contact closed
52b contact closed
52b contact open
52a contact open
52a contact closed

52b contact open
Yes
No
No
Yes
52b contact closed
No
No
Status unknown
If the contact input selected under BKR CONNECTED setting is asserted, the breaker is
considered connected to the primary system. When the breaker is determined
disconnected, the breaker state is shown to be neither open, nor closed.
660
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
Table 4: Breaker status with both contacts configured

52a contact status
52b contact status
Breaker status
Off
On
open
On
Off
closed
On
On
BKR status failure
Off
Off
BKR status failure
661
S3 PROTECTION
S3 Protection
The 345 protection elements are organized in two identical setpoint groups: Setpoint
Group 1 and Setpoint Group 2.
Each Setpoint Group has the same protection functions, depending on the relay order
code. These protection functions include:
662
87T Percent Differential (XFMR PCNT DIFF)
87T/50 Instantaneous Differential (XFMR INST DIFF)
87G Restricted Ground Fault (RESTD GND FAULT1(2))
49 Thermal Model (THERMAL MODEL)
51P Phase Timed Overcurrent (PHASE TOC1(2))
50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (PHASE IOC1(2)
51G Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent (GROUND/SENS. GND TOC1(2))
50G Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (GROUND/SENS. GND

IOC1(2))
51N Neutral Timed Overcurrent (NEUTRAL TOC1(2))
50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (NEUTRAL IOC1(2))
51_2 Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent (NEG SEQ TOC1(2))
50BF Breaker Failure (W1(2) BREAKER FAIL)
S3 PROTECTION
Setpoint group 1(2)

Figure 15: Protection setpoint group 1(2) menu - 1 of 2
S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1
XFMR PCNT DIFF
S3 XFMR PERCENT DIFF
XFMR INST DIFF
PCNT DIFF FUNCTION
RESTD GND FAULT1
MINIMUM PICKUP
RESTD GND FAULT2
SLOPE 1
THERMAL MODEL
S3 RESTD GND FAULT
PHASE TOC1
RGF FUNCTION
PHASE TOC2
PHASE IOC1
PHASE IOC2
GROUND TOC1
GROUND TOC2
GROUND IOC1
GROUND IOC2
NEUTRAL TOC1
NEUTRAL TOC2
NEUTRAL IOC1
NEUTRAL IOC2
NEG SEQ TOC1
NEG SEQ TOC2
S3 THERMAL MODEL
CT INPUTS
THERMAL MDL FUNC
RGF PICKUP
RGF SLOPE
THERMAL MDL PKP
RGF DELAY
THERMAL MDL ALARM
GND CURRENT SPVSN
HEAT TIME CONSTANT
GND SUPV LEVEL
COOL TIME CONSTANT
OUTPUT RELAY 3
OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
BLOCK 3
BREAK 1
BREAK 2
SLOPE 2
INRUSH INHBT FUNCT
INRUSH INHBT LEVEL
INRUSH INHBT MODE
OVEREXCIT INHIBIT
OVEREX INHT LEVEL
OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
S3 XFMR INST DIFF

INST DIFF FUNCTION
INST DIFF PICKUP

OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
897798. cdr
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
663
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 16: Protection setpoint group 1(2) menu - 2 of 2

S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1
S3 PHASE TOC1
XFMR PCNT DIFF
PH TOC FUNCTION
XFMR INST DIFF
RESTD GND FLT
PHASE CT INPUTS
PH TOC1 PKP
THERMAL MODEL
PH TOC1 CURVE
PHASE TOC1
PH TOC1 TDM
PHASE TOC2
PH TOC1 RESET
PHASE IOC1
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
PHASE IOC2
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
GROUND TOC1
OUTPUT RELAY 3
GROUND TOC2
...
GROUND IOC1
S3 GROUND TOC1
GROUND IOC2
GND TOC1 FUNCTION
NEUTRAL TOC1
NEUTRAL TOC2
NEUTRAL IOC1
S3 NEUTRAL TOC1
NEUTRAL IOC2
NTRL TOC1 FUNCTION
NEG SEQ TOC1
NEG SEQ TOC2
NTRL CT INPUTS
NTRL TOC1 PKP
NTRL TOC1 CURVE
NTRL TOC1 TDM
NTRL TOC1 RESET
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
S3 NEUTRAL IOC1
NTRL IOC1 FUNCTION
NTRL CT INPUTS
NTRL IOC1 PKP
NTRL IOC1 DELAY
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
897758. cdr
Transformer percent
differential
664
GND CT INPUTS
GND TOC1 PKP
GND TOC1 CURVE
GND TOC1 TDM
GND TOC1 RESET
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
S3 GROUND IOC1
GND IOC1 FUNCTION
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
S3 PHASE IOC1
PH IOC1 FUNCTION
PHASE CT INPUTS
PH IOC1 PKP
PH IOC1 DELAY
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
S3 NEGATIVE SEQ TOC1
GND CT INPUTS
NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNC
GND IOC1 PKP
GND IOC1 DELAY
PHASE CT INPUTS
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE
OUTPUT RELAY 3
NEG SEQ TOC1 TDM
...
NEG SEQ TOC1 RESET
OUTPUT RELAY 6
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
BLOCK 1
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
BLOCK 2
OUTPUT RELAY 3
BLOCK 3
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
The 345 provides one percent differential element per setpoint group. The settings menu of
the percent differential element defines a dual slope, dual breakpoint differential/restraint
characteristic. The calculation of differential and restraint currents are as shown on the
figure below.
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 17: Calculation of transformer differential (Id) and restraint (Ir) currents
Winding 1
current
waveform
Winding 2
current
waveform
Phase angle and

zero sequence
compensation
(as required)
Magnitude, phase
angle and zero
sequence
compensation
(as required)
Decaying dc
offset filter
Decaying dc
offset filter
Discrete Fourrier
transform
Discrete Fourrier
transform
MAX
Differential
Current
Restraint
Current
897801.CDR
The 345 continuously calculates per-phase differential and restraint currents, and
compares their ratio with the user pre-defined differential/restraint characteristic. The
purpose of this characteristic is to provide a zone for differential protection operation, and
a zone for no operation, where the user can define protection sensitivity and dependability
during internal faults, and security during external faults.
The differential current is calculated per-phase as a vector sum of currents from both
windings after magnitude and angle compensation.
Eq. 10
The restraint current is calculated as a maximum of the same internally compensated

currents:
Eq. 11
665
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 18: Differential / Restraint characteristic

Idifferential (xCT)
SLOPE 2
100%
OPERATE REGION
Transition Region
(lineal)
SLOPE 1
25%
PICKUP
0.30
BREAKPOINT 1
897802.cdr
BREAKPOINT 2
Irestraint (xCT)
The figure above shows the differential/restraint characteristic of the main transformer
percent differential protection.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP1 > XFMR PCNT DIFF
XFMR DIFF FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Percent Phase
Differential function. Output relays #1 R1 TRIP and #2 R2 TRIP will operate when the
Trip setting is selected and the Percent Differential protection is in operation. In this
mode the ALARM LED does not turn on. The ALARM LED will flash under the phase
differential operating condition, with the function setting selected as Alarm, and will selfreset when the condition clears. If the Latched Alarm setting is selected, the ALARM
LED will flash during the Phase differential operating condition, and will stay ON after
the condition clears, until the reset command is initiated. Output relay #1 Trip will not
operate when the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected.
MINIMUM PICKUP
Range: 0.05 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.10 x CT
This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. The setting
is selected based on the amount of differential current that might be seen under normal
conditions. This differential current is a result of the transformer magnetizing current, CT
inaccuracies, and a transformer ratio that may change as a result of the transformer onload tap changer.
SLOPE 1
Range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1
Default: 25%
This setting is applicable for restraint (through) currents of zero to kneepoint 1, and
defines the ratio of differential/restraint currents, above which the element will operate.
The slope is set to ensure sensitivity of internal faults at normal transformer loading.
666
S3 PROTECTION
BREAK 1
Range: 0.50 to 4.00xCT in steps of 0.01xCT
Default: 1.50xCT
The setting for Breakpoint 1 defines the limit of linear operation of Winding 1 CT,
accounting for up to 80% of residual flux that effectively reduces the capability of the CT
by a factor of 5. Breakpoint 1 should be set below the current that would cause CT
saturation due to DC components and/or residual magnetism. Very often the Breakpoint
1 setting is based on the transformer Winding 1 nominal current (100% transformer
loading). In such cases, one should check whether or not this setting complies with the
above recommendation regarding the CT linear performance. This breakpoint marks the
end of slope 1, where no CT saturation is expected to restrain (through) currents smaller
than that breakpoint.
BREAK 2
Range: 1.00 to 10.00xCT in steps of 0.01xCT
Default: 1.5xCT
Breakpoint 2 should be set below the fault current that is most likely to saturate any of
the transformer CTs due to an AC component alone. The setting is expressed in times CT
primary of Winding 1. For example if 10 kA is the maximum AC through fault current
before Winding 2 CT (1000:5) starts to saturate, on a 5 MVA transformer with a ratio of
13.8kV/4.16kV, and a Winding1 CT (500:5) rating, the Breakpoint 2 setting will be
6.02 x CT.
In this example:
Fault current (W2) = 10kA
CT primary (W2) = 1000 A/(1 CT)
M(W2) =
()()
()()
Breakpoint 2 =
. (:)
. :
()()
()
= 0.602
.
/( )
= 6.02
SLOPE 2
Range: 50 to 100% in steps of 1
Default: 95%
The Slope 2 setting ensures stability during fault conditions of the type that produce CT
saturation and spurious high differential current. Slope 2 should be set high to cater for
the worst case scenario where one set of CTs saturates, but the other set does not. In
such cases the differential/restraint ratio can go as high as 95% to 98%.
INRUSH INHBT FUNCT
Range: Disabled, 2nd Harm Block
Default: 2nd Harm Block
This setting enables or disables the inrush inhibit function. None of the settings for inrush
inhibit are active when the function is set to Disabled.
667
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 19: Transformer Inrush inhibiting
INRUSH INHBT LEVEL

Range: 0.1 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1
Default: 10%
This setting specifies the ratio of 2nd harmonic differential current to the fundamental
frequency differential current for the selected mode of 2nd harmonic inhibit. The percent
differential protection will be blocked from operation if the actual ratio of the differential
2nd harmonic current to the fundamental frequency differential current is above this
threshold.
INRUSH INHBT MODE
Range: "Per Phase", "2-out-of-3", "Average"
Default: Per Phase
This setting specifies the mode of blocking during transformer magnetizing (inrush)
conditions.
If set to Per phase, the function performs inrush inhibit for each phase individually.
If set to 2-out-of-3, the relay checks the 2nd harmonic level onthe per-phase
differential current, and blocks the differential protection for all three phases if the 2nd
harmonic on any two of these three phases is higher than the setting for the inrush
inhibit level.
If set to Average, the relay calculates the average 2nd harmonic level and compares
this level against the setting for the inrush inhibit level. Averaging of the 2nd harmonics
is adaptive and depends on the magnitude of the differential current per-phase. If the
differential current on any of the three phases goes below the differential current cut-off
level of 0.04 x CT, the 2nd harmonic current from that phase gets dropped (zeroed) from
the equation for averaging, and the dividing number (divisor) is decreased from 3 to 2.
The same happens if the magnitude of the differential current on one of the two
remaining phases drops below the cutoff level during energization. In this case the 2nd
harmonic on this phase will be dropped from summation, and the dividing number
(divisor) will be decreased to 1.
OVEREXCIT INHIBIT
Range: Disabled, 5th Harm
Default: Disabled
This setting provides 5th harmonic differential protection blocking during an
overexcitation condition that results from an increased V/Hz ratio.
Such an overexcitation condition from an increased V/Hz ratio, poses a danger to the
protected transformer. A given transformer can tolerate an overfluxing condition for a
limited time, as the danger is associated with thermal processes in the core. So
instantaneous tripping of the transformer by the differential protection is not desirable.
The relay uses a traditional 5th harmonic ratio for inhibiting the differential function
during overexcitation conditions.
668
S3 PROTECTION
OVEREX INHT LEVEL

Range: 1.0 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1
Default: 10.0%
This setting specifies the level of 5th harmonic during overexcitation (overfluxing)
transformer conditions. When the 5th harmonic level exceeds the specified OVEREX
INHT LEVEL setting (5th harmonic ratio) the differential element is blocked. The
overexcitation inhibit works on a per-phase basis.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Default: Do Not Operate
Any, or all, of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon percent
differential operation. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter
whether the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Percent Differential menu. Any of the assigned
blocking inputs can block the function. The available selections for each block include
Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.
669
670
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
Phase C current (IC5d)
Phase B current (IB5d)
Phase A current (IA5d)
SETPOINT
IC2d = LEVEL
IB2d = LEVEL
IA2d = LEVEL
RUN
RUN
RUN
IC5d = LEVEL
IB5d = LEVEL
IA5d = LEVEL
OVEREXC INHIBIT LEVEL
RUN
RUN
RUN
INRUSH INHIBIT MODE
PCNT DIFF PH A OP
5TH HMNC DIFF PH C
897803.cdr
PCNT DIFF PH C OP
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINT
Transient Recorder
Event Recorder
Trip
(To Breaker Failure )
Operate Output Relay 2

(W2 BKR TRIP)
PCNT DIFF PH B OP
5TH HMNC DIFF PH B
LED: ALARM
Operate Output Relay 1

(W1 BKR TRIP)
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
PCNT DIFF OP
Message
5TH HMNC DIFF PH A
Event Recorder
2ND HMNC DIFF PH C
2ND HMNC DIFF PH B
2ND HMNC DIFF PH A
Event Recorder
AND
Differential 5th Harmonic
5th harmonic =1
Disabled = 0
OVEREXCITATION
INHIBIT FUNCTION
SETPOINT
Phase C current (IC2d)
Phase B current (IB2d)
SETPOINT
INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL
PCNT DIFF PH C PKP
PCNT DIFF PH B PKP
PCNT DIFF PH A PKP
Transient Recorder
Event Recorder
OR
Phase A current (IA2d)
Differential 2nd Harmonic
2nd harmonic
Disabled = 0
Message
PCNT DIFF PKP
AND
INRUSH INHIBIT
FUNCTION
RUN
RUN
RUN
INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL
SLOPE 2
BREAKPOINT 2
BREAKPOINT 1
AND
Phase C Rest Current (ICr)
Phase B Rest Current (IBr)
Phase A Rest Current (IAr)
Restraint Currents
Phase C Diff Current (ICd)
Phase B Diff Current (IBd)
Phase A Diff Current (IAd)
Differential Currents
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
SLOPE 1
LED: PICKUP
AND
MINIMUM PICKUP:
SETPOINT
LATCH
LED: TRIP
OR
BLOCK 1:
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
Disabled = 0
PERCENT DIFF
FUNCTION:
RESET
Command
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 20: Percent Differential Protection logic diagram
AND
OR
AND
OR
OR
Transformer
instantaneous
differential
S3 PROTECTION
The 345 relay provides one Instantaneous Differential element per setpoint group.
Instantaneous Differential protection is not biased protection and operates in a fashion
similar to instantaneous overcurrent protection. Inputs to this protection are computed on
the basis of the relay per-phase differential currents. Operation occurs if the value of any of
the computed phase differential currents is above the instantaneous differential pickup
setting.
Instantaneous Differential protection is usually set to operate during high-fault current
situations, and if used, its pickup is set according to the following criteria:
The pickup setting (xCT) is selected to be higher than the maximum inrush current
during transformer energization
The pickup setting is set higher than the fault current for faults occuring outside the
zone of protection
The pickup setting is selected to be lower than the maximum fault current during
internal fault conditions.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 PROTECTION GROUP 1(2) > XFMR INST DIFF
INST DIFF FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Instantaneous
Phase Differential function. The output relays #1 R1 TRIP and #2 R2 TRIP will operate,
when the Trip setting is selected, and the Instantaneous Differential protection is
operational. In this mode, the ALARM LED does not turn on. The ALARM LED will flash
under the instantaneous differential operating condition, with the function setting
selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when the condition clears. If the Latched Alarm
setting is selected, the ALARM LED will flash during the operating condition, and will
stay ON after the condition clears, until the reset command is initiated. The output
relays #1 R1 TRIP and #2 R2 TRIP will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm
setting is selected.
INST DIFF PICKUP
Range: 3.00 20.00 xCT in steps of 0.01 xCT
Default: 8.00xCT
This setting defines the pickup level of the differential current required for operation.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any, or all, of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon instantaneous
Differential Protection operation. The selection of output relays operation is available no
matter whether the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
INST DIFF BLOCK1/2/3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Percent Differential menu. When any of the
selected blocking inputs - Contact input, Virtual Input, or Remote Input - is turned on, the
XFMR INST DIFF function will be blocked.
671
672
SETPOINT
Phase C Diff current (ICd)
Phase B Diff current (IBd)
Phase A Diff current (IAd)
Phase Differential Currents
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
SETPOINT
RUN
RUN
RUN
ICd = Pickup
IBd = Pickup
IAd = Pickup
INST DIFFERENTIAL
PICKUP:
LED: PICKUP
AND
BLOCK 1:
Trip
LED: TRIP
INST DIFF OP
INST DIFF PKP
Event Recorder
INST DIFF OP
INST DIFF PKP
Message
LATCH
OR
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
Disabled = 0
INST DIFF FUNCTION:
SETPOINT
RESET
Command
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
897804.cdr
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINT:
Trip
(To Breaker Failure )
Operate Output Relay 2 ((W1 BKR TRIP))
Operate Output Relay 1 ((W1 BKR TRIP))
LED: ALARM
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 21: Instantaneous Differential Protection logic diagram
AND
OR
AND
OR
OR
Restricted ground
fault
S3 PROTECTION
Depending on the SR345 order code, the relay provides up to two Restricted Ground Fault
elements per setpoint group; one per winding.
The Restricted Ground Fault (RGF) protection provides ground fault detection for lowmagnitude ground fault currents primarily for ground faults closed to the neutral point of
the wye connected winding. An internal ground fault on an impedance grounded wye
winding will produce a low magnitude ground fault current depending on position of the
fault with respect of the winding neutral point. See the diagrams below, expressing the
dependence of the fault current with respect to the fault distance from the neutral point.
The resultant primary current can be negligible for ground winding faults within 30%
distance from the neutral point since the fault voltage is not the system voltage, but rather
the result of the transformation ratio between the primary windings and the percentage of
shorted turns. Therefore, the resultant differential currents may be below the pickup and/
or the slope setting of the main differential element, where the fault will go undetected.
Application of the restricted ground fault protection extends the fault coverage towards
the neutral point.
Figure 22: RGF and percent differential zones of protection
WINDING
35%
RGF
ZONE
DIFFERENTIAL
ZONE
Rg
Figure 23: Fault currents vs points from neutral

100
90
80
% Max Ifault
70
60
Ifault
50
40
30
Ip
20
Ip(x)
10
Ifault(x)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
x = distance of fault from neutral

The SR345 implementation of the restricted ground fault protection is a low impedance
current differential scheme. The 345 calculates the magnitude of the ground differential
current as a difference between the vectors of the computed residual current, and the
measured ground current (i.e. 3I0- Ig), and applies a restraining current defined as the
673
S3 PROTECTION
maximum measured line current (Imax) to produce a percent slope value. The slope setting
allows the user to determine the sensitivity of the element based on the class and quality
of the CTs used.
The figure below shows the typical wiring between the winding CTs and the 345 CT
terminals to assure the correct performance of the protection. The restricted earth fault
protection is also available for delta windings with in-zone grounding transformer, or for
Delta corner grounded windings.
Transformer Winding
IA
IB
IC
Rg
IG
Ig
E5
D5
Ia
E6
D6
Ib
E7
D7
Ic
E8
D8
Ig
Winding 1 Current Inputs - CT (W1)
E9
D9
Ia
E10
D10
Ib
E11
D11
Ic
E12
D12
Ig
Winding 2 Current Inputs - CT (W2)
The 345 RGF protection includes ground current supervision mechanism o provide more
security during external non-ground faults associated with CT saturation, that may result
into spurious neutral current, and may jeopardize the security of the RGF protection. When
the GND CURRENT SUPERVISION setting is selected as Enabled, the algorithm checks if
the ground current measured by the relay satisfies the selected GND CURRENT
SUPERVISION LEVEL, before making operation decision. The ground current supervision is
not active if the GND CURRENT SUPERVISION is selected as Disabled. The RGF protection
works without the supervision as well.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 PROTECTION GROUP 1(2) > RESTRICTED GROUND
FAULT 1(2)
RGF FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Restricted Ground
Fault function. Output relays #1 R1 TRIP and #2 R2 TRIP will operate, only when the
Trip setting is selected, and the Restricted Ground Fault protection is operational. In this
mode the ALARM LED does not turn on. When the Alarm setting is selected as a
function, and the RGF protection is operational, the ALARM LED will flash and turn off
after the condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected as a function, the ALARM LED
will flash during the operating condition, and will stay ON after the condition clears,
until a Reset command is initiated. Output relays #1 R1 TRIP and #2 R2 TRIP do not
operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected.
CT INPUTS
Range: CT (W1), CT(W2)
Default:CT (W1)
This setting defines the winding three-phase and ground currents used by the RGF
function.
674
S3 PROTECTION
RGF PICKUP
Range: 0.02 to 20 x CT (W1) in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.10 x CT (W1)
This setting defines the minimum pickup level of the ground differential current required
for operation. The pickup value is expressed in times phase CT primary rating.
RGF SLOPE
Default: 0%
This setting defines the slope as the ratio between the ground differential current and
the maximum line current (ground restraining current) in percentages. The RGF element
will operate if the actual ground differential/restraint ratio is greater than the slope and
the ground differential current is greater than the RGF pickup setting. See the RGF Logic
diagram.
RGF DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 S in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.30 s
The RGF pickup time delay setting defines the time required for the RGF element to
operate after it has picked up. This time delay will override the spurious ground
differential current condition caused by CT saturation due to external non-ground faults,
or during transformer energization. Since RGF protection is intended to detect small
ground fault currents, delayed clearance of such a fault is not a high concern. On the
other hand delayed RGF operation due to a spurious ground differential current caused
by an out-of-zone fault can be used as a backup for downstream protections should
they fail to clear the fault.
GND CURRENT SPVSN
Default: Disabled
This setting enables or disables the ground current supervision of the RGF function. If set
to Disabled, the RGF function will work without ground current supervision. The ground
current level is monitored if the setting is set to Enabled.
GND SUPV LEVEL
Range: 0.02 to 10.00 x CTg (W1) in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.10 x CTg (W1)
This setting defines the level of measured ground current above which operation of the
RGF protection is allowed. The setting is presented in times ground CT primary. The
measured ground current is compared to the setting only if the GND CURRENT
SUPERVISION setting is set to Enabled.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any, or all, of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon restricted ground
fault protection operation. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter
whether the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
675
S3 PROTECTION
BLOCK 1/2/3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Restricted Ground Fault menu. When any of the
selected blocking inputs - Contact input, Virtual Input, or Remote Input - is turned on, the
Restricted Ground Fault function will be blocked.
Example:Transformer: 5MVA, 13.8kV/4.16kV, D/Yg1 type

Rg = 10 ohms
Phase CTs: 800:5
Ground CT: 300:5
Ifgnd (max) = 4.16kV/(10 ohms *3) = 240A - maximum ground fault current
To detect a ground fault on the Wye winding at 15% distance from the neutral point, the
relay shall detect ground differential current of:
Igd = (15x240)/100 = 36 A/800 = 0.045 x CT PKP setting for the RGF protection
The transformer loading will be almost unaffected for ground faults close to the winding
neutral, so that the winding rated load can be used as a reference in defining the RGF
slope setting. The rated load for 4.16kV Wye winding is:
Irated = 5MVA/(4.16kV*3) = 693 A
Slope setting, % = (36 A/693A)*100 = 5.1 %. Select 5% if the transformer is expected to run
most of the time at full load. If most of the time the transformer runs at lower than the
nominal loads, the slope setting can be set to higher value:
@ 70% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 485 A)*100 = 7%
@ 50% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 346 A)*100 = 10% \
@ 30% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 208 A)*100 = 17%
The ground current supervision feature and/or the RGF pickup time delay can be used if CT
saturation due to heavy external faults, is a concern.
676
SETPOINT
W1(2) Ground current (Ig)
Winding Ground Current
W1(2) Phase C current (Ic)
OR
In = 3I0
Ig > LEVEL (x CT1)
GND CURNT SPV LEVEL
Disabled = 0, Enabled = 1
GND CURRENT SUPV:
SETPOINT
Igd = I 3I0 + Ig I
Imax = max (Ia,Ib,Ic)
AND
W1(2) Phase B current (Ib)
W1(2) Phase A current (Ia)
Winding Phase Currents
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
RUN
RGF SLOPE:
RGF PICKUP:
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
tPKP
RGF PKP
Message and Event Recorder:
LED: PICKUP
RGF PKP TIME DELAY:
AND
Off = 0
Operate Output Relay 1 (W1 BKR TRIP)
RGF OP
LED: ALARM
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
897806.cdr
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINT:
TRIP (To Breaker Failure)
Operate Output Relay 2 (W2 BKR TRIP)
Message and Event Recorder
LED: TRIP
LATCH
OR
BLOCK 1:
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
Disabled = 0
RGF FUNCTION:
SETPOINT
Command
RESET
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 24: Restricted Earth Fault Protection logic diagram
AND
AND
OR
AND
OR
677
S3 PROTECTION
Transformer thermal
protection
The 345 relay provides one transformer thermal overload protection. Loads exceeding the
transformer load ratings over certain period of time, can degrade the insulation, and in
return may lead to short circuit conditions. The heating of the transformer is mostly of
resistive type (I2R), hence the generated heat is directly proportional to the square of the
flowing winding currents (I2 ). The relay uses the transformer thermal time characteristic
based on current squared and integrated over time. The relay will continuously calculate
the transformer thermal capacity as a percentage of the total thermal capacity as follows:
Eq. 12
Where:
(t) = Cable thermal capacity (%) at time t
(t-1) = Cable thermal capacity (%) at time t-1
t/ = Time step t divided by the heating/cooling time constant
I2 = (Iphase/Ipickup )2 = Squared ratio between the actual load current and the pickup setting
= Heating and cooling time constant (usually provided by the manufacturer).
The heating time constant is used when the squared load/pickup ratio is greater than the
thermal capacity (t-1) estimated in the previous time step. Otherwise the formula uses the
cooling time constant.
The time to trip is estimated when the load current exceeds the PKP setting, and the 49
element picks up. At the same time the thermal capacity will start to increase at a rate
depending on the current amplitude and the prior loading condition of the transformer.
When the thermal capacity exceeds the alarm level, the element will generate an alarm
signal. The thermal model alarm can be used as a warning for the start of dangerous
overloading conditions, and can prevent unnecessary tripping. When the thermal capacity
exceeds the trip level, the element will generate a trip signal. As per the formula below, the
operate time (time to trip) is determined from when the element picks up until it trips, and
depends on both the measured load over time, and the transformer heating and cooling
time constants.
Where:
TTRIP = Time to trip in seconds
2 = 1 = Trip thermal state set to 100%
= Heating and cooling time constant, usually provided by the manufacturer.
I2= Squared ratio of the actual phase current and the pickup setting.
The time to trip will start timing out once the level of the computed thermal capacity (%)
becomes higher than 100% thermal capacity ( =1 ). The trip flag will drop out when the
thermal capacity falls below 97% of the pickup level.
The measured Winding 1 phase currents are used as inputs by the Transformer
Thermal protection for detection of overload (overheating) conditions.
NOTE:
NOTE
678
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > THERMAL MODEL
S3 PROTECTION
THERMAL MDL FUNC

Default: Disabled
The output relays #1 TRIP W1 BKR and #2 TRIP W2 BKR will operate only if the Trip
function is selected, and the accumulated thermal capacity for any of the phases is over
100%. The ALARM LED will turn on if the thermal capacity for any phase is over the
Transformer Thermal Alarm setting, regardless of whether Alarm, Latched Alarm or Trip
is selected as the function. The ALARM LED will turn off when the thermal capacity
value of all phases is below 97% of the Transformer Thermal Alarm setting. If Latched
Alarm is selected as the function, the ALARM LED will flash when the thermal capacity
on any phase is over the Transformer Thermal Alarm setting, and will stay on even after
the thermal capacity for all phases drops below 97% of the Transformer Thermal Alarm
setting. The LED can be reset upon initiation of the "Reset" command. Any of the output
relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the Thermal function is selected as
Latched Alarm, Alarm or Trip.
THERMAL MDL PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT(W1) in steps of 0.01 x CT(W1)
Default: 1.00 x CT(W1)
This setting sets the level of phase current above which the thermal model starts timing
out the time-to-trip per the logarithmic formula above.
THERMAL MDL ALARM
Range: 1.0 to 110.0% in steps of 0.1%
Default: 80.0%
This setting sets the alarm level for the accumulated thermal capacity above which the
element generates an alarm.
HEAT TIME CONSTANT (H)
Range: 3.0 to 600.0 min in steps of 0.1 min
Default: 6.0 min
The Winding 1 heating time constant is used to compute the thermal capacity when the
thermal capacity at each time step is greater than the one computed in the previous
time step. The transformer winding heating constant is usually provided by the
manufacturer.
COOL TIME CONSTANT (C)
Range: 1.00 to 6.00 x H in steps of 0.01 x H
Default: 1.00 x H
The cooling time constant is used to compute the thermal capacity when the thermal
capacity at any time step is smaller than the one computed in the previous time step.
The range for this setting is given as multiples of the Heating Time Constant setting.
The thermal capacity is displayed on the relay even if the Thermal Model Function is set
to Disabled.
NOTE:
NOTE
679
680
Phase C current (IC)
Phase B current (IB)
XFMR THERMAL
Thermal Capacity ph C, %
Thermal Capacity ph B, %
Thermal Capacity ph A, %
ACTUAL VALUES
TTRIP (ph C)
TTRIP (ph B)
TTRIP (ph A)
OR
Phase A current (IA)
RUN
XFMR COOLING CONS
897815.cdr
Ph C Thermal OP
Ph B Thermal OP
Ph A Thermal OP
Xfmr Thermal OP
Ph C Thermal Alarm
Ph B Thermal Alarm
Ph A Thermal Alarm
Xfmr Thermal Alarm
AND
Phase Currents
Off = 0
BLOCK 3
OR
Off = 0
BLOCK 2
XFMR HEATING CONST
XFMR THERMAL PKP
q > q ALARM
AND
Off = 0
SETPOINT
SETPOINTS
SETPOINT
XFMR THERMAL ALARM
LED: ALARM
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINT
TRIP
(To Breaker Failure)
Operate #2 Trip
(TRIP W2 BKR)
Operate #1 Trip
(TRIP W1 BKR)
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
LED: TRIP
LATCH
OR
BLOCK 1
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
Disabled = 0
XFMR THERMAL FUNC
SETPOINT
RESET
Command
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 25: Transformer Thermal Protection logic diagram
OR
AND
OR
Phase timed
overcurrent
protection
S3 PROTECTION
TIME OVERCURRENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS

The 345 relay has two setpoint groups. When ordering the relay the user can select each
group to have two phase time overcurrent 51P(2), two ground time overcurrent 51G(2), two
neutral time overcurrent 51N(2), and two negative sequence time overcurrent 51_2(2)
elements. The programming of these elements is identical: PKP, Inverse Curve selection,
and Time Dial Multiplier (TDM). The curve shape can be either a standard curve selected
from a range of standard ANSI, IEC, IAC curves, or Definite time.
ANSI Curves
The ANSI time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the ANSI
C37.90 curve classifications for extremely, very, normally, and moderately inverse. The
ANSI curves are derived from the following formula:
Eq. 13
where:T = trip time (seconds); M = multiplier value; I = input current; Ipu = pickup current
setpoint; A, B, C, D, E = constants
Table 5: ANSI Curve Constants
ANSI Curve Shape
ANSI Extremely Inverse
0.0399
0.2294
0.5000
3.0094
0.7222
ANSI Very Inverse
0.0615
0.7989
0.3400
0.2840
4.0505
ANSI Normally Inverse
0.0274
2.2614
0.3000
4.1899
9.1272
ANSI Moderately Inverse
0.1735
0.6791
0.8000
0.0800
0.1271
681
S3 PROTECTION
Table 6: ANSI Curve Trip Times (in seconds)

Multiplier (TDM)
Current (I/Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
ANSI Extremely Inverse

0.5
2.000
0.872
0.330
0.184
0.124
0.093
0.075
0.063
0.055
0.049
1.0
4.001
1.744
0.659
0.368
0.247
0.185
0.149
0.126
0.110
0.098
2.0
8.002
3.489
1.319
0.736
0.495
0.371
0.298
0.251
0.219
0.196
4.0
16.004 6.977
2.638
1.472
0.990
0.742
0.596
0.503
0.439
0.393
6.0
24.005 10.466 3.956
2.208
1.484
1.113
0.894
0.754
0.658
0.589
8.0
32.007 13.955 5.275
2.944
1.979
1.483
1.192
1.006
0.878
0.786
10.0
40.009 17.443 6.594
3.680
2.474
1.854
1.491
1.257
1.097
0.982
0.5
1.567
0.663
0.268
0.171
0.130
0.108
0.094
0.085
0.078
0.073
1.0
3.134
1.325
0.537
0.341
0.260
0.216
0.189
0.170
0.156
0.146
2.0
6.268
2.650
1.074
0.682
0.520
0.432
0.378
0.340
0.312
0.291
4.0
12.537 5.301
2.148
1.365
1.040
0.864
0.755
0.680
0.625
0.583
6.0
18.805 7.951
3.221
2.047
1.559
1.297
1.133
1.020
0.937
0.874
ANSI Very Inverse
8.0
25.073 10.602 4.295
2.730
2.079
1.729
1.510
1.360
1.250
1.165
10.0
31.341 13.252 5.369
3.412
2.599
2.161
1.888
1.700
1.562
1.457
ANSI Normally Inverse

0.5
2.142
0.883
0.377
0.256
0.203
0.172
0.151
0.135
0.123
0.113
1.0
4.284
1.766
0.754
0.513
0.407
0.344
0.302
0.270
0.246
0.226
2.0
8.568
3.531
1.508
1.025
0.814
0.689
0.604
0.541
0.492
0.452
4.0
17.137 7.062
3.016
2.051
1.627
1.378
1.208
1.082
0.983
0.904
6.0
25.705 10.594 4.524
3.076
2.441
2.067
1.812
1.622
1.475
1.356
8.0
34.274 14.125 6.031
4.102
3.254
2.756
2.415
2.163
1.967
1.808
10.0
42.842 17.656 7.539
5.127
4.068
3.445
3.019
2.704
2.458
2.260
ANSI Moderately Inverse

0.5
0.675
0.379
0.239
0.191
0.166
0.151
0.141
0.133
0.128
0.123
1.0
1.351
0.757
0.478
0.382
0.332
0.302
0.281
0.267
0.255
0.247
2.0
2.702
1.515
0.955
0.764
0.665
0.604
0.563
0.533
0.511
0.493
4.0
5.404
3.030
1.910
1.527
1.329
1.208
1.126
1.066
1.021
0.986
6.0
8.106
4.544
2.866
2.291
1.994
1.812
1.689
1.600
1.532
1.479
8.0
10.807 6.059
3.821
3.054
2.659
2.416
2.252
2.133
2.043
1.972
10.0
13.509 7.574
4.776
3.818
3.324
3.020
2.815
2.666
2.554
2.465
IEC Curves
For European applications, the relay offers the four standard curves defined in IEC 255-4
and British standard BS142. These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, IEC Curve C, and
Short Inverse. The formulae for these curves are:
Eq. 14
where: T = trip time (seconds), M = multiplier setpoint, I = input current, Ipu = pickup current
setpoint, K, E = constants.
682
S3 PROTECTION
Table 7: IEC (BS) Inverse Time Curve Constants

IEC (BS) Curve Shape
IEC Curve A (BS142)
0.140
0.020
IEC Curve B (BS142)
13.500
1.000
IEC Curve C (BS142)
80.000
2.000
IEC Short Inverse
0.050
0.040
Table 8: IEC Curve Trip Times (in seconds)

Multiplier (TDM)
Current (I/Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
0.05
0.860
0.501
0.315
0.249
0.214
0.192
0.176
0.165
0.156
0.149
0.10
1.719
1.003
0.630
0.498
0.428
0.384
0.353
0.330
0.312
0.297
0.20
3.439
2.006
1.260
0.996
0.856
0.767
0.706
0.659
0.623
0.594
0.40
6.878
4.012
2.521
1.992
1.712
1.535
1.411
1.319
1.247
1.188
0.60
10.317 6.017
3.781
2.988
2.568
2.302
2.117
1.978
1.870
1.782
0.80
13.755 8.023
5.042
3.984
3.424
3.070
2.822
2.637
2.493
2.376
1.00
17.194 10.029 6.302
4.980
4.280
3.837
3.528
3.297
3.116
2.971
0.05
1.350
0.675
0.338
0.225
0.169
0.135
0.113
0.096
0.084
0.075
0.10
2.700
1.350
0.675
0.450
0.338
0.270
0.225
0.193
0.169
0.150
0.20
5.400
2.700
1.350
0.900
0.675
0.540
0.450
0.386
0.338
0.300
0.40
10.800 5.400
2.700
1.800
1.350
1.080
0.900
0.771
0.675
0.600
0.60
16.200 8.100
4.050
2.700
2.025
1.620
1.350
1.157
1.013
0.900
0.80
21.600 10.800 5.400
3.600
2.700
2.160
1.800
1.543
1.350
1.200
1.00
27.000 13.500 6.750
4.500
3.375
2.700
2.250
1.929
1.688
1.500
0.05
3.200
1.333
0.500
0.267
0.167
0.114
0.083
0.063
0.050
0.040
0.10
6.400
2.667
1.000
0.533
0.333
0.229
0.167
0.127
0.100
0.081
0.20
12.800 5.333
2.000
1.067
0.667
0.457
0.333
0.254
0.200
0.162
0.40
25.600 10.667 4.000
2.133
1.333
0.914
0.667
0.508
0.400
0.323
0.60
38.400 16.000 6.000
3.200
2.000
1.371
1.000
0.762
0.600
0.485
0.80
51.200 21.333 8.000
4.267
2.667
1.829
1.333
1.016
0.800
0.646
1.00
64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333
3.333
2.286
1.667
1.270
1.000
0.808
0.05
0.153
0.089
0.056
0.044
0.038
0.034
0.031
0.029
0.027
0.026
0.10
0.306
0.178
0.111
0.088
0.075
0.067
0.062
0.058
0.054
0.052
0.20
0.612
0.356
0.223
0.175
0.150
0.135
0.124
0.115
0.109
0.104
0.40
1.223
0.711
0.445
0.351
0.301
0.269
0.247
0.231
0.218
0.207
0.60
1.835
1.067
0.668
0.526
0.451
0.404
0.371
0.346
0.327
0.311
0.80
2.446
1.423
0.890
0.702
0.602
0.538
0.494
0.461
0.435
0.415
1.00
3.058
1.778
1.113
0.877
0.752
0.673
0.618
0.576
0.544
0.518
IEC Curve A
IEC Curve B
IEC Curve C
IEC Short Time
IAC Curves
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
Eq. 15
683
S3 PROTECTION
where: T = trip time (seconds), M = multiplier setpoint, I = input current, Ipu = pickup current
setpoint, A to E = constants.
Table 9: GE Type IAC Inverse Curve Constants
IAC Curve Shape
IAC Extreme Inverse
0.0040
0.6379
0.6200
1.7872
0.2461
IAC Very Inverse
0.0900
0.7955
0.1000
1.2885
7.9586
IAC Inverse
0.2078
0.8630
0.8000
0.4180
0.1947
IAC Short Inverse
0.0428
0.0609
0.6200
0.0010
0.0221
Table 10: IAC Curve Trip Times

Multiplier (TDM)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
IAC Extremely Inverse

0.5
1.699
0.749
0.303
0.178
0.123
0.093
0.074
0.062
0.053
0.046
1.0
3.398
1.498
0.606
0.356
0.246
0.186
0.149
0.124
0.106
0.093
2.0
6.796
2.997
1.212
0.711
0.491
0.372
0.298
0.248
0.212
0.185
4.0
13.591 5.993
2.423
1.422
0.983
0.744
0.595
0.495
0.424
0.370
6.0
20.387 8.990
3.635
2.133
1.474
1.115
0.893
0.743
0.636
0.556
8.0
27.183 11.987 4.846
2.844
1.966
1.487
1.191
0.991
0.848
0.741
10.0
33.979 14.983 6.058
3.555
2.457
1.859
1.488
1.239
1.060
0.926
0.5
1.451
0.656
0.269
0.172
0.133
0.113
0.101
0.093
0.087
0.083
1.0
2.901
1.312
0.537
0.343
0.266
0.227
0.202
0.186
0.174
0.165
2.0
5.802
2.624
1.075
0.687
0.533
0.453
0.405
0.372
0.349
0.331
4.0
11.605 5.248
2.150
1.374
1.065
0.906
0.810
0.745
0.698
0.662
6.0
17.407 7.872
3.225
2.061
1.598
1.359
1.215
1.117
1.046
0.992
8.0
23.209 10.497 4.299
2.747
2.131
1.813
1.620
1.490
1.395
1.323
10.0
29.012 13.121 5.374
3.434
2.663
2.266
2.025
1.862
1.744
1.654
0.5
0.578
0.375
0.266
0.221
0.196
0.180
0.168
0.160
0.154
0.148
1.0
1.155
0.749
0.532
0.443
0.392
0.360
0.337
0.320
0.307
0.297
2.0
2.310
1.499
1.064
0.885
0.784
0.719
0.674
0.640
0.614
0.594
4.0
4.621
2.997
2.128
1.770
1.569
1.439
1.348
1.280
1.229
1.188
6.0
6.931
4.496
3.192
2.656
2.353
2.158
2.022
1.921
1.843
1.781
8.0
9.242
5.995
4.256
3.541
3.138
2.878
2.695
2.561
2.457
2.375
10.0
11.552 7.494
5.320
4.426
3.922
3.597
3.369
3.201
3.072
2.969
0.5
0.072
0.047
0.035
0.031
0.028
0.027
0.026
0.026
0.025
0.025
1.0
0.143
0.095
0.070
0.061
0.057
0.054
0.052
0.051
0.050
0.049
2.0
0.286
0.190
0.140
0.123
0.114
0.108
0.105
0.102
0.100
0.099
4.0
0.573
0.379
0.279
0.245
0.228
0.217
0.210
0.204
0.200
0.197
6.0
0.859
0.569
0.419
0.368
0.341
0.325
0.314
0.307
0.301
0.296
8.0
1.145
0.759
0.559
0.490
0.455
0.434
0.419
0.409
0.401
0.394
10.0
1.431
0.948
0.699
0.613
0.569
0.542
0.524
0.511
0.501
0.493
IAC Very Inverse
IAC Inverse
IAC Short Inverse
PHASE TIMED OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

The SR345 relay has two Phase Time Overcurrent elements per protection group. The
settings of this function are applied to each of the three phases to produce phase
overcurrent trip or pickup. There is no intentional dead band where the current is above
684
S3 PROTECTION
the pickup level. However the pickup accuracy is guaranteed within the current input
accuracy of 3% above the set PKP value. The TOC pickup flag is asserted when the current
on any phase is above the PKP value. The TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays
picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the
current. The element drops from pickup without operating if the measured current drops
below 97-99% of the pickup value before the time for operation is reached. When Definite
Time is selected, the time for TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting. The
selection of Definite Time has a base time delay of 0.1 s, multiplied by the selected TD
multiplier. For example the operating time for TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5
will result in 5*0.1 = 0.5 s applying the time delay accuracy outlined under the Technical
Specification, and adding approximately 8 to 10 ms output relay time.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > PHASE TOC 1(2)
PH TOC1(2) FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Phase TOC
function. The output relay #1 "Trip" will operate when the Trip setting is selected, and the
Phase TOC operates. The ALARM LED will not turn on if the TOC operates when set to
the function Trip. The ALARM LED will flash upon phase TOC operation, with the TOC
function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when the operating condition clears. Until
the reset command is initiated, if Latched Alarm is selected as a TOC function, the
ALARM LED will flash during TOC operation, and will stay ON after the operation
clears. The output relay #1 Trip will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting
is selected.
PHASE CT INPUTS
Default: CT(W1)
The Phase Timed Overcurrent menu provides the selection of either CT(W1) input
currents or CT(W2) currents. If CT(W1) is selected, the PH TOC element will use the ratings
of the Winding 1 CTs entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. If
the CT(W2) setting is selected, the relay will use the CT ratings associated with
transformer Winding 2.
PH TOC1(2) PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the time overcurrent pickup level, specified as times CT. For example, a
PKP setting of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current.
PH TOC1(2) CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite Time, IEC Curve A/B/C
and Short Inverse, IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short
Default: Extremely Inverse
This setting sets the shape of the selected inverse curve.
PHASE TOC1(2) TDM
Default: 1.00
This setting provides the selection for Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the
inverse curve are modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected
with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level, the operation
of the element will not occur before an elapsed time after pickup, of 2.59 seconds.
685
S3 PROTECTION
PH TOC1(2) RESET
Range: Instantaneous, Linear
Default: Instantaneous
This setting provides for the selection of an Instantaneous or Linear reset time. If
Instantaneous reset is selected, the phase TOC element will reset instantaneously
providing the current drops below 97-99% of the Phase TOC PKP level before the time for
operation is reached. When Linear reset is selected, the time to reset is calculated based
on the following linear equation:
Eq. 16
where: TRESET - reset time in seconds; E - energy capacity reached (per unit); M - curve
multiplier; CR - characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time, User Curve and
FlexcurvesTM; 8 for IEC curves).
The 100% energy capacity for the TOC element is defined by the selection of PKP, TDM
and points from the inverse curve. A memory variable based on actual values currents is
monitored for accumulation of energy capacity, where if it reaches a level of 100% of the
set energy capacity level, the element operates, and if it goes below 97-99% of this level,
the element will tend to reset. The accumulated energy capacity is used as an input for
computation of the reset time when the Linear reset is selected as a setting.
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
The menu for the two trip output relays - RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR - is
available only if the Trip setting is selected as the function for the Phase Timed
Overcurrent element. One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon
Phase TOC operation.
NOTE:
NOTE
The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC
menu regardless of the selected OC function. These output relays will not operate if
either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function, regardless of the Operate/
Do Not Operate value selected. The output relays are operational only if the OC function
is selected as Trip.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any, or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate, upon phase TOC
operation. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether
Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Phase TOC menu. When any of the selected
blocking inputs - Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element - turns on,
the phase TOC function will be blocked.
686
SETPOINT
Disabled = 0
SETPOINTS
IC > PICKUP
IB > PICKUP
IA > PICKUP
PH TOC PH C PKP
PH TOC PH B PKP
PH TOC PH A PKP
PH TOC PKP
LED: PICKUP
PH TOC OP
PH TOC PH C OP
PH TOC PH B OP
PH TOC PH A OP
OR
RUN
RUN
RUN
PH TOC RESET TIME:
PH TOC TDM:
PH TOC CURVE:
PH TOC PICKUP:
AND
CT(W1) CT(W2) phase

currents selected under
PH TOC INPUT setpoint
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
SETPOINTS
AND
PH TOC INPUT:
LED: TRIP
LATCH
Operate trip
output relays
upon selection
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
SETPOINTS
(configurable only if TRIP
function selected)
LED: ALARM
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
897808.cdr
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINTS:
To Breaker Failure
Trip
OR
BLOCK 1:
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
PH TOC FUNCTION:
RESET
Command
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 26: Phase Time Overcurrent Protection logic diagram
OR
AND
OR
OR
687
S3 PROTECTION
Phase instantaneous
overcurrent
protection
The 345 relay has two identical instantaneous overcurrent protections - Phase IOC1, and
Phase IOC2 per protection group. Each of them consists of three separate instantaneous
overcurrent relays; one per phase, with identical settings. .
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > S3 PHASE IOC1(2)
PH IOC1(2) FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Phase IOC
function. The output relay #1 Trip will operate when the Trip setting is selected, and the
Phase IOC is operational. The ALARM LED will not turn on if the IOC is operational when
set to the Trip function. The ALARM LED will flash upon phase IOC operation, and with
the IOC function selected as Alarm, will self-reset when the operation clears. Until the
Reset command is initiated, if Latched Alarm is selected, the ALARM LED will flash
during IOC operation, and will stay ON after the operation clears. Output relay #1 Trip
will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm function is selected.
PH CT INPUTS
Default: CT(W1)
The Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent menu provides a selection for either CT(W1) input
currents or CT(W2) currents. If CT(W1) is selected, the PH IOC element will use the ratings
of the Winding 1 CTs entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. If
the CT(W2) setting is selected, the relay will use the CT ratings associated with
transformer Winding 2.
PH IOC1(2) PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the instantaneous overcurrent pickup level. For example, a PKP setting
of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current.
PH IOC1(2) DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting provides selection for the time delay used to delay the protection operation.
available only if the Trip setting is selected as the function for the Phase Instantaneous
Phase IOC operation.
NOTE:
NOTE
688
S3 PROTECTION
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon phase IOC
operation. Relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm,
Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Phase IOC menu. When any one of the selected
blocking inputs - Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element - is turned
on, the phase IOC function will be blocked.
689
690
Disabled = 0
SETPOINT
RUN
RUN
RUN
IC > PICKUP
IB > PICKUP
IA > PICKUP
PH IOC PICKUP:
SETPOINT
tPKP
tPKP
tPKP
PH IOC PKP DELAY:
OR
PH IOC C PKP
PH IOC B PKP
PH IOC A PKP
PHASE IOC PKP
LED: PICKUP
LED: TRIP
PH IOC C OP
PH IOC B OP
PH IOC A OP
PHASE IOC OP
AND
CT(W1), CT(W2) phase

currents selected under
PH TOC INPUT setpoint
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
OR
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
SETPOINT
PH IOC INPUT:
AND
BLOCK 1:
Trip
LATCH
LED: ALARM
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
897809.cdr
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINT
To Breaker Failure
Trip
Operate trip
output relays
upon selection
SETPOINTS
function selected)
OR
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
PH IOC FUNCTION:
SETPOINT
RESET
Command
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 27: Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram
OR
AND
OR
S3 PROTECTION
Ground timed
overcurrent
protection
NOTE:
NOTE
The relay has two Ground Time Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. The settings of
the function are applied to the measured winding ground input current to produce pickup
and trip flags. The Ground TOC pickup flag is asserted, when the ground current is above
the PKP value. The Ground TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked-up for the
time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element
drops from pickup without operation if the measured current drops below 97-99% of the
pickup value, before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the
time for Ground TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting. The Definite Time
selection has a default time of 0.1s.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > GROUND TOC
The settings from the menu for Sensitive Ground TOC, will appear only when the relay is
ordered with the sensitive ground CT. Otherwise, the relay displays the menu for Ground
TOC protection.
GND TOC1(2) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Alarm, Latched Alarm or Trip setting enables the Ground/Sensitive
Ground TOC function. With the GND TOC function selected as Alarm , and GND TOC
operational, the ALARM LED will flash, and will self-reset, when the operating condition
clears. Until the reset command is initiated, if Latched Alarm is selected the ALARM
LED will flash during the TOC operating condition, and will stay ON after the condition
clears. If the Trip setting is selected, the TOC menu allows the user to select the
operation of either RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR, RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR, or both trip output relays.
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether the
Alarm, Latched Alarm or Trip setting is selected.
GND CT INPUTS
Default: CT(W1)
The Ground Timed Over-Current menu provides for the selection for either ground CT of
winding 1 - CT(W1), or ground CT of winding 2 - CT(W2), input. If CT(W1) is selected, the
GND TOC element will use the ground CT rating of Winding 1 entered on the relay under
SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. If CT(W2) setting is selected, the relay will use the
ground CT rating associated with transformer Winding 2.
GND TOC1(2) PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
SENS.GND TOC1(2) PKP
Default: 1.000 x CT
This setting sets the Time Overcurrent pickup level specified in times CT. For example, a
PKP setting of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. If the relay is
ordered with a Sensitive Ground CT, the range for this setting is 0.005 to 3.000 x CT, with
a step of 0.001xCT, and a default value of 1.000 x CT.
691
S3 PROTECTION
GND TOC1(2) CURVE

Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse, Definite Time IEC Curve A/B/C
and Short Inverse IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short User Curve, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B
This setting sets the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve. If none of the
standard curve shapes is appropriate, a custom User curve, or FlexCurve can be
created. Refer to the User Curve and FlexCurve setup for more details about their
configuration and usage.
GND TOC1(2) TDM
Default: 1.00
This setting provides the selection of the Time Dial Multiplier, using which the times from
the inverse curve are modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is
selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times greater than the PKP level, the
operation of the element will not occur before 2.59s has elapsed from the time of pickup.
GND TOC1(2) RESET
This setting provides for the selection of either an Instantaneous or a Linear reset time. If
Instantaneous reset is selected, the ground TOC element will reset instantaneously
providing the current drops below 97-98% below the Ground TOC PKP level, before the
time for operation is reached. When Linear reset is selected, the time to reset is
calculated based on the following linear equation:
Eq. 17
where:
TRESET - reset time in seconds;
E - energy capacity reached (per unit);
M - curve multiplier;
CR - characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time, User Curve and FlexcurvesTM;
8 for IEC curves).
only available if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Ground TOC element.
Either one, or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Ground TOC
operation.
NOTE:
NOTE
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon ground TOC
operation. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the
692
S3 PROTECTION
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Ground TOC menu. When any of the selected
blocking inputs - Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element - turn on,
the Phase TOC function is blocked.
693
694
Disabled = 0
SETPOINTS
Ground/Sens Ground current (Ig)
CT(W1) CT(W2) ground

current selected under
GND TOC INPUT
Off = 0
BLOCK 3
Off = 0
BLOCK 2
Off = 0
RUN
Ig > PICKUP
GND TOC RESET
GND TOC TD MULTIPLIER
GND TOC CURVE
GND TOC PICKUP
AND
GND TOC PKP
LED: ALARM
Operate trip
output relays
upon selection
GND TOC OP
897810.cdr
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINTS
RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR
RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR
SETPOINTS
( configurable only if TRIP
function selected )
To Breaker Failure
Trip
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
LED: PICKUP
AND
GND TOC INPUT
SETPOINTS
LED: TRIP
LATCH
OR
BLOCK 1
Trip
Latched Alarm
Alarm
AND
GND TOC FUNCTION
SETPOINT
RESET
Command
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 28: Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent Protection logic diagram
AND
OR
OR
Ground instantaneous
overcurrent
protection
S3 PROTECTION
The relay has two Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent protections per
setpoint group. The settings of these functions are applied to the measured ground, or
sensitive ground current for producing pickup and trip flags. The Ground IOC pickup flag is
asserted when the ground current is above the PKP value. The Ground IOC operate flag is
asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the Ground IOC PKP Delay
setting. If the pickup time delay is set to 0.00 seconds, the pickup and operate flags will be
asserted at the same time. The element drops from pickup without operation if the ground
current drops below 97 to 99% of the pickup value.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > GROUND IOC1(2)
GND IOC1(2) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Trip, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Alarm, Latched Alarm or Trip setting enables the Ground/Sensitive
Ground IOC function. With the GND IOC function selected as Alarm , and GND IOC
operational, the ALARM LED will flash, and will self-reset, when the operating condition
clears. Until a reset command is initiated, if Latched Alarm is selected, the ALARM LED
will flash during the IOC operating condition, and will stay ON after the condition clears.
If the Trip setting is selected, the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of
either one of the two trip output relays RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR, RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR, or both.
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether the
Alarm, Latched Alarm or Trip setting is selected.
GND CT INPUTS
Default: CT(W1)
The Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent menu provides for selection of either the ground
CT of Winding 1-CT(W1), or the ground CT of Winding 2- CT(W2) input. If CT(W1) is
selected, the GND IOC element will use the ground CT rating of Winding 1 entered on the
relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. If CT(W2) setting is selected, the relay
will use the ground CT rating associated with transformer Winding 2.
GND IOC1(2) PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
SENS.GND IOC1(2) PKP
Default: 1.000 x CT
This setting sets the ground overcurrent pickup level specified as times CT. For example,
a PKP setting of 0.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. For Sens.
Ground CT, the range of the setting is from 0.005 to 3.000 x CT, with a step of 0.001 x CT,
and a default value of 1.000 x CT.
GND IOC1(2) DELAY
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting provides the selection of the pickup time delay used to delay operation of
the protection.
695
S3 PROTECTION

available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Ground IOC element.
One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate under the operating condition.
NOTE:
NOTE
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any, or all, of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon ground IOC
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Ground IOC menu. When any of the selected
blocking inputs - Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element - turns on,
the ground IOC function is blocked.
696
Disabled = 0
Ground/Sens. Ground current (Ig)
CT(W1), CT(W2) ground

current selected under
GND TOC CT INPUT
Off = 0
BLOCK 3
Off = 0
BLOCK 2
SETPOINT
RUN
Ig > PICKUP
GND IOC PICKUP
GND IOC CT INPUT

SETPOINT
LED: PICKUP
tPKP
GND TOC PKP
GND IOC PKP DELAY
AND
Off = 0
SETPOINT
LATCH
LED: ALARM
Operate trip
output relays
upon selection
GND TOC OP
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINTS:
897811.cdr
RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR
RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR
SETPOINTS
( configurable only if TRIP
function selected )
To Breaker Failure
Trip
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
LED: TRIP
OR
BLOCK 1
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
GND IOC FUNCTION
SETPOINT
RESET
Command
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 29: Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic

diagram
AND
AND
OR
OR
697
S3 PROTECTION
Neutral timed
overcurrent
protection
The relay has two Neutral Time Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. The settings of
this function are applied to the calculated neutral current to produce pickup and trip flags.
The Neutral TOC pickup flag is asserted when the neutral current is above the PKP value.
The Neutral TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by
the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from
pickup without operating if the neutral current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value,
before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the time for
Neutral TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > S3 NEUTRAL TOC1(2)
NTRL TOC1(2) FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Neutral IOC
function. With the NTRL IOC function selected as Alarm , and NTRL IOC operational, the
ALARM LED will flash, and will self-reset, when the operating condition clears. Until the
reset command is initiated, if Latched Alarm is selected, the ALARM LED will flash
during the IOC operating condition, and will stay ON after the condition clears. If the
Trip setting is selected, the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of either
one of the two trip output relays RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR, RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR, or both. Any or
all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether Alarm,
Latched Alarm or Trip setting is selected.
NTRL CT INPUTS
Default: CT(W1)
The menu of the Neutral Time OverCurrent element provides for selection of either CT
(W1), or CT(W2) input currents. If CT(W1) is selected, the NTRL TOC element will use the
neutral current computed by the relay based on Winding 1 phase currents and the
Winding 1 CT ratings. If CT(W2) setting is selected, the NTRL TOC element will use the
computed neutral current from Winding 2 phase currents and Winding 2 CT ratings.
NTRL TOC1(2) PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the time overcurrent pickup level specified as times CT. For example, a
PKP setting of 0.9 x CT(W1) with CT(W1) rating of 300:5 translates into 270A primary
current.
NTRL TOC1(2) CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse Definite Time IEC Curve A/B/C
and Short Inverse IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short
This setting sets the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve.
NTRL TOC1(2) TDM
Default: 1.00
This setting provides for selection of the Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the
selected inverse curve are modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is
selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level,
operation of the element will not occur before 2.59s have elapsed from pickup.
698
S3 PROTECTION
NTRL TOC1(2) RESET

Selection of an Instantaneous or Linear reset time is provided using this setting. If
Instantaneous reset is selected, the Neutral TOC element will reset instantaneously
providing the current drops below 97-99% below the Neutral TOC PKP level before the
time for operation is reached. When Linear reset is selected, the time to reset is
calculated based on the following linear equation:
Eq. 18
where:
TRESET - reset time in seconds;
E - energy capacity reached (per unit);
M - curve multiplier;
CR - characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time.
and the points from the inverse curve. A memory variable based on actual values
currents is monitored for accumulation of energy capacity, where if it reaches a level of
100% of the set energy capacity level, the element operates, and if it goes below 97-99%
of this level, will tend to reset. The accumulated energy capacity is used as an input for
computation of the reset time when Linear reset is selected as a setting.
available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Neutral Timed
Neutral TOC operation.
NOTE:
NOTE
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any, or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate, upon Neutral TOC
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
There are three independent blocking inputs in the Neutral TOC menu. The function is
blocked if any of the three blocking inputs is detected high. The selection of a block
input includes Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.
699
6100
Disabled = 0
SETPOINTS
Neutral current (IN)
CT(W2), CT(W2)
neutral current
computed by the relay
Off = 0
BLOCK 3
Off = 0
BLOCK 2
Off = 0
RUN
IN > PICKUP
NTRL TOC RESET
NTRL TOC TDM
NTRL TOC CURVE
NTRL TOC PICKUP
LED: PICKUP
AND
NTRL TOC CT INPUT
SETPOINTS
AND
NTRL TOC PKP
LATCH
Operate trip
output relays
upon selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINTS:
NTRL TOC OP
LED: ALARM
897812.cdr
RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR
RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR
SETPOINTS
function selected)
To Breaker Failure
Trip
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
LED: TRIP
OR
BLOCK 1
Trip
Latched Alarm
Alarm
AND
NTRL TOC FUNCTION
SETPOINT
RESET
Command
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 30: Neutral Timed Overcurrent Protection logic diagram
AND
OR
OR
S3 PROTECTION
Neutral
instantaneous
overcurrent
protection
The relay has two Instantaneous Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. The settings of
this function are applied to the calculated neutral current to produce pickup and trip flags.
The Neutral IOC pickup flag is asserted when the neutral current is above the PKP value.
The Neutral IOC operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined
by the Neutral IOC Delay setting. If the pickup time delay is set to 0.00 seconds, the pickup
and operate flags will be asserted at the same time. The element drops from pickup
without operation if the neutral current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1 (2) > S3 NEUTRAL IOC1(2)
NTRL IOC1(2) FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Alarm, Latched Alarm or Trip setting enables the Neutral IOC
function. With the NTRL IOC function selected as Alarm , and NTRL IOC operational, the
ALARM LED will flash, and will self-reset, when the operating condition clears. Until the
reset command is initiated, if Latched Alarm is selected, the ALARM LED will flash
during IOC operation, and will stay ON after the condition clears. If the Trip setting is
selected, the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of either one of the two
trip output relays RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR, RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR, or both. Any or all of the
output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether the Alarm, Latched
Alarm, or Trip setting is selected.
NTRL CT INPUTS
Default: CT(W1)
The Neutral Overcurrent menu provides selection for either CT (W1), or CT(W2) phase
inputs. If CT(W1) is selected, the NTRL IOC element will use the neutral current computed
by the relay based on Winding 1 phase currents and the Winding 1 CT ratings. If CT(W2)
setting is selected, the relay will use the computed neutral current based on Winding 2
phase currents and Winding 2 CT ratings.
NTRL IOC1(2) PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the neutral instantaneous overcurrent pickup level specified in times CT.
NTRL IOC1(2) DELAY
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting provides for selection of the pickup time delay used to delay the operation of
the protection.
available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Neutral IOC element.
One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Neutral IOC operation.
NOTE:
NOTE
6101
S3 PROTECTION
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon the Neutral IOC
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
There are three independent blocking inputs in the Neutral IOC menu. The function is
blocked if any of the three blocking inputs is detected high. Selection of a block input
includes Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.
6102
Disabled = 0
SETPOINTS
Neutral current (IN)
CT(W2), CT(W2)
neutral current
computed by the relay
Off = 0
BLOCK 3
Off = 0
BLOCK 2
Off = 0
RUN
IN > PICKUP
NTRL IOC PICKUP
SETPOINTS
LED: PICKUP
tPKP
NTRL IOC PKP DELAY
NTRL TOC PKP
AND
NTRL IOC CT INPUT
SETPOINTS
LATCH
Operate trip
output relays
upon selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINTS:
Neutral IOC PKP
LED: ALARM
897813.cdr
RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR
RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR
SETPOINTS
function selected)
To Breaker Failure
Trip
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
LED: TRIP
OR
BLOCK 1
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
NTRL IOC FUNCTION
SETPOINT
RESET
Command
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 31: Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram
AND
AND
OR
OR
6103
S3 PROTECTION
Negative sequence
timed overcurrent
protection
The SR3 relay has two Negative Sequence Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. The
negative sequence overcurrent protection responds to negative sequence |I2|current,
where it is calculated as .
The negative sequence overcurrent elements are uniquely suited to detect phase-phase
faults and are not sensitive to balanced loads. While negative sequence elements do not
respond to a balanced load, they do detect the negative sequence current present in an
unbalanced load. For this reason, select an element pickup setting above the maximum
expected I2 current due to load unbalance.
The Negative Sequence TOC1(2) Trip (Alarm) Pickup flag is asserted when the negative
sequence current is above the PKP value. The Negative Sequence TOC1(2) Trip (Alarm)
operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked-up for the time defined by the selected
inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from pickup without
operation if the measured current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value, before the time
for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the time for Negative Sequence
TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting. The selection of Definite Time has a base
time delay of 0.1s, multiplied by the selected TD multiplier. For example, the operating time
for TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5 will result in 5*0.1 = 0.5s.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > NEG SEQ TOC1(2)
NEG SEQ TOC1(2) FUNC
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Negative
Sequence TOC function. The output relay #1 Trip will operate if the function Trip is
selected, and the negative sequence current computed by the relay, is above the NEG
SEQ TOC PKP setting for a time greater than the selected time under NEG SEQ TOC
DELAY. The ALARM LED will not turn on if the negative sequence TOC function is set to
Trip. The ALARM LED will flash under the neg. sequence TOC operating condition, with
the negative sequence TOC function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset when this
operating condition clears. Until a reset command is initiated, if Latched Alarm is
selected as a negative sequence TOC function, the ALARM LED will flash during the TOC
condition, and will stay ON after the condition clears. The output relay #1 Trip will not
operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. Any or all of the output relays
3 to 6 can be selected to operate with the negative sequence TOC function selected as
Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
PHASE CT INPUTS
Default: CT(W1)
The Negative Sequence TOC menu provides selection for either CT(W1) input currents or
CT(W2) currents. If CT(W1) is selected, the NEG SEQ TOC element will use CT ratings
associated with transformer winding 1. If the CT(W2) setting is selected, the relay will use
the CT ratings associated with transformer winding 2.
NEG SEQ TOC1(2) PKP
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting defines the negative sequence TOC pickup level associated with the ratings
of the CTs selected under NEG SEQ CT INPUT.
For example if CT(W1) = 100:5, and the CT(W2)=500:5, a pickup of 0.5 xCT with NEG SEQ
CT INPUT = CT(W1) will be equivalent to a pickup of 0.5x100 = 50Amps negative
sequence current. The same pickup setting with NEG SEQ CT INPUT selected as CT(W2)
will lead to a pickup threshold of 250 Amps neg. sequence current
6104
S3 PROTECTION
NEG SEQ TOC1(2) CURVE

Range: - ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse- Definite Time- IEC Curve A/B/
C and Short Inverse- IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short
Default: Ext Inverse
This setting defines the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve.
NEG SEQ TOC1(2) TDM
Default: 1.00
This setting provides a selection for Time Dial Multiplier, which modifies the time
response of the selected curve. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is
selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level, the
operation of the element will not occur before the elapse of 2.59 seconds from pickup.
NEG SEQ TOC1(2) RESET
The reset of the negative sequence timed overcurrent can be selected as either
Instantaneous or Linear. If Instantaneous reset is selected, the Negative Sequence
TOC element will reset instantaneously providing that the current drops below 97-98%
of the Neg. Seq. TOC PKP level, before the time for operation is reached. When Linear
reset is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the following linear equation:
Eq. 19
where: TRESET - reset time in seconds; E - energy capacity reached (per unit); M - curve
multiplier; CR - characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time, User Curve.
and points from the inverse curve. A memory variable based on actual values currents is
monitored for accumulation of energy capacity, where if it reaches a level of 100% of the
set energy capacity level, the element operates, and if it goes below 97-98% of this level,
the element will tend to reset. The accumulated energy capacity is used as an input for
computation of the reset time, when the Linear reset is selected as a setting.
available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Negative Sequence TOC
element. One, or both, trip output relays can be selected to operate under the Negative
Sequence TOC operating condition.
NOTE:
NOTE
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon the negative
sequence TOC condition. Relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the
6105
S3 PROTECTION
BLOCK 1/2/3
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the negative sequence TOC menu. Any one of the
assigned blocking inputs can block the function. The selections for each block include
Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.
6106
Disabled = 0
SETPOINTS
I_2
Calculated Negative
Sequence Current
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
SETPOINTS
Adjust PKP
I_2 x t =
RUN
I_2 > PICKUP
NEG SEQ TOC RESET
NEG SEQ TOC TDM
NEG SEQ TOC CURVE
LED: PICKUP
NEG SEQ TOC PKP
AND
NEG SEQ TOC PICKUP
LED: ALARM
Operate trip
output relays
upon selection
NEG SEQ TOC OP
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINTS
897807.cdr
RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR
SETPOINTS
function selected)
To Breaker Failure
Trip
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
LED: TRIP
LATCH
OR
BLOCK 1:
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
NEG SEQ TOC FUNCTN:
SETPOINT
RESET
Command
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 32: Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent logic diagram
AND
AND
OR
OR
6107
S4 CONTROLS
S4 Controls
Figure 33: Controls menu
S4 CONTROLS
CHANGE SETP GROUP
VIRTUAL INPUTS
LOGIC ELEMENTS
S4 CHANGE SETP GROUP

SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE
BLK GROUP CHANGE
W1 BREAKER FAIL
W2 BREAKER FAIL
RESET
S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
...
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
S4 LOGIC ELEMENTS
LOGIC ELEMENT 1
LOGIC ELEMENT 2
LOGIC ELEMENT 3
S4 LOGIC ELEMENT 1
LOGIC E1 NAME
LOGIC E1 FUNCTION
LOGIC ELEMENT 4
LOGIC E1 ASSERTED
...
TRIGGER SOURCE 1
LOGIC ELEMENT 16[8]
TRIGGER SOURCE 2
TRIGGER SOURCE 3
S4 W1 BREAKER FAIL
BF FUNCTION
897767A1. cdr
TRIGGER LOGIC
PICKUP TIME DELAY
DROPOUT TIME DELAY
BF CURRENT
RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR
BF EXT INITIATE
RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR
BF TIME DELAY 1
OUTPUT RELAY 3
BF TIME DELAY 2
...
OUTPUT RELAY 3
OUTPUT RELAY 6
...
BLOCK 1
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
BLOCK LOGIC
Change setpoint group

The 345 relay has two identical setpoint groups- Group 1 and Group 2 for all protection
elements. Switching between these two groups is available automatically by assigning an
input (contact, virtual, remote, logic element), or via communications.
Group 1 is the default setpoint group. The relay can automatically switch from Group 1
protections to Group 2 protections, and vice versa, by setting up the switching conditions
under Change Setpoint Group. Under some application conditions, such as an overcurrent, or voltage element pick up, it may not be desirable to change setpoint groups. A
setpoint change can also be prevented if the breaker is open, so that a fault detected
before a reclosure will not cause a group change while the breaker is open. In such cases,
the user can set a condition under BLK GROUP CHANGE, where if asserted, the active
setpoint group will stay active, even if the input configured to switch to the other setpoint
group is asserted. For example if the active group was Group 1 at the time of a trip, the
breaker opens, and the input configured under BLK GROUP CHANGE is asserted, the relay
6108
S4 CONTROLS
will maintain Setpoint Group 1, even if the input SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE is asserted. Vice
versa, if the BLK GROUP CHANGE input is asserted; the relay will not switch from Group 2
to Group 1, even if the input under SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE is de-asserted.
The relay will default to Setpoint Group 1, if both the input SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE and the
blocking input BLK GROUP CHANGE are de-asserted.
PATH: CONTROLS > CHANGE SPNT GROUP
SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting selects an input used to change from Setpoint Group 1 to Setpoint Group 2,
when asserted. If no group change supervision is selected, Setpoint group 2 will stay
active as long as the SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE input is asserted, and will revert to Group 1,
when this input is de-asserted.
BLOCK GROUP CHANGE
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting defines an input that can be used to block changing setpoint groups. When
the assigned input is asserted, changing from one setpoint group to the other one is
blocked.
6109
S4 CONTROLS
Figure 34: Switching setpoint groups - Logic diagram
SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE
LED: Setpoint Group 2
AND
SETPOINT
OR
Off
AND
SETPOINT
BLK GROUP CHANGE
Use Setpoint Group 2
Off
AND
ACTUAL VALUES
Group 1 Active
LED: Setpoint Group 1
OR
Default to Setpoint Group 1
AND
897791.cdr
Virtual inputs
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input
commands entered via the relay keypad, or by using communication protocols.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > VIRTUAL INPUTS.
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
The state of each virtual input can be controlled under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROL >
VIRTUAL INPUTS menu. For this purpose, each of the virtual inputs selected for control need
be Enabled under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS, and its type SelfReset or Latched specified.
If Self-Reset type was selected, entering On command will lead to a pulse of one
protection pass. To prolong the time of the virtual input pulse, one can assign it as a trigger
source to a Logic Element with a dropout timer set to the desired pulse time. If Latched
type is selected, the state of the virtual input will be latched, upon entering On command.
Refer to the logic diagram in the S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS chapter for more
details.
6110
S4 CONTROLS
Figure 35: Virtual inputs scheme logic

SETPOINT
V INPUT FUNCTION
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
AND
Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1"
From
Control
menu
LATCH
ACTUAL VALUES
Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0"

AND
V INPUT 1 NAME:
(Operand)
R
OR
V Input 1 Status
SETPOINT
Latched
AND
V INPUT 1 TYPE
Self-Reset
897774.cdr
Logic elements
The 345 relay has 16 Logic Elements available to build simple logic using the state of any
programmed contact, virtual, or remote input, or from the output operand of a protection,
or control element. Changing the state of any of the assigned inputs used as trigger
sources, will change the state of the Logic Element, unless a blocking input is present. The
logic provides for assigning up to three triggering inputs in an OR gate for Logic Element
operation, and up to three blocking inputs in an OR gate for defining the block signal.
Pickup and dropout timers are available for delaying Logic Element operation and dropout respectively. In addition, the user can define whether to use the ON, or OFF state of
the programmed element by selecting ASSERTED: On or Off.
Referring to the Logic Element logic diagram below, the Logic Element can be set to one of
four functions: Control, Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Trip. The Trip output relay will be
triggered when Trip is selected as a function, and the Logic element operates. Output relay
#1 (Trip) will not be triggered during Logic Element operation if Alarm, Latched Alarm, or
Control is selected.
The PICKUP LED will turn on upon a Logic Element pickup condition except when the
Logic Element function is selected as Control.
The ALARM LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function
selected is either Alarm, or Latched Alarm.
The TRIP LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function is
selected as Trip.
The option to trigger auxiliary output relays is provided for any of the selected Logic
Element functions.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > S4 LOGIC ELEMENTS
LE1(16) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Control, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
This setting defines the use of the Logic Element. When Trip is selected as a function, the
Logic Element will trigger Output Relay # 1 (Trip) upon operation.
6111
S4 CONTROLS
LE1(16) ASSERTED
Range: On, Off
Default: Off
This setting defines the Logic Element state On or Off to be used as an output. The
asserted On selection provides an output high when the LE is "On". If asserted Off is
selected, then the LE output will be high, when the LE is Off.
TRIGGER SOURCE 1, 2, 3
Range: Off, Any input from the list of inputs
Default: Off
Each of the three trigger sources is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input
selected from a list of inputs. This input can be a contact input, a virtual input, a remote
input, or an output flag from a protection, or control element.
TRIGGER LOGIC
Range: OR, AND
Default: OR
This setting defines trigger source operation as either OR or AND. When set to OR
any of the inputs will trigger the Logic Element. When set to AND all three sources must
be asserted before the Logic Element is triggered.
PKP DELAY
Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 0 ms
This setting specifies the pickup time delay before Logic Element operation.
RESET DELAY
Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 0 ms
This setting specifies the time delay from a reset timer that starts upon expiry of the
pickup time delay and prolongs the operation of the Logic Element until this time expires.
BLOCK 1, 2, 3
Range: Off, Any input from the list of inputs
Default: Off
Each of the three blocks is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input selected
from a list of inputs. This input can be a contact input, a virtual input, a remote input, or
an output flag from a protection, or control element, as well as an input from any of the
other seven logic inputs.
BLOCK LOGIC
Range: OR, AND
Default: OR
This setting defines block source operation as either OR or AND. When set to OR any
of the inputs will block the Logic Element. When set to AND all three sources must be
asserted before the Logic Element is blocked.
OUTPUT RELAYS 3 to 6
Any, or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Logic Element
operation. The selection of auxiliary relay outputs is available no matter whether
Control, Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
6112
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
OR
SETPOINT
Off
BLOCK 3
Off
BLOCK 2
Off
BLOCK 1
SETPOINT
AND
OR
BLOCK LOGIC
Off
SETPOINT
Off
On
LE1 ASSERTED STATE
tPKP
RST TIME DELAY
PKP TIME DELAY
SETPOINT
LED: PICKUP
tRST
LED: ALARM
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
Logic Elem 1 PKP
Logic Elem 1 DPO
897816A1.cdr
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINTS
Operate Output Relay1 (TRIP)
Message
Logic Elem 1 OP
Event Recorder
Transient Recorder
AND
TRIGGER SOURCE 3
Off
TRIGGER SOURCE 2
Off
TRIGGER SOURCE 1
SETPOINT
AND
LATCH
LED: TRIP
OR
TRIGGER LOGIC
AND
Control
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
AND
LOGIC EL FUNCTION
RESET
Command
S4 CONTROLS
Figure 36: Logic Element logic diagram
AND
OR
6113
S4 CONTROLS
The following table, from the 345 Communications Guide, shows the list of available Logic
Inputs.
6114
Code
Type
FC134C
unsigned 16 bits
Definition
Logic Element Trigger
Off
0x0040
Contact IN 1 On
0x0041
Contact IN 2 On
0x0042
Contact IN 3 On
0x0043
Contact IN 4 On
0x0044
Contact IN 5 On
0x0045
Contact IN 6 On
0x0046
Contact IN 7 On
0x0047
Contact IN 8 On
0x0048
Contact IN 9 On
0x0049
Contact IN 10 On
0x0060
Contact IN 1 Off
0x0061
Contact IN 2 Off
0x0062
Contact IN 3 Off
0x0063
Contact IN 4 Off
0x0064
Contact IN 5 Off
0x0065
Contact IN 6 Off
0x0066
Contact IN 7 Off
0x0067
Contact IN 8 Off
0x0068
Contact IN 9 Off
0x0069
Contact IN 10 Off
0x0080
Virtual IN 1 On
0x0081
Virtual IN 2 On
0x0082
Virtual IN 3 On
0x0083
Virtual IN 4 On
0x0084
Virtual IN 5 On
0x0085
Virtual IN 6 On
0x0086
Virtual IN 7 On
0x0087
Virtual IN 8 On
0x0088
Virtual IN 9 On
0x0089
Virtual IN 10 On
0x008A
Virtual IN 11 On
0x008B
Virtual IN 12 On
0x008C
Virtual IN 13 On
0x008D
Virtual IN 14 On
0x008E
Virtual IN 15 On
0x008F
Virtual IN 16 On
0x0090
Virtual IN 17 On
0x0091
Virtual IN 18 On
0x0092
Virtual IN 19 On
0x0093
Virtual IN 20 On
0x0094
Virtual IN 21 On
0x0095
Virtual IN 22 On
S4 CONTROLS
Code
Type
Definition
0x0096
Virtual IN 23 On
0x0097
Virtual IN 24 On
0x0098
Virtual IN 25 On
0x0099
Virtual IN 26 On
0x009A
Virtual IN 27 On
0x009B
Virtual IN 28 On
0x009C
Virtual IN 29 On
0x009D
Virtual IN 30 On
0x009E
Virtual IN 31 On
0x009F
Virtual IN 32 On
0x00A0
Virtual IN 1 Off
0x00A1
Virtual IN 2 Off
0x00A2
Virtual IN 3 Off
0x00A3
Virtual IN 4 Off
0x00A4
Virtual IN 5 Off
0x00A5
Virtual IN 6 Off
0x00A6
Virtual IN 7 Off
0x00A7
Virtual IN 8 Off
0x00A8
Virtual IN 9 Off
0x00A9
Virtual IN 10 Off
0x00AA
Virtual IN 11 Off
0x00AB
Virtual IN 12 Off
0x00AC
Virtual IN 13 Off
0x00AD
Virtual IN 14 Off
0x00AE
Virtual IN 15 Off
0x00AF
Virtual IN 16 Off
0x00B0
Virtual IN 17 Off
0x00B1
Virtual IN 18 Off
0x00B2
Virtual IN 19 Off
0x00B3
Virtual IN 20 Off
0x00B4
Virtual IN 21 Off
0x00B5
Virtual IN 22 Off
0x00B6
Virtual IN 23 Off
0x00B7
Virtual IN 24 Off
0x00B8
Virtual IN 25 Off
0x00B9
Virtual IN 26 Off
0x00BA
Virtual IN 27 Off
0x00BB
Virtual IN 28 Off
0x00BC
Virtual IN 29 Off
0x00BD
Virtual IN 30 Off
0x00BE
Virtual IN 31 Off
0x00BF
Virtual IN 32 Off
0x01C0
Remote IN 1 On
0x01C1
Remote IN 2 On
0x01C2
Remote IN 3 On
0x01C3
Remote IN 4 On
0x01C4
Remote IN 5 On
6115
S4 CONTROLS
Code
6116
Type
Definition
0x01C5
Remote IN 6 On
0x01C6
Remote IN 7 On
0x01C7
Remote IN 8 On
0x01C8
Remote IN 9 On
0x01C9
Remote IN 10 On
0x01CA
Remote IN 11 On
0x01CB
Remote IN 12 On
0x01CC
Remote IN 13 On
0x01CD
Remote IN 14 On
0x01CE
Remote IN 15 On
0x01CF
Remote IN 16 On
0x01D0
Remote IN 17 On
0x01D1
Remote IN 18 On
0x01D2
Remote IN 19 On
0x01D3
Remote IN 20 On
0x01D4
Remote IN 21 On
0x01D5
Remote IN 22 On
0x01D6
Remote IN 23 On
0x01D7
Remote IN 24 On
0x01D8
Remote IN 25 On
0x01D9
Remote IN 26 On
0x01DA
Remote IN 27 On
0x01DB
Remote IN 28 On
0x01DC
Remote IN 29 On
0x01DD
Remote IN 30 On
0x01DE
Remote IN 31 On
0x01DF
Remote IN 32 On
0x01E0
Remote IN 1 Off
0x01E1
Remote IN 2 Off
0x01E2
Remote IN 3 Off
0x01E3
Remote IN 4 Off
0x01E4
Remote IN 5 Off
0x01E5
Remote IN 6 Off
0x01E6
Remote IN 7 Off
0x01E7
Remote IN 8 Off
0x01E8
Remote IN 9 Off
0x01E9
Remote IN 10 Off
0x01EA
Remote IN 11 Off
0x01EB
Remote IN 12 Off
0x01EC
Remote IN 13 Off
0x01ED
Remote IN 14 Off
0x01EE
Remote IN 15 Off
0x01EF
Remote IN 16 Off
0x01F0
Remote IN 17 Off
0x01F1
Remote IN 18 Off
0x01F2
Remote IN 19 Off
0x01F3
Remote IN 20 Off
S4 CONTROLS
Code
Type
Definition
0x01F4
Remote IN 21 Off
0x01F5
Remote IN 22 Off
0x01F6
Remote IN 23 Off
0x01F7
Remote IN 24 Off
0x01F8
Remote IN 25 Off
0x01F9
Remote IN 26 Off
0x01FA
Remote IN 27 Off
0x01FB
Remote IN 28 Off
0x01FC
Remote IN 29 Off
0x01FD
Remote IN 30 Off
0x01FE
Remote IN 31 Off
0x01FF
Remote IN 32 Off
0x8002
Any Trip
0x8042
Therm O/L Trip OP
0x8044
Therm O/L Trip DPO
0x84C1
LE 1 Trip PKP
0x84C2
LE 1 Trip OP
0x84C4
LE 1 Trip DPO
0x8501
LE 2 Trip PKP
0x8502
LE 2 Trip OP
0x8504
LE 2 Trip DPO
0x8541
LE 3 Trip PKP
0x8542
LE 3 Trip OP
0x8544
LE 3 Trip DPO
0x8581
LE 4 Trip PKP
0x8582
LE 4 Trip OP
0x8584
LE 4 Trip DPO
0x85C1
LE 5 Trip PKP
0x85C2
LE 5 Trip OP
0x85C4
LE 5 Trip DPO
0x8601
LE 6 Trip PKP
0x8602
LE 6 Trip OP
0x8604
LE 6 Trip DPO
0x8641
LE 7 Trip PKP
0x8642
LE 7 Trip OP
0x8644
LE 7 Trip DPO
0x8681
LE 8 Trip PKP
0x8682
LE 8 Trip OP
0x8684
LE 8 Trip DPO
0x9001
Ph IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9002
Ph IOC1 Trip OP
0x9004
Ph IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9041
Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9042
Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP
0x9044
Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9081
Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9082
Gnd IOC1 Trip OP
6117
S4 CONTROLS
Code
6118
Type
Definition
0x9084
Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO
0x90C1
Ph TOC1 Trip PKP
0x90C2
Ph TOC1 Trip OP
0x90C4
Ph TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9101
Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9102
Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP
0x9104
Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9141
Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9142
Gnd TOC1 Trip OP
0x9144
Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9181
Ph IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9182
Ph IOC2 Trip OP
0x9184
Ph IOC2 Trip DPO
0x91C1
Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP
0x91C2
Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP
0x91C4
Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9201
Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9202
Gnd IOC2 Trip OP
0x9204
Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9241
Ph TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9242
Ph TOC2 Trip OP
0x9244
Ph TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9281
Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9282
Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP
0x9284
Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO
0x92C1
Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP
0x92C2
Gnd TOC2 Trip OP
0x92C4
Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9301
SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9302
SGnd TOC1 Trip OP
0x9304
SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9641
SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9642
SGnd IOC1 Trip OP
0x9644
SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO
0x9681
SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP
0x9682
SGnd IOC2 Trip OP
0x9684
SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO
0x9701
Pcnt Diff Trip PKP
0x9702
Pcnt Diff Trip OP
0x9704
Pcnt Diff Trip DPO
0x9741
RGF1 Trip PKP
0x9742
RGF1 Trip OP
0x9744
RGF1 Trip DPO
0x9781
RGF2 Trip PKP
0x9782
RGF2 Trip OP
0x9784
RGF2 Trip DPO
0x97C1
Inst Diff Trip PKP
S4 CONTROLS
Code
Type
Definition
0x97C2
Inst Diff Trip OP
0x97C4
Inst Diff Trip DPO
0x9801
NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP
0x9802
NSeq TOC1 Trip OP
0x9804
NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO
0x9841
NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP
0x9842
NSeq TOC2 Trip OP
0x9844
NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO
0x99C1
SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP
0x99C2
SGnd TOC2 Trip OP
0x99C4
SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO
0x9C01
LE 9 Trip PKP
0x9C02
LE 9 Trip OP
0x9C04
LE 9 Trip DPO
0x9C41
LE 10 Trip PKP
0x9C42
LE 10 Trip OP
0x9C44
LE 10 Trip DPO
0x9C81
LE 11 Trip PKP
0x9C82
LE 11 Trip OP
0x9C84
LE 11 Trip DPO
0x9CC1
LE 12 Trip PKP
0x9CC2
LE 12 Trip OP
0x9CC4
LE 12 Trip DPO
0x9D01
LE 13 Trip PKP
0x9D02
LE 13 Trip OP
0x9D04
LE 13 Trip DPO
0x9D41
LE 14 Trip PKP
0x9D42
LE 14 Trip OP
0x9D44
LE 14 Trip DPO
0x9D81
LE 15 Trip PKP
0x9D82
LE 15 Trip OP
0x9D84
LE 15 Trip DPO
0x9DC1
LE 16 Trip PKP
0x9DC2
LE 16 Trip OP
0x9DC4
LE 16 Trip DPO
0xA002
Any Alarm
0xA042
Therm Lvl Alrm OP
0xA044
Therm Lvl Alrm DPO
0xA4C1
LE 1 Alarm PKP
0xA4C2
LE 1 Alarm OP
0xA4C4
LE 1 Alarm DPO
0xA501
LE 2 Alarm PKP
0xA502
LE 2 Alarm OP
0xA504
LE 2 Alarm DPO
0xA541
LE 3 Alarm PKP
0xA542
LE 3 Alarm OP
0xA544
LE 3 Alarm DPO
6119
S4 CONTROLS
Code
6120
Type
Definition
0xA581
LE 4 Alarm PKP
0xA582
LE 4 Alarm OP
0xA584
LE 4 Alarm DPO
0xA5C1
LE 5 Alarm PKP
0xA5C2
LE 5 Alarm OP
0xA5C4
LE 5 Alarm DPO
0xA601
LE 6 Alarm PKP
0xA602
LE 6 Alarm OP
0xA604
LE 6 Alarm DPO
0xA641
LE 7 Alarm PKP
0xA642
LE 7 Alarm OP
0xA644
LE 7 Alarm DPO
0xA681
LE 8 Alarm PKP
0xA682
LE 8 Alarm OP
0xA684
LE 8 Alarm DPO
0xABC1
HI Amb Temp PKP
0xABC2
HI Amb Temp OP
0xABC4
HI Amb Temp DPO
0xAC01
LO Amb Temp PKP
0xAC02
LO Amb Temp OP
0xAC04
LO Amb Temp DPO
0xAC41
Self Test Alrm PKP
0xAC42
Self Test Alarm OP
0xAD01
R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD02
R1 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD04
R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD41
R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD42
R2 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD44
R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD81
BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAD82
BKR1 Fail Alrm OP
0xAD84
BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO
0xADC2
BKR Stat Fail OP
0xAEC2
BKR2 Stat Fail OP
0xAF41
BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAF42
BKR2 Fail Alrm OP
0xAF44
BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO
0xB001
Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB002
Ph IOC1 Alarm OP
0xB004
Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB041
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB042
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB044
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB081
Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB082
Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP
0xB084
Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB0C1
Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP
S4 CONTROLS
Code
Type
Definition
0xB0C2
Ph TOC1 Alarm OP
0xB0C4
Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB101
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB102
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB104
Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB141
Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP
0xB142
Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP
0xB144
Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO
0xB181
Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB182
Ph IOC2 Alarm OP
0xB184
Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB1C1
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB1C2
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB1C4
Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB201
Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB202
Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP
0xB204
Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB241
Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB242
Ph TOC2 Alarm OP
0xB244
Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB281
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB282
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB284
Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB2C1
Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP
0xB2C2
Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP
0xB2C4
Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO
0xB301
SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB302
SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB304
SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB641
SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB642
SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB644
SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB681
SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB682
SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP
0xB684
SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB701
Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP
0xB702
Pcnt Diff Alrm OP
0xB704
Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO
0xB741
RGF1 Alarm PKP
0xB742
RGF1 Alarm OP
0xB744
RGF1 Alarm DPO
0xB781
RGF2 Alarm PKP
0xB782
RGF2 Alarm OP
0xB784
RGF2 Alarm DPO
0xB7C1
Inst Diff Alrm PKP
0xB7C2
Inst Diff Alrm OP
0xB7C4
Inst Diff Alrm DPO
6121
S4 CONTROLS
Code
6122
Type
Definition
0xB801
NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB802
NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP
0xB804
NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB841
NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB842
NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB844
NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xB9C1
SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP
0xB9C2
SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP
0xB9C4
SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO
0xBC01
LE 9 Alarm PKP
0xBC02
LE 9 Alarm OP
0xBC04
LE 9 Alarm DPO
0xBC41
LE 10 Alarm PKP
0xBC42
LE 10 Alarm OP
0xBC44
LE 10 Alarm DPO
0xBC81
LE 11 Alarm PKP
0xBC82
LE 11 Alarm OP
0xBC84
LE 11 Alarm DPO
0xBCC1
LE 12 Alarm PKP
0xBCC2
LE 12 Alarm OP
0xBCC4
LE 12 Alarm DPO
0xBD01
LE 13 Alarm PKP
0xBD02
LE 13 Alarm OP
0xBD04
LE 13 Alarm DPO
0xBD41
LE 14 Alarm PKP
0xBD42
LE 14 Alarm OP
0xBD44
LE 14 Alarm DPO
0xBD81
LE 15 Alarm PKP
0xBD82
LE 15 Alarm OP
0xBD84
LE 15 Alarm DPO
0xBDC1
LE 16 Alarm PKP
0xBDC2
LE 16 Alarm OP
0xBDC4
LE 16 Alarm DPO
0xC042
Output Relay 3 On
0xC082
Output Relay 4 On
0xC0C2
Output Relay 5 On
0xC102
Output Relay 6 On
0xC142
Self-Test Rly 7 On
0xC182
Output Relay 1 On
0xC1C2
Output Relay 2 On
0xC202
BKR Connected
0xC2C2
BKR2 Connected
0xC4C1
LE 1 PKP
0xC4C2
LE 1 OP
0xC4C4
LE 1 DPO
0xC501
LE 2 PKP
0xC502
LE 2 OP
S4 CONTROLS
Code
Type
Definition
0xC504
LE 2 DPO
0xC541
LE 3 PKP
0xC542
LE 3 OP
0xC544
LE 3 DPO
0xC581
LE 4 PKP
0xC582
LE 4 OP
0xC584
LE 4 DPO
0xC5C1
LE 5 PKP
0xC5C2
LE 5 OP
0xC5C4
LE 5 DPO
0xC601
LE 6 PKP
0xC602
LE 6 OP
0xC604
LE 6 DPO
0xC641
LE 7 PKP
0xC642
LE 7 OP
0xC644
LE 7 DPO
0xC681
LE 8 PKP
0xC682
LE 8 OP
0xC684
LE 8 DPO
0xC882
Setpoint Group2 On
0xCA02
52a Contact OP
0xCA42
52b Contact OP
0xCA82
Reset OK
0xCCC2
BKR Stat Open
0xCD02
BKR Stat Clsd
0xCD42
Setpoint Group1 On
0xDA02
BKR2 52a Cont OP
0xDA42
BKR2 52b Cont OP
0xDA82
BKR2 Stat Open OP
0xDA84
BKR2 Stat Open DPO
0xDAC2
BKR2 Stat Clsd OP
0xDAC4
BKR2 Stat Clsd DPO
0xDB02
Trip BKR 1 OP
0xDB04
Trip BKR 1 DPO
0xDB42
Trip BKR 2 OP
0xDB44
Trip BKR 2 DPO
0xDC01
LE 9 PKP
0xDC02
LE 9 OP
0xDC04
LE 9 DPO
0xDC41
LE 10 PKP
0xDC42
LE 10 OP
0xDC44
LE 10 DPO
0xDC81
LE 11 PKP
0xDC82
LE 11 OP
0xDC84
LE 11 DPO
0xDCC1
LE 12 PKP
0xDCC2
LE 12 OP
6123
S4 CONTROLS
Code
6124
Type
Definition
0xDCC4
LE 12 DPO
0xDD01
LE 13 PKP
0xDD02
LE 13 OP
0xDD04
LE 13 DPO
0xDD41
LE 14 PKP
0xDD42
LE 14 OP
0xDD44
LE 14 DPO
0xDD81
LE 15 PKP
0xDD82
LE 15 OP
0xDD84
LE 15 DPO
0xDDC1
LE 16 PKP
0xDDC2
LE 16 OP
0xDDC4
LE 16 DPO
0xE002
Any Block
0xE042
Therm O/L Blck OP
0xE182
Output Relay 1 BLK
0xE1C2
Output Relay 2 BLK
0xE882
Group Change Blk
0xF002
Ph IOC1 Block
0xF042
Ntrl IOC1 Block
0xF082
Gnd IOC1 Block
0xF0C2
Ph TOC1 Block
0xF102
Ntrl TOC1 Block
0xF142
Gnd TOC1 Block
0xF182
Ph IOC2 Block
0xF1C2
Ntrl IOC2 Block
0xF202
Gnd IOC2 Block
0xF242
Ph TOC2 Block
0xF282
Ntrl TOC2 Block
0xF2C2
Gnd TOC2 Block
0xF302
SGnd TOC1 Block
0xF642
SGnd IOC1 Block
0xF682
SGnd IOC2 Block
0xF702
Pcnt Diff Block
0xF742
RGF1 Block
0xF782
RGF2 Block
0xF7C2
Inst Diff Block
0xF802
NSeq TOC1 Blk
0xF842
NSeq TOC2 Blk
0xF9C2
SGnd TOC2 Block
0xFB02
Trip BKR1 Blk
0xFB42
Trip BKR2 Blk
0xFB82
2nd Hmnc Diff Blk
0xFBC2
5th Hmnc Diff Blk
S4 CONTROLS
Winding breaker failure

There are two Breaker Failure functions, one per winding breaker. The BF function monitors
the phase currents after a trip command from a protection element is initiated. If any
phase current is above the set current level after the BF DELAY timer/timers expire, a
Breaker Failure will be declared, and will operate the selected output relays. The Breaker
Failure scheme also provides the setup for BF initiate from the external input via Contact
Input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.
The operation of the filter that reduces the overreaching effect of the assymetrical offset
currents will cause the measured current to ramp down to zero after the breaker trips. It is
strongly recommended that a margin of 1.5 power cycle time is added to the expected
breaker time-to-trip time for the BF DELAY1 and BF DELAY 2 timers.
NOTE:
NOTE
W1 BREAKER FAIL logic is triggered only upon operation of a protection element with a
function set to Trip, and the CT INPUT associated with Winding 1 CT - i.e. CT(W1). Similarly,
the W2 BREAKER FAIL logic will be triggered only upon operation of a protection element
with the function set to Trip, and the CT INPUT set to CT(W2).
When the 345 relay allows the configuration of only one breaker failure function, this
function is always associated with the Winding 1 breaker, and will be triggered upon
operation of any protection element with a FUNCTION setting set to Trip, and the CT INPUT
set to CT(W1).
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > W1(W2) BREAKER FAIL
BF FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
If set to Alarm, the ALARM LED will flash upon detection of the Breaker Failure condition,
and will turn off upon clearing the condition. If Latched Alarm is selected, the ALARM
LED will flash during the Breaker Failure condition, and will remain ON when the
condition clears. The ALARM LED turns OFF upon initiation of a "Reset" command.
BF CURRENT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting selects the current level to be monitored by the BF logic after the
programmed time delays.
BF EXT INITIATE
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting selects the external initiate signal to launch the Breaker Failure function.
BF TIME DELAY 1
Range: 0.03 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.1 s
This timer starts when breaker trip command is issued from any of the protection
elements.
BF TIME DELAY 2
Range: 0.00 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This timer does not start before a trip condition is recognized, BF TIMER DELAY 1 has
expired, and at least one of the phase currents is above the BF CURRENT setpoint.
6125
S4 CONTROLS
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Breaker Failure
detection. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the
6126
SETPOINT
Range: Contact Input,

Virtual Input, Remote Input,
Logic Element
Off = 0
OR
BF EXT INITIATE
SETPOINT
Trip
From Protection operation
Phase C current (Ic)
Phase B current (Ib)
Phase A current (Ia)
Ic > PICKUP
Ib > PICKUP
Ia > PICKUP
SETPOINT
BF CURRENT
SETPOINT
tPKP
RUN
BF TIME DELAY 1
SETPOINT
tPKP
RUN
BF TIME DELAY 2
LATCH
LED: ALARM
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINTS
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
W1(W2) Breaker Failure
OR
Phase Currents
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
Disabled = 0
BF FUNCTION
RESET
Command
S4 CONTROLS
Figure 37: Breaker Failure logic diagram
AND
AND
OR
OR
6127
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
S5 Inputs/Outputs
Figure 38: Inputs/Outputs menu
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
S5 CONTACT INPUTS
SELECT DC VOLTAGE
CONTACT INPUT 1
S5 DEBOUNCE TIME
CONTACT INPUT 1
CONTACT INPUT 2
...
CONTACT INPUT 2
CONTACT INPUT 10
CONTACT INPUT 3
DEBOUNCE TIME
...
CONTACT INPUT 10
S5 OUTPUT RELAYS
RLY 1 W1 BKRTRIP
RLY 2 W2 BKRTRIP
RELAY 3 AUXILIARY
S5 RLY 1 W1 BKR TRIP

RLY 1 SEAL-IN
BLOCK RLY 1 TRIP
RELAY 4 AUXILIARY
RELAY 5 AUXILIARY
RELAY 6 AUXILIARY
S5 RLY 2 W2 BKR TRIP

RLY 2 SEAL-IN
BLOCK RLY 2 TRIP

S5 RELAY 3 AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
S5 VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
VIRTUAL INPUT 3
VIRTUAL INPUT 4
S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VI 1 NAME
VI 1 FUNCTION
VI 1 TYPE
...
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 32
VI 32 NAME
897768A1.cdr
VI 32 FUNCTION
VI 32 TYPE
Contact inputs
The 345 relay is equipped with ten (10) contact inputs, which can be used to provide a
variety of functions such as for circuit breaker control, external trips, blocking of protection
elements, etc. All contact inputs are wet type contacts (refer to the 345 typical wiring
diagram) that require an external DC voltage source. The voltage threshold (17V, 33V, 84V,
166V) is selectable, and it applies for all ten contact inputs.
6128
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The contact inputs are either open or closed with a programmable debounce time to
prevent false operation from induced voltage. Because of de-bouncing, momentary
contacts must have a minimum dwell time greater than half power frequency cycle. The
debounce time is adjustable by the user.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT INPUTS
SELECT DC VOLTAGE
Range: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Default: 84 V
CONTACT INPUT 1
Range: Select alpha-numeric name
Default: Bkr1 52a (CI#1)
CONTACT INPUT 2
Default: Bkr1 52b (CI#2)
CONTACT INPUT 3
Default: Bkr2 52a (CI#3)
CONTACT INPUT 4
Default: Bkr2 52b (CI#4)
CONTACT INPUT X [5 to 10]
Default: Input X
DEBOUNCE TIME
CONTACT INPUT X [1 TO 10]

Range: 1 to 64 ms
Default: 2 ms
Each of the contact inputs 5 to 10, can be named to reflect the function it represents within
the application. Up to 18 alpha-numeric characters are available for names.
The debounce time is used to discriminate between oscillating inputs. The state will be
recognized if the input is maintained for a period consisting of the protection pass plus the
debounce setting.
Contact Input 1 and Contact Input 2 are named by the factory as 52a and 52b respectively
and are used for monitoring the Winding1 breaker open/close state when wired to the
Winding 1 breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b.
Contact Input 3 and Contact Input 4 are named by the factory as 52a and 52b respectively
and are used for monitoring the Winding2 breaker open/close state when wired to the
Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b.
Output relays
The 345 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical relays: two special relays
designed for Winding 1 Breaker trip and Winding 2 Breaker trip, four general purpose
relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6), and a Critical Failure relay. The special purpose relays have
fixed operating characteristics and the general purpose relays can be configured by the
user.
Operation of the two Trip output relays is designed to be controlled by the state of the
circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact.
6129
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Output Relay 1 - W1
breaker "Trip"
The Trip relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding to the
command. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special relays, it
will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is confirmed by a
breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset.
If the initiating feature resets, but the breaker does not change state, the output relay
will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds.
If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts, 52a nor 52b, is programmed to a contact
input, the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker
Failure feature, or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets.
If a delay is programmed for the Trip contact seal-in time, then this delay is added to
the reset time. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms.
52a Contact
Configured
52b Contact
Configured
Relay Operation
Yes
Yes

open breaker.
Yes
No
Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an

open breaker.
No
Yes

open breaker.
No
No
Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay

expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled), or 100
ms after the feature causing the trip resets.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 1 W1 BKRTRIP
RLY1 SEAL-IN
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.04 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 1 Trip output, thus
extending its pulse width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts
reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for
interrupting the coil current.
BLOCK RLY 1 TRIP
Range: Disabled, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Disabled
This setting defines a block to the Trip Output relay. When the selected input is asserted,
the Trip Output relay will be blocked.
Output Relay 2 - W2
breaker "Trip"
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 2 W2 BKRTRIP
RLY2 SEAL-IN
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.04 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 2 Trip output, thus
extending its pulse width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts
reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for
interrupting the coil current.
6130
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
BLOCK RLY 2 TRIP

Range: Disabled, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Disabled
This setting defines a block to the Close Output relay. When the selected input is
asserted, the Close Output relay will be blocked. The block function can be useful for
breaker maintenance purposes.
6131
6132
SETPOINT (BREAKER)
OR
RESET (Input)
Breaker Control
SETPOINT (BF)
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
BF FUNCTION:
SETPOINT (BF)
100 ms
timer
TRIP
2 sec
timer
RUN
tRST
BF TIME DELAYS
RUN
timed reset
No feedback
change
OR
RESET (Communications)
LED: TRIP
Trip request
OR
RESET (Relay Keypad)
Remote Open
Local Open (Relay Keypad)
AND
TRIP (Protection, Controls)
Relay ( Ready = 1)
At least one
contact
programmed
Breaker Open
LED: BREAKER OPEN
OR
(Selected Input, ON = 1)
AND
Disbaled = 0
BLOCK TRIP RLY
SETPOINT
52a contact (Breaker Close = 1)
AND
Contact input
52a CONTACT
SETPOINT (BREAKER)
52b contact (Breaker Open = 1)
Contact input
52b CONTACT
SETPOINT
tRST
Trip Output Seal-In time
897775.cdr
TRIP
To Breaker
Failure
TRIP
Operate
Output Relay 1
(TRIP)
LED: TRIP
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 39: Relay 1 "TRIP" and Relay #2 "TRIP" logic diagram
OR
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
OR
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Auxiliary Output
Relays 3 to 6
The 345 relay is equipped with four auxiliary output relays numbered from 3 to 6. All these
relays are available for selection for operation of protection, control, or maintenance
features. Each auxiliary relay can be selected as either Self-Reset, or Latched. If the SelfReset type is selected, the output relay will be energized as long as the element is in
operating mode and will reset when the element drops out. If the Latched type is selected,
the output relay will stay energized, after the element dropout, and will be de-energized
upon the reset command.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RELAY 3(6) AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
Range: Self Reset, Latched
Default: Self Reset
Figure 40: Auxiliary relays
RESET (Relay Keypad)
RESET (Communications)
OR
AND
RESET (Input)
Breaker Control
SETPOINT
OR
Latched
OR
AND
RELAY (3-6) AUXILIARY

OUTPUT TYPE
Operate Aux
Output Relay ( 3 - 6 )
Self-Reset
AND
Message &
Event Recorder
Relay( Ready = 1)
AND
Assigned aux. outputs:

From Protection Feature
OR
From Control Feature
897777.cdr
From Maintenance Feature
Virtual inputs
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input
commands entered via the relay keypad, or by using communication protocols.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
6133
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
VI x NAME
Range: Select Alpha-Numeric Name
Default: Virtual IN x
VI x FUNCTION
Range: Disabled/Enabled
Default: Disabled
The Virtual Input is enabled and ready to be triggered when set to Enabled. All virtual
inputs will appear under the S4 CONTROLS > SETPOINTS > S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS menu.
VI x TYPE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset
When the Self-Reset type is selected, the Virtual Input will be evaluated for one
protection pass only, upon On initiation and it will reset. When the Latched type is
selected, the virtual input will keep the state On until reset command Off is initiated.
See also the Virtual Inputs section under S4 CONTROLS, on how to trigger a virtual input
signal state.
NOTE:
NOTE
Virtual input programming begins with enabling the Virtual Input Function, and selecting
the Virtual Input Type Self-Reset or Latched under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS >
VIRTUAL INPUTS. Next, the user can assign a command On/Off to the enabled Virtual Input
under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS. Referring to the Virtual Inputs logic
diagram below, a Virtual Input type can be selected to be either Self-Reset, or Latched.
When Self-Reset is selected and the On command is executed, the virtual input is
evaluated as a pulse at a rate of one protection pass. To prolong the time of the virtual
input pulse, one can assign it as a trigger source to a logic element with a dropout timer
set to the desired pulse time. Selecting the Latched type, will latch the virtual input state,
when the On command is executed.
The "On" state of the Virtual Input will not be retained in the case of cycling of the relay
control power supply.
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 41: Virtual inputs scheme logic

SETPOINT
V INPUT FUNCTION
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
AND
Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1"
From
Control
menu
LATCH
ACTUAL VALUES
Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0"

AND
V INPUT 1 NAME:
(Operand)
R
OR
V Input 1 Status
SETPOINT
Latched
Self-Reset
6134
AND
V INPUT 1 TYPE
897774.cdr
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Remote inputs
Remote Inputs are available for programming under the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.
Refer to the 345 Communications Guide for details.
Remote outputs
Remote Inputs are available for programming under the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.
Refer to the 345 Communications Guide for details.
6135
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
6136
Digital Energy

Chapter 7: Maintenance
Maintenance
Information about the relay and the breaker can be obtained through the features
included in the Maintenance page.
Figure 1: Maintenance main menu
71
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
M1 RELAY INFO
M3 BKR MAINTENANCE
M4 BKR MONITOR
M3 W1 BKRTRIP COIL
M1 RELAY INFO
RLY1 COIL FUNCTION
RELAY NAME
RLY1 COIL DELAY
ORDER CODE
M5 RELAY MAINT
MAIN FIRMWARE REV
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
MAIN BUILD DATE

MAIN BUILD TIME
MAIN BOOT REVISION
BYPASS BKR STATUS

OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
MAIN BOOT DATE

MAIN BOOT TIME
COMM FIRMWARE REV
COMM BUILD DATE
COMM BUILD TIME
COMM BOOT REVISION
M3 W2 BKRTRIP COIL
RLY2 COIL FUNCTION
COMM BOOT DATE
RLY2 COIL DELAY
COMM BOOT TIME
BYPASS BKR STATUS
SERIAL NUMBER
OUTPUT RELAY 3
ETHERNET MAC ADR
...
FPGA VERSION
OUTPUT RELAY 6
M3 BKR MAINTENANCE
W1 BKRTRIP COIL
W2 BKRTRIP COIL
M4 BKR MONITOR
W1 BKR TRIP COIL
M5 AMBIENT TEMP
AMBIENT TEMP
W2 BKR TRIP COIL
HI ALARM LEVEL
LOW ALARM LEVEL
M5 RELAY MAINT
AMBIENT TEMP
HYSTERESIS LEVEL
TIME DELAY
OUTPUT RELAY 3
OUTPUT RELAY 4
897761A1.cdr
72
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
OUTPUT RELAY 5
ENTER FACT. PSWD
OUTPUT RELAY 6
M1 RELAY INFORMATION
M1 Relay information
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M1 RELAY INFO
RELAY NAME
Range: alpha-numeric name of up to 18 characters
Default: Transformer Name
ORDER CODE
345-EP0G0HEMNN3EDN
This screen shows the relay order code.
MAIN FIRMWARE REV
1.41
This screen shows the relay firmware revision.
MAIN BUILD DATE
Aug 16 2010
This screen shows the relay firmware build date.
MAIN BUILD TIME
16:12:32
This screen shows the relay firmware build time.
MAIN BOOT REVISION
1.20
This screen shows the relay boot code revision.
MAIN BOOT DATE
Dec 11 2009
This screen shows the relay boot code date.
MAIN BOOT TIME
10:44:54
This screen shows the relay boot code time.
COMM FIRMWARE REV
1.40
This screen shows the relay communication firmware revision.
COMM BUILD DATE
Aug 16 2010
This screen shows the relay communication firmware build date.
COMM BUILD TIME
16:59:27
This screen shows the relay communication firmware build time.
COMM BOOT REVISION
1.30
This screen shows the relay communication boot code revision.
COMM BOOT DATE
Apr 7 2010
This screen shows the relay communication boot code date.
73
M1 RELAY INFORMATION
COMM BOOT TIME

16:22:41
This screen shows the relay communication boot code time.
SERIAL NUMBER
ML0T09000001
Each 345 relay has a unique Serial Number.
ETHERNET MAC ADR
00.A0.F4.08.A0.E9
Each 345 relay has a unique Mac Address.
FPGA VERSION
1.00
74
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
M3 Breaker maintenance
W1 (W2) Breaker trip coil
The Trip coil monitoring is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on the Form A output
relays: RLY1 W1 BKR TRIP and RLY2 W2 BKR TRIP. The voltage monitor is connected across
the Form A contact, and effectively the relay detects healthy current through the circuit.
An external jumper must be made between terminals A2 and A3 for Output Relay 1
(RLY1 W1 BKR TRIP) coil monitoring and "B$" and "B5" for Output Relay 2 (RLY2 W2 BKR TRIP)
coil monitoring.
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle
currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays), the circuit integrity for the
Trip coil is effectively normal. If the Trip coil circuit gets disconnected, or if in general a high
resistance is detected in the circuitry, a Trip alarm will be set and the ALARM and
MAINTENANCE LEDs will be on.
Example 1: The figure below shows the connections of the breaker trip coil to the relays
trip output relay for voltage monitoring of the trip circuit.
Figure 2: Trip Coil circuit with voltage monitoring
DC +
DC +

External
jumper
A2
External
jumper
B4
B3
A4
V
A3
B5
52a
contact
52a
contact
Trip
Coil
Trip
Coil
897786.cdr
DC -
DC -
Example 2: Some applications require that the Trip coil be monitored continuously,
regardless of the breaker position (open or closed). This can be achieved by connecting a
suitable resistor (see the table) across breaker auxiliary contact 52a in the trip circuit. With
such connections, the trickle current will be maintained by the resistor when the breaker is
open. For these applications the setting for BYPASS BKR STATUS should be set to
ENABLED.
75
Figure 3: Trip circuits with continuous monitoring

DC +

External
jumper
A2
B3
V
A3
52a contact
By-pass
resistor
Trip
Coil
897787.cdr
DC DC +

External
jumper
B4
A4
V
B5
52a contact
By-pass
resistor
Trip
Coil
897788.cdr
DC -
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE > W1(W2) BKR TRIP
RLY1(2) COIL FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
Selecting Alarm, or Latched Alarm, enables the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor monitoring function.
The ALARM and MAINTENANCE LEDs will light up upon detection of a RLY1(2) coil
circuitry problem. The ALARM LED will flash upon RLY1(2) Coil Monitor operating
condition, with the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset,
when the condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the ALARM LED will flash during
the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor condition, and will stay ON after the condition clears, until the
reset command is initiated. Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate
when the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor function is selected as Alarm, or Latched Alarm.
76
RLY1(2) COIL DELAY

Range: 1 to 10 sec in steps of 1 sec
Default: 5 s
This setting defines the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor Delay, before targets appear on the display,
ALARM and MAINTENANCE LEDs light up on the front panel, and selected output
relays operate.
BYPASS BKR STATUS
Default: Disabled
Set the BYPASS BKR STATE to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across the
breaker auxiliary contact for continuous RLY1(2) circuit integrity monitoring. The circuits
will be monitored regardless of breaker position. When BYPASS BKR STATE is set to
Disabled, monitoring of the RLY1(2) coil will be blocked when the breaker is open.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any, or all, of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon detection of RLY1(2)
Coil, or a RLY1(2) coil circuitry problem. The selection of the relay outputs operation is
available no matter whether the Alarm, or Latched Alarm, function is selected.
77
78
SETPOINT
Disable = 0
Enabled = 1
BYPASS BKR STATE
SETPOINT
52a/b INPUTS
Breaker Closed
Trip
From output relay 1(2)

tPKP
Trip Coil Montr PKP
Message
TRIP COIL DELAY:
SETPOINT
LED:
MAINTENANCE
Transient Recorder
Event Recorder
Trip Coil Montr OP
Message
LED: ALARM
898020.cdr
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINT:
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
LATCH
OR
Trip Coil current above

threshold
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
Disabled = 0
TRIP COIL FUNCTION:
RESET
Command
Figure 4: Trip coil monitoring logic diagram
AND
AND
OR
AND
OR
M4 BREAKER MONITOR
M4 Breaker monitor
The status of the breaker trip coils, as well as the trip circuits, can be monitored under
MAINTENANCE > M4 BKR MONITOR. In the case where a breaker coil or circuit fails, the
relay will display the message "Unhealthy" for the corresponding coil.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M4 BKR MONITOR
W1 BKR TRIP COIL
Healthy
Range: Healthy, Unhealthy
W2 BKR TRIP COIL
Healthy
Range: Healthy, Unhealthy
79
M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
M5 Relay maintenance
Ambient temperature
The SR3 has a temperature monitor feature that measures the ambient temperature
around the chassis of the relay. The relay extrapolates the ambient temperature from an
internal temperature sensor inside the product. This feature can be used to signal the
customer that the product is being subjected to temperatures that can degrade the
product life and proper action should be initiated. For example the air conditioning,
heating or ventilation system should be checked.
The purpose of the feature is to measure the immediate temperature around the product.
There are several factors that can alter the measurement that need to be considered for
the application of this feature.
Any forced air flow or obstructions that can interrupt even distribution of the ambient
temperature.
Installation of the relay should be for normal operation (CT, VT, inputs, outputs).
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE > AMBIENT TEMP

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the ambient temperature functionality. If the operating condition is
satisfied when Alarm is selected as the function, the ALARM LED will flash upon the
activating condition, and will automatically reset when the condition clears. If Latched
Alarm is selected, the LED ALARM will flash upon the activating condition, and will stay
ON after the condition clears, until a reset command is initiated. Any assignable output
relays can be selected to operate when this function is enabled.
HI ALARM LEVEL
Range: 20C to 80C in steps of 1C
Default: 60C
This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature
Alarm high logic. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains above this level.
LOW ALARM LEVEL
Range: -40C to 20C in steps of 1C
Default: 10C
This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature
Alarm low logic. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains below this level.
HYSTERESIS LEVEL
Range: 2C to 10C in steps of 1C
Default: 2C
This setting allows the user to select the dropout level for the feature.
TIME DELAY
Range: 1 to 60 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 1 sec
This timer starts when either the high or low level thresholds have exceeded their
respective levels.
710
897771.cdr
Latched Alarm
Alarm
SETTING
AMB TEMP ALARM
Disabled = 0
Off = 0
Off = 0
Remote Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Emergency Restart
SETTINGS
S4 CONTROLS
RUN
RUN
AND
AND
T < Low Temp
T > High Temp
Hi Alarm Level
Low Alarm Level
SETTINGS
AMB TEMP ALARM
Emergency Restart Input

Lockout Reset Input
Remote Reset Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
OR
AND
OR
OR
SETTING
TIME DELAY
RUN
tRST
AND
AND
AND
AND
LATCH
LATCH
OR
OR
Operate
output
relays upon
selection
Amb Temp LO Alarm

State: Operate
Amb Temp LO Alarm

State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
Amb Temp LO Alarm OP
Any Alarm OP
Amb Temp LO Alarm PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
Amb Temp HI Alarm

State: Operate
Amb Temp HI Alarm

State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
Amb Temp HI Alarm OP
Any Alarm OP
Amb Temp HI Alarm PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
Output Relay 6
Output Relay 5
Output Relay 3
Output Relay 4
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Ambient Temperature
Alarm operation.
Figure 5: Ambient Temperature Alarm logic diagram
711
712
Digital Energy

Appendix
Change notes
Manual Revision history
Table 1: Revision History
MANUAL P/N
RELEASE DATE
1601-9098-A1
12 February 2010
1601-9098-A2
6 December 2010
1601-9098-A5
9 December 2011
1601-9098-A6
29 February 2012
1601-9098-A7
14 September 2012
1601-9098-A8
13 June 2013
1601-9098-A9
12 July 2013
1601-9098-AA
21 October 2013
Table 2: Major Updates to SR345-AA

Page Number
CHANGES
Change manual revision number to AA

Chapter 6
Transformer percent differential, BREAK 2 description
APPENDIX - 1
CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX
Table 3: Major Updates to SR345-A9

Page Number
CHANGES
Change manual revision number to A9

Chapter 6
Clarify SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE Details

Page Number
CHANGES

Chapter 1
Updated Testing and Certification table
General
Minor Corrections

Page Number
CHANGES

Chapter 1
Add Case design option N (relay with non-drawout design)
Chapter 2
Add dimensions, mounting and wiring for non-drawout unit
General
Minor Corrections

Page Number
CHANGES

Chapter 2
Revise Control Power parameters

Page Number
CHANGES

Chapter 1
Add Comm option 3E to Order Code Table
Chapter 7
Add Ambient Temp section (Ch 7 - Maintenance)
General
Increase number of Logic Elements to 16
General
Minor Corrections
General
Add support for additional safety/protection elements
Table 8: Major Updates for SR345-A3 and A4

Page Number
CHANGES
Minor changes
APPENDIX - 2

345man Aa

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

345man Aa

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

345man Aa

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE

2013 GE Multilin Incorporated. All rights reserved.

GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - 345

This product cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European

Safety words and definitions

Mechanical installation ............................................................................................... 2 - 1

Drawout unit withdrawal and insertion.....................................................................2 - 7

Electrical installation .................................................................................................... 2 - 8

Phase sequence and transformer polarity...............................................................2 - 13

Front control panel interface.................................................................................... 3 - 2

LED status indicators..........................................................................................................3 - 5

Software setup ................................................................................................................ 3 - 9

Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the relay ........................................................3 - 13

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Configuring Ethernet communications ....................................................................3 - 15

Working with setpoints and setpoint files ................................................................ 3 - 17

Upgrading relay firmware ............................................................................................... 3 - 24

Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features .................................................................. 3 - 26

5. QUICK SETUP FRONT CONTROL

Quick Setup menu ..........................................................................................................5 - 3

Setpoints Main Menu ....................................................................................................6 - 1

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL

S1 Relay setup ................................................................................................................. 6 - 5

Event recorder .......................................................................................................................6 - 41

S4 Controls ........................................................................................................................ 6 - 108

Virtual inputs...........................................................................................................................6 - 133

M4 Breaker monitor ...................................................................................................... 7 - 9

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Ambient temperature ........................................................................................................ 7 - 10

Change notes ...................................................................................................................Appendix - 1

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL

345 Transformer Protection System

Withdrawable small footprint saves on rewiring and space.

Large four-line LCD display, LEDs, and keypad

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM

Description of the 345 Transformer Protection

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM

Figure 1: Single line diagram

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM

Table 1: Protection Elements

Restricted Ground Fault

Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent

Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent

Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent

Phase Timed Overcurrent

Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent

Neutral Timed Overcurrent

Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM

Figure 2: Main menu

XFMR PERCENT DIFF

RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR

RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR

GND TOC1 PICKUP

GND TOC1 CURVE